Adt Focus

)2&863/86
$
&RPPHUFLDO)LUHDQG%XUJODU\
6HFXULW\6\VWHP
ZLWK6FKHGXOLQJ
,QVWDOODWLRQDQG6HWXS*XLGH
35(/,0,1$5<
-8/<
K3471-1V1 4/01
.
Differences Between the FOCUS 200 PLUS, and FOCUS 200 PLUS A Phase 1 Systems
Item FOCUS 200 PLUS (472462) FOCUS 200 PLUS (472462A) PHASE 1
Number of Groups 8 8
Number of Points 255 255
Number of 99 255
Operating Panel
Users
Number of Access 255 999

Card Users
Number of 16 (8 per Communication Group) 16 (8 per Communication Group)

Operating Panels
Built-in Hardwired 8 Hardwired Points 8 Hardwired Points

Points • EOLR supervision using a 2k resistor • EOLR supervision using a 2k resistor
• Support of normally-open or normally- • Support of normally-open or normally-
closed sensors closed sensors
• Up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors each on • Up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors each on
points 1 and 2 (32 total) points 1 and 2 (32 total)
• Points 3 and 4 may be set for a style “D” • Points 3 and 4 may be set for a style “D”
configuration configuration
• Point 8 may be configured as a bell box • Point 8 may be configured as a bell box
tamper tamper
History Log • Total of 512 events • Total of 1024 events

Capacity • May print 60 or 500 events • May print 60 or 1000 events
RS-485 Buses 2 2
SIM /PID Gateways 8 8
Access Control Supports 8 Access Control Interface Units Supports 8 Access Control Interface Units
Printer Interface Supports 8 Printers Supports 8 Printers

Units • 1 Supervised • 1 Supervised
• 7 Unsupervised • 7 Unsupervised
Built-in SIM Loop Not Supported • Assign to Gateway Unit #9

• Supports all SIM devices
Built-in Output 8 Output Triggers 8 Output Triggers

Triggers • Each output may be programmed to any of • Each output may be programmed to any of
the output point types the output point types
• May be used to trigger Long Range Radio • May be used to trigger Long Range Radio
• May be used to trigger a relay • May be used to trigger a relay
• Output 3 may be configured for cabinet • Output 3 may be configured for cabinet
tamper tamper
Dialer • Main dialer is built-in • Main dialer is built-in

• Secondary dialer (472402A) is an add-on • Secondary dialer (472402A) is an add-on
module module
• Supports ADEMCO Contact ID formats • Supports ADEMCO Contact ID formats
iii
Item FOCUS 200 PLUS (472462) FOCUS 200 PLUS (472462A) PHASE 1
ADT AC • Add-on module (472491) • Add-on module (472491 or 472491D)
Communicator
• Supports ADT SIA format only • Supports ADT SIA format only
Module
DES Encryption Not Supported Supported on AC Communicator module

(472491D)
Service Telco Jack Located on the main PC board (Control Unit) Located on the main PC board (Control Unit)
Transformer Supports 18VAC and 16.5VAC transformers Supports 18VAC and 16.5VAC transformers
• 18VAC (50VA) transformer provides 1.5A • 18VAC (50VA) transformer provides 1.5A
max output current max output current
• 18VAC (72VA) transformer provides 2.3A • 18VAC (72VA) transformer provides 2.3A
• 16.5VAC (50VA) transformer provides 1A • 16.5VAC (50VA) transformer provides 1A
• 16.5VAC (82VA) transformer provides 1.8A • 16.5VAC (82VA) transformer provides 1.8A
Use 18VAC transformer for all new installations. Use 18VAC transformer for all new installations.
Use 16.5VAC transformer for retrofit only. Use 16.5VAC transformer for retrofit only.
Use P4 Jumper to select current draw. Use P4 Jumper to select current draw.
Relay Outputs • 2 built-in bell outputs (bell 1 & bell 2) rated • 2 built-in bell outputs (bell 1 & bell 2) rated
at 12VDC, 1.7A. at 12VDC, 1.7A.
• Built-in auxiliary relay that may be set for • Built-in auxiliary relay that may be set for
Dry (28VAC/VDC, 2.0A) or Wet (12VDC, Dry (28VAC/VDC, 2.0A) or Wet (12VDC,
1.7A) operation. 1.7A) operation.
Built-in 4-Wire Uses the auxiliary relay Uses the auxiliary relay
Smoke Detector • Program the relay output point type for 4- • Program the relay output point type for 4-
Reset wire smoke detector reset (output point type wire smoke detector reset (output point type
23) 23)
• Set Jumper P3 for wet operation • Set Jumper P3 for wet operation
Cabinet Vista-100 cabinet Vista-100 cabinet
Wireless (RF) Supports all ADEMCO 5800 Series transmitters Supports all ADEMCO 5800 Series transmitters
Support except 5804BD, 5827BD, and 5827 except 5804BD, 5827BD, and 5827
Cabinet Back Supports back tamper for commercial burglary Supports back tamper for commercial burglary
Tamper applications applications
Cabinet Tamper Mounted on the side of the cabinet and Mounted on the side of the cabinet and
connects to the tamper input (J5 trigger 3) connects to the tamper input (J5 trigger 3)
Auto Cabinet Tamper is automatically bypassed when the Tamper is automatically bypassed when the
Tamper Bypass system goes into Service Mode system goes into Service Mode
Primary Phone Can be edited from either the downline loader or Can be edited from either the downline loader or
Number the operational panel the operational panel
Programming
Earth Ground Fault Is a built-in function and is mapped to point 245 Is a built-in function and is mapped to point 245
Detection
SRAM 128k bytes 128k bytes
iv
The FOCUS 200 PLUS System Installation Vital Information
Use the following table to record the vital information for this installation. We recommend you leave
this table with the control unit.
Job Location
System Number (SS)
Group Number (GG)
Instrument Number (II)
ADEMCO Compass downloading
software Phone Number
CCC Phone Number
CCC Communication Type (check the
appropriate boxes) ADT SIA (FSK) CID AC Module
v
Fire Alarm Application Note
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About Fire Alarm Codes

There are various fire alarm codes written by industry associations and institutes; for
example, the National Fire Alarm Protection Association writes the National Life Safety
Code, also known as NFPA 101. Other fire alarm codes written by other associations or
institutes, such as BOCA and ICBO, specify whether or not a given building or structure
type is required to have a fire alarm system and, if so, what fire alarm system functions must
be supported. Each state and local government jurisdiction adopts in part or in entirety
these codes, which become that jurisdiction’s code.
In addition, there are standards that govern the design, installation, and service of fire alarm
systems. For instance, the use and placement of smoke and fire detection devices is specified
in the National Fire Alarm Code. The most popularly adopted code is the National Fire
Alarm Code, commonly referred to as NFPA 72.
Code Enforcement
Codes are enforced by the person who is designated by the state or local government as the
“Authority Having Jurisdiction,” also simply referred to as the “AHJ.” The AHJ has the
delegated power to review and interpret the code as it may pertain to a particular structure.
The AHJ must interpret codes because structures often are not uniform. Therefore, the AHJ
will review, for example, a fire alarm design for the correct number of smoke detectors and
their placement in relation to the structure’s layout.
vi
Table of Contents
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Fire Alarm Application Note .......................................................................................... vi
About Fire Alarm Codes.....................................................................................................................................................vi
Code Enforcement ..............................................................................................................................................................vi
List of Figures ...................................................................................................................xi

Conventions Used in This Manual .............................................................................. xiii
SECTION 1 General Description ................................................... 1-1

About the FOCUS 200 PLUS System............................................................................................................................. 1-1
Prominent Features......................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
SECTION 2 Installing the Control Unit ....................................... 2-1

About the Control Unit.................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
Before Installing the System ........................................................................................................................................... 2-1
Mounting the Cabinet ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Installing the Cabinet Lock ............................................................................................................................................ 2-2
Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing............................................................................................................................. 2-3
Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing .................................................................................................................. 2-4
Installing the Control's Circuit Board ........................................................................................................................... 2-4
SECTION 3 Installing the Operating Panels............................... 3-1

About the Operating Panels ............................................................................................................................................ 3-1
Installing the Operating Panels ..................................................................................................................................... 3-1
Addressing the Operating Panels ................................................................................................................................... 3-3
Operating Panel Program Mode..................................................................................................................................... 3-4
SECTION 4 Basic Hardwired Points ............................................ 4-1

About the Hardwired Points ........................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Wiring the Hardwired Points ......................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Point 8 Bell Box Tamper Configuration......................................................................................................................... 4-5
SECTION 5 Gateways ...................................................................... 5-1

About the Gateways......................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
PID Gateway ................................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
Installing the PID Gateway ............................................................................................................................................ 5-5
Installing Sensors to the PID.......................................................................................................................................... 5-7
SIM Gateway................................................................................................................................................................. 5-13
Installing the SIM Gateway.......................................................................................................................................... 5-15
Installing SIM and SIM Sensors.................................................................................................................................. 5-17
RF Gateway (472490).................................................................................................................................................... 5-22
Installing the RF Gateway............................................................................................................................................ 5-23
Installing the RF Receiver ............................................................................................................................................ 5-23
5800 Series Transmitters .............................................................................................................................................. 5-25
Long Range Radio Gateway ......................................................................................................................................... 5-26
Installing the LRR Gateway ......................................................................................................................................... 5-27
Long Range Radio Trouble Conditions ........................................................................................................................ 5-29
Gateway Off-Normal Conditions .................................................................................................................................. 5-29
vii
Table of Contents
SECTION 6 Built-in SIM Loop ....................................................... 6-1

About the SIM Loop ........................................................................................................................................................ 6-1
SIM Loop Supervision .................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
Installing SIM and SIM Sensors.................................................................................................................................... 6-2
Installing a Keyswitch to the SIM Loop ....................................................................................................................... 6-13
SECTION 7 Bell Outputs and Auxiliary Relay ............................ 7-1

About the Bell Outputs and Auxiliary Relay.................................................................................................................. 7-1
Output Functions ............................................................................................................................................................ 7-2
Installing the External Sounders ................................................................................................................................... 7-4
Programming the Bell Outputs ...................................................................................................................................... 7-6
SECTION 8 System Communication ............................................. 8-1

About the System Communication ................................................................................................................................. 8-1
Connecting the Telephone Lines ..................................................................................................................................... 8-2
Paging Service ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-4
Description of ADEMCO Contact ID Format................................................................................................................. 8-4
Types of Customer Care Center Service.......................................................................................................................... 8-9
Table of CCC Signaling ................................................................................................................................................ 8-11
Programming the System Communication Options .................................................................................................... 8-12
SECTION 9 AC Communicator Module ........................................ 9-1

About the AC Communicator Module............................................................................................................................. 9-1
Installing the AC Communicator Module ...................................................................................................................... 9-2
Using Multiple AC Communicator Modules .................................................................................................................. 9-3
Programming for the AC Communicator Module.......................................................................................................... 9-5
SECTION 10 J5 Output Triggers ................................................... 10-1

About the J5 Output Triggers....................................................................................................................................... 10-1
Types of Output Points.................................................................................................................................................. 10-1
Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment........................................................................................................................ 10-4
Programming the Output Triggers............................................................................................................................... 10-6
SECTION 11 Access Control ........................................................... 11-1

About Access Control..................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
Installing the Access Control Interface Unit ................................................................................................................ 11-4
Using Readers, Keyloks, and Operating Panels........................................................................................................... 11-6
Access Control Options................................................................................................................................................ 11-13
Maintenance of the Access Control System ................................................................................................................ 11-19
SECTION 12 History Log................................................................. 12-1

About the History Log ................................................................................................................................................... 12-1
Installing the Printer Interface Unit ............................................................................................................................ 12-1
Displaying and Printing the History Log..................................................................................................................... 12-3
SECTION 13 Power Requirements................................................. 13-1

About Powering the FOCUS 200 PLUS ....................................................................................................................... 13-1
Providing Adequate Voltage for Each Gateway, SIM Loop, and Operating Panel..................................................... 13-1
Determining Maximum Length of Gateway Trunk Cable ........................................................................................... 13-9
Determining the Control Unit Power Supply Load.................................................................................................... 13-10
Determining the Size of the Standby Battery ............................................................................................................. 13-14
Installing a Power Supply .......................................................................................................................................... 13-15
Connecting AC Power and Earth Ground to the Control Unit .................................................................................. 13-16
Installing the Standby Battery ................................................................................................................................... 13-17
Powering Up the Control Unit .................................................................................................................................... 13-19
viii
Table of Contents
SECTION 14 Input and Output Point Types ................................ 14-1

About the Input and Output Point Types ..................................................................................................................... 14-1
Input Point Types.......................................................................................................................................................... 14-1
Output Point Types ....................................................................................................................................................... 14-9
SECTION 15 Programming ............................................................ 15-1

About Programming the System................................................................................................................................... 15-1
Mechanics of Programming .......................................................................................................................................... 15-2
Programming Names for the BA Groups ..................................................................................................................... 15-2
Programming Point Data ............................................................................................................................................. 15-3
Programming the BA Groups’ Turn-Off Data.............................................................................................................. 15-7
Programming the System Communication Options .................................................................................................... 15-7
SECTION 16 Scheduling................................................................. 16-1

About Scheduling .......................................................................................................................................................... 16-1
Permanent Schedules.................................................................................................................................................... 16-2
Temporary Schedules.................................................................................................................................................... 16-3
Holiday Schedules......................................................................................................................................................... 16-4
Ambush Schedule.......................................................................................................................................................... 16-4
Scheduling Options....................................................................................................................................................... 16-4
SECTION 17 Downline Loading .................................................... 17-1

About Downline Loading .............................................................................................................................................. 17-1
Programming the Control Unit for Downline Loading ............................................................................................... 17-1
Downline Loading the Customized Data...................................................................................................................... 17-2
Verifying the Downline Loaded Data ........................................................................................................................... 17-4
SECTION 18 Real-Time Clock........................................................ 18-1

About the Real-Time Clock ........................................................................................................................................... 18-1
Setting the Time and Date ............................................................................................................................................ 18-1
Setting Daylight Saving Time ...................................................................................................................................... 18-2
SECTION 19 ID Codes ..................................................................... 19-1

About the ID Codes........................................................................................................................................................ 19-1
Service Code .................................................................................................................................................................. 19-2
Fire Marshall Code ....................................................................................................................................................... 19-2
Duress Signal ................................................................................................................................................................ 19-3
Programming ID Codes ................................................................................................................................................ 19-3
Summary of ID Code Capabilities and Privileges ....................................................................................................... 19-5
SECTION 20 System Operation...................................................... 20-1

About Operating the System ......................................................................................................................................... 20-1
Action Menus................................................................................................................................................................. 20-2
Operating Panel Modes................................................................................................................................................. 20-5
ID Codes ........................................................................................................................................................................ 20-6
Control Unit and BA Group Options............................................................................................................................ 20-7
Recycling Exit Delay ................................................................................................................................................... 20-12
Alarm/Trouble Memory.............................................................................................................................................. 20-13
SECTION 21 Testing the System .................................................... 21-1

About Testing the System.............................................................................................................................................. 21-1
Operating Panel Tests................................................................................................................................................... 21-1
Local Tests..................................................................................................................................................................... 21-2
Transmission Tests ....................................................................................................................................................... 21-3
Testing the Printer ........................................................................................................................................................ 21-4
Finishing the Installation............................................................................................................................................. 21-4
Instructing the Customer .............................................................................................................................................. 21-4
ix
Table of Contents
SECTION 22 Specifications............................................................ 22-1

Electrical/Mechanical Specifications........................................................................................................................... 22-1
Installation Criteria ...................................................................................................................................................... 22-2
Approvals....................................................................................................................................................................... 22-3
Access Control Interface Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 22-3
SECTION 23 Equipment.................................................................. 23-1

Basic System Equipment .............................................................................................................................................. 23-1
SIM Sensors .................................................................................................................................................................. 23-5
Index......................................................................................................................... Index-1
Limitations of This Alarm System .............................................................................. A-3
x
List of Figures
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Figure 2-1: Installing Cabinet Lock ................................................................................................................................. 2-2

Figure 2-2: Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations.................................................................................................... 2-3
Figure 2-3: Cabinet Door Tamper Wiring ........................................................................................................................ 2-3
Figure 2-3: Mounting the PC Board ................................................................................................................................. 2-4
Figure 3-1: Details of the Operating Panel Circuit Board ............................................................................................... 3-2
Figure 4-1: 2-Wire Smoke Detector Connected to Point 1 (also Point 2, Terminals 27 and 28) ..................................... 4-3
Figure 4-2: 4-Wire Smoke Detector Connections Points 1-8............................................................................................. 4-4
Figure 4-3: Style "D" Configuration on Points 3 and 4.................................................................................................... 4-4
Figure 5-1: PID Gateway Module ..................................................................................................................................... 5-4
Figure 5-2: PID Wiring Connections to System-Powered Sensors................................................................................. 5-10
Figure 5-3a: Basic Sensor Connections to PID................................................................................................................. 5-11
Figure 5-3b: Basic Sensor Connections to PID................................................................................................................. 5-11
Figure 5-4: Connections of BA Sensors with Field Wiring Terminals to PID............................................................... 5-12
Figure 5-5: Using a PID to Turn On a PA400W Sounder ............................................................................................. 5-12
Figure 5-6: SIM Gateway Module .................................................................................................................................. 5-14
Figure 5-7: SIM Wiring to System Powered and Nonpowered Sensors ........................................................................ 5-18
Figure 5-8: Connection for a Gateway Loop Powered SIM Sensor................................................................................ 5-19
Figure 5-9: SIM Wiring to a Horn and Strobe ............................................................................................................... 5-19
Figure 5-10: SIM Wiring to a Sensor ............................................................................................................................... 5-20
Figure 5-11: SIM Connections to a Vault Vibration Sensor ............................................................................................ 5-20
Figure 5-12: SIM Connections to a 4-Wire/2-Wire Adapter ............................................................................................ 5-21
Figure 5-14: RF Gateway Wiring Connections................................................................................................................. 5-22
Figure 5-16: RF Receiver DIP Switch Settings ................................................................................................................ 5-24
Figure 5-17: LRR Gateway Wiring Connections .............................................................................................................. 5-27
Figure 6-1: SIM Wiring to System-Powered and Nonpowered Sensors .......................................................................... 6-5
Figure 6-2: Connection for a SIM Loop Powered SIM Sensor ......................................................................................... 6-6
Figure 6-3: SIM Wiring to a Horn and Strobe ................................................................................................................. 6-6
Figure 6-4: Wiring of SIM Horn/Strobe .......................................................................................................................... 6-7
Figure 6-5: SIM Wiring to a Sensor ................................................................................................................................. 6-7
Figure 6-6: SIM Connections to a Vault Vibration Sensor .............................................................................................. 6-8
Figure 6-7: SIM Connections to a 4-Wire/2-Wire Adapter .............................................................................................. 6-8
Figure 6-8: Wiring of the 4208U to the SIM Loop............................................................................................................ 6-9
Figure 6-9: Wiring of the 4209U to the SIM Loop............................................................................................................ 6-9
Figure 6-10: Wiring of the 4208SNF to the SIM Loop as a Point Expander................................................................... 6-10
Figure 6-11: Wiring of the 4208SNF to the SIM Loop as a Class B to Class A Converter ............................................. 6-10
Figure 6-12: Wiring a Horn/Strobe SIM to a 4209U for Resetting Glassbreak Detectors ............................................. 6-11
Figure 6-13: Loop Interface Module ................................................................................................................................. 6-12
Figure 6-14: Loop Interface Module Wiring to Powered Sensor ...................................................................................... 6-12
Figure 6-15: Loop Interface Module Wiring to Lacing/Foil and Non-powered Sensor .................................................. 6-12
Figure 6-16: Keyswitch Wiring Connections .................................................................................................................... 6-13
Figure 6-17: 4297 Extender Module ................................................................................................................................. 6-14
Figure 6-18: SIM Loop Connections Using One 4297 Extender Module......................................................................... 6-14
Figure 6-19: SIM Loop Connections Using Multiple Extender Modules......................................................................... 6-15
Figure 7-1: External Sounder Connections to the Bell Outputs ...................................................................................... 7-6
xi
Figure 7-2: External Sounder Connections to the Auxiliary Relay.................................................................................. 7-6
Figure 8-1: Installing the 472402A Backup Dialer.......................................................................................................... 8-3
Figure 9-1: 472491 AC Communicator Module Wiring ................................................................................................... 9-3
Figure 9-2: 472491D AC Communicator Module Wiring ................................................................................................ 9-3
Figure 9-3: AC Communicator Module Wiring Using AC Telephone Lines.................................................................... 9-4
Figure 9-4: AC Communicator Module Wiring Using DVACS or RS232 Port ............................................................... 9-4
Figure 9-5: AC Communicator Module Wiring Using DC Telephone Lines ................................................................... 9-5
Figure 10-1: Configuration of the 7720P to the J5 Output Triggers ............................................................................... 10-5
Figure 10-2: Configuration of the 7830R to the J5 Output Triggers ............................................................................... 10-5
Figure 10-3: Configuration of the 7835C to the J5 Output Triggers ............................................................................... 10-5
Figure 10-4: Configuration of the 7920SE to the J5 Output Triggers............................................................................. 10-6
Figure 11-1: Access Control Interface Unit (ACIU).......................................................................................................... 11-3
Figure 11-2: Typical Installation Using Card Reader or Keyreader............................................................................. 11-10
Figure 11-3: Typical Installation Using a Keylok.......................................................................................................... 11-10
Figure 11-4: Modifying ACIU for Operation with Dorado 7401 or 7901 Card Reader ................................................ 11-11
Figure 11-5: Wiring Connections for a Manual Access Pushbutton or Exit Pushbutton.............................................. 11-12
Figure 12-1: Printer Interface Unit .................................................................................................................................. 12-2
Figure 13-1: Load Diagram for RS-485 Bus .................................................................................................................... 13-6
Figure 13-2: Load Diagram for RS-485 Bus with Power Supply .................................................................................... 13-7
Figure 13-3: Determining the Voltage Drop on the RS-485 Bus...................................................................................... 13-8
Figure 13-4: Determining Maximum Length of Quad Trunk for PID Gateway (no horn/strobes)................................ 13-9
Figure 13-5: Determining the Maximum Length of Quad Trunk for SIM/PID Gateway with Horn/Strobes............ 13-10
Figure 20-1: Operating Panel ........................................................................................................................................... 20-1
Summary of Connections .......................................................................................................Inside Back Cover
xii
Conventions Used in This Manual
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Before you begin using this manual, it is important that you understand the meaning of the following symbols (icons).
These notes include specific information that must be followed if you are installing this system for a UL
UL Listed application.
These notes include information that you should be aware of before continuing with the installation, and
which, if not observed, could result in operational difficulties.
This symbol indicates a critical note that could seriously affect the operation of the system, or could cause
damage to the system. Please read each warning carefully. This symbol also denotes warnings about
physical harm to the user.
Product model numbers (unless noted otherwise) represent ADT products. A 6-digit Stock Code Number replaces the 7-
digit type number used for ADT devices. For the convenience of the reader, when the 6-digit number is used for a given
item, the formerly used type number will be included in parenthesis. This type number is how the devices and systems
are referenced in UL reports and procedures.
xiii
xiv
S E C T I O N 1
General Description
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ About the FOCUS 200 PLUS System
♦ Prominent Features
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About the FOCUS 200 PLUS System

The FOCUS 200 PLUS is a UL Listed commercial burglar and fire alarm system that provides:
• A control unit circuit board that contains a non-volatile chip for storing the programmed data, so the data will not be
lost if the system loses all power.
• Control of the system via user-friendly operating panels (up to 16 for the system). The operating panel provides four
lines of interactive messages and menus to guide the user through simple selection processes.
• Ability to control all BA groups from a single operating panel.
• Up to 255 points of protection that are divided among input and output points.
• Up to 8 BA groups.
• 2 built-in supervised bell outputs for compliance with local FA requirements, as well as for use with BA applications.
• Built-in auxiliary relay interface, which can be set for either wet or dry contact or 4-wire smoke detector reset
operation.
• A built-in communicator that supports an optional backup dialer or an optional AC communicator module for
monitoring purposes to a Customer Care Center.
• Eight built-in programmable output triggers.
• Up to 999 users, of which the first 255 may use ID codes and/or card/keys to access the system. The remaining are
card/key users only.
• The ability to downline load the programming from a remote location using the ADEMCO Compass Downloader.
• Default data parameters stored in a read-only memory (ROM). This default data may be transferred from the ROM
to the SRAM by issuing a command at an operating panel.
Prominent Features
Below is a list of the prominent features of the system. For a detailed explanation of any of the features, see the
appropriate section.
Point Characteristics
• Eight built-in points, including two 2-wire smoke • A Fixed BA point can be set for 24-hour type alarm.
detector loops. • Unique holdup alarm type that permits triggering
• Built-in programmable style "D" fire loop. an alarm as well as tripping a suspicion camera.
• Janitorial function that enables point-shunting of • Partial turn-off of vault sensors (vibration and/or
movable protection points in areas being cleaned audio sensors) to avoid nuisance alarms due to
during the closed period. construction or other noise/vibration occurring
• Provision for hostage signaling. during the premises’ open period.
• Ambush protection against hide-ins. • Detection of carbon monoxide.
1-1
FOCUS 200 PLUS Installation and Setup Guide
Expansion Capabilities User Functions

• Two RS-485 buses used for communicating with • Customer can determine names that will appear on
and powering the gateways, operating panels, operating panel displays for each point of
printer interface units, and Access Control protection, each BA group, and each ID code.
Interface Units. • Capability of applying two-man rule for more
• Up to eight gateways (SIM, PID, and RF) that secure applications.
serve as interfaces for sensors and output devices. • Customer can remotely test motion detection
• A built-in SIM loop for interfacing with sensors and sensors, vault sensors, BA groups, and connected
output devices. bells, eliminating the need for walk testing.
• Ability to add supervised bell outputs via bell PID's • BA groups can be interlocked in different ways for
in compliance with local FA requirements, as well controlling on/off status.
as for use with BA applications. • Ability to turn ON the system in the STAY mode.
Fire System Power
• Waterflow monitoring in the fire system. • Continuous supervision and identification of faults
• Ability to set all fire points (smoke detector associated with low battery voltage, AC power, and
circuits) for fire with verification. internal or external communication.
• An option to set the fire bell to either timeout or no • Upon a prolonged AC Loss, system automatic
timeout. shutdown and backup battery drop to
approximately 10 volts, to prevent false alarms on
Communication peripheral devices.
• Capability of commanding up to eight individual • Self-test of control unit upon power turn-on.
relay-controlled functions from the CCC on ADT • Ability to disable the battery charger test.
SIA dialer format.
• Ability to arm the system with a system low
• Inhibition of swinger-related alarm transmissions battery condition present.
after three swingers have been detected, to
minimize nuisance traffic at the CCC. History Log
• Ability to setup an output to activate only if a • A 1024-event history log for recording events such
communication failure on the dialer is present. as alarms, troubles, openings, and closings, all with
• Dialer phone numbers programmable up to 32 the time and date of the occurrence.
digits. • A real-time clock for keeping track of time of day,
• Ability to uniquely identify Telco line troubles day of week, and date, for controlling time related
(built-in and backup dialers, AC Communicator). functions. It automatically accommodates Daylight
Saving Time (where used) and leap year, if
• Can send reports to 8 different paging services.
programmed.
• Can interface to the 7800ADT for Long Range
• Capability of multiple hard-copy printers (8) to be
Radio communication.
connected to the system via printer interface units.
Scheduling • Recording of access control capability for each BA
• Scheduling of events to automatically occur at a group and access events in the history log.
specific time of day, such as openings and closings.
• Each BA group can be assigned permanent and
temporary opening and closing schedules.
• A close timer for no-close supervision for night-
drop/mail-drop types of unscheduled openings and
automatic teller machines (ATM's).
• Ability to force auto-arm a BA Group with an off-
normal condition present.
1-2
S E C T I O N 2
Installing the Control Unit

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ About the Control Unit ♦ Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing
♦ Before Installing the System ♦ Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing
♦ Mounting the Cabinet ♦ Installing the Control's Circuit Board
♦ Installing the Cabinet Lock
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About the Control Unit

The control unit is the main circuit board of the system. It provides:
• Dual microprocessor firmware IC chips (16-bit primary MPU, 8-bit secondary).
• A non-volatile SRAM IC chip for storing the programmed data, so the data will not be lost if the
system loses all power.
• Dual RS-485 buses for connecting the operating panels, gateways, printer interfaces and ACIU.
• 8 built-in hardwired points.
• 8 built-in output triggers.
• A built-in communicator and mounting space for an optional backup dialer or an optional AC
Communicator Module.
• 2 built-in supervised bell outputs and an auxiliary relay.
• A built-in SIM loop that serves as an interface for sensors and output devices.
Before Installing the System

Before installing the control unit or any components of the system, go through the following steps to
make sure the system will meet the customer’s needs and that power requirements and wire runs will
ensure proper operation.
System Layout Diagram
1. Make a preliminary diagram showing the location of each component on the RS-485 buses. Include
the control unit, the RS-485 bus run(s), the gateways, operating panels, etc., as well as any power
units that may be required.
2. Indicate the cable distance between each device on the RS-485 bus run(s) and indicate the current
drawn by each device.
3. Review the power requirement information that is presented in the paragraphs that follow and
finalize the system layout diagrams, making changes as required.
4. Check that the system components to be installed and their location are in agreement with the
system layout for the installation to ensure proper operation of the system.
5. Verify the electrical connections to the CWG and 24-hour continuous-duty AC power outlet.
6. Determine any conditions within the premises that will require special attention; i.e., safety,
adverse environmental conditions, repairs to deteriorated points, etc.
7. Advise the data group of the following:
• Any changes in conditions affecting the customization database.
• Any corrections in the premises telephone number, address, or customer name.
2-1
Power Requirements
The FOCUS 200 PLUS System uses the control unit power supply as the primary power source.
Because the system power is distributed over the RS-485 buses, it is important to keep the voltage
drops along the buses to a minimum.
Good installation practices will go a long way toward minimizing both the effect of the voltage drops
and the need for adding an external power unit.
Where additional power is needed, a 472372 Power Supply Module (in a 472381 Power Unit Housing)
can be introduced at sections of the bus. The power supply will provide power for its associated device
and for additional sections of the RS-485 bus, as well. For more information regarding power
requirements, see the Power Requirements and the Specifications sections.
Mounting the Cabinet

Mount the control cabinet to a sturdy wall using fasteners or anchors (not supplied) in a clean, dry area
that is not readily accessible to the general public. The back of the control cabinet has 4 holes for this
purpose. The location must be convenient for the routing of all wiring, and for future repair and
maintenance.
The control unit must be located in a protected area that is armed, unless occupied. If not occupied at any
time, the area must be under 24-hr. protection. This precaution does not apply to any control unit that is
protected against attack.
Be careful when removing knockouts to avoid damaging the control board. Remove the control board from
the control unit, if necessary. Do not drill mounting holes through the backshell. Place the backshell on the
wall, mark the locations of the holes, remove the backshell, and drill the holes.
Installing the Cabinet Lock

Use an ADEMCO No. N6277 Cam Lock and No. P3422-2 Clip for universal commercial cabinets.
RETAINER CLIP
1. Before mounting the circuit board, (NOTE POSITION)
remove the metal knockouts for the

wiring entry that you will be using.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE LOCKED RETAINER
SLOTS
RETAINER
THE KNOCKOUTS AFTER THE CLIP
CIRCUIT BOARD HAS BEEN

INSTALLED. UNLOCKED
2. Fasten the control unit to the

mounting surface, providing shims or
a backboard to prevent distortion of CABINET DOOR BOTTOM
the backshell.
Figure 2-1: Installing Cabinet Lock
For UL installations that are intended to provide certificated burglary service, the VISTA-ULAP UL Attack
UL Proof Kit must be used. Refer to Figure 2-2 Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations for the requirements
and installation.
2-2
Section 2 – Installing the Control Unit
Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing

For a Grade A mercantile premises listed installation, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Mount the clip-on tamper switch (supplied) to the cabinet's right-side wall (see Figure 2-2)
2 Wire it to the cabinet tamper input as shown in Figure 2-3 and enable the Cabinet
Tamper option.
Note: Cabinet tampers are automatically bypassed when the system is in Service mode.
2 Use a bell with a tamper-protected housing such as the ADEMCO AB12 or equivalent.
The bell housing's tamper switch and inner tamper linings must be wired to point 8 and
enable the Bell Box Tamper option via the downline loader.
3 Assign point 8 to a BA Group. Program it for Supervisory (SPV).
4 Run all wiring between the bell and control unit in conduit. Remaining wires do not need
to be run in conduit.
5 Run all wiring not in conduit through the knockout openings on the bottom or back of the
cabinet.
6
Plug all unused knockouts using the disc plugs and carriage bolts (see Figure 2-2).
7 Fasten the cabinet door to the cabinet back-box using the 18 one-inch-long Phillips-head
screws after all wiring, programming, and checkout procedures have been completed.
CABINET ATTACK RESISTANCE CONSIDERATIONS

(Shows typical local Grade A listing installation)
RUN BELL WIRES
IN CONDUIT
PLUG THIS
KNOCKOUT
CLIP-ON DOOR
TAMPER SWITCH
CABINET
PC MOUNTING HOLE
BOARD (4 PLACES)
TO PLUG AN UNUSED KNOCKOUT OPENING, REMOVE KNOCKOUT AND

INSTALL A PAIR OF DISC PLUGS AND A CARRIAGE BOLT AS SHOWN:
PLUG THIS PLUG THIS
KNOCKOUT KNOCKOUT DISC PLUGS (DIMPLES IN DISC
KNOCKOUT PLUG SHOULD REGISTER INSIDE
OPENING KNOCKOUT OPENING)
BACK CARRIAGE BOLT

TAMPER
HEX NUT AND

LOCK WASHER CABINET SIDE WALL
PLUG THIS (OUTSIDE)
RUN ALL REMAINING
KNOCKOUT WIRES THROUGH HERE
Figure 2-2: Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations
Green Wire (Trigger Output 3) Door Tamper Switch
Connect to J5 on 472412 Cable Black Wire

the control unit board
Figure 2-3: Cabinet Door Tamper Wiring
The cabinet tamper is automatically bypassed when the system is placed in Service mode and
automatically unbypassed when the system is taken out of Service mode.
2-3
Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing

For a Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault listed installation, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Follow the instructions given previously for Grade A Mercantile Premises listing.
2 Mount a shock sensor or a back tamper (112) to the control's back-box and wire it to the
cabinet tamper input (output 3 of J5 Triggers) and enable the Cabinet Tamper option. If a
shock sensor is used, follow the manufacturer's instructions for proper sensor mounting.
Installing the Control's Circuit Board

Perform the following steps to install the circuit board:
Step Action
1 Hang the three mounting clips on the raised cabinet tabs. To avoid damage to the clip
when the mounting screws are tightened, make sure the clip orientation is exactly as
shown in Figure 2-3. This will also avoid problems with insertion and removal of the PC
board.
2 Insert the top of the circuit board into the slots at the top of the cabinet. Make certain that
the board rests in the slots as indicated.
3 Swing the base of the board into the mounting clips and secure the board to the cabinet
with the accompanying screws.
Make certain that the mounting screws are tight. This ensures a good ground connection between the PC
board and the cabinet. Also, dress field wiring away from the microprocessor (center) section of the PC
board. Use the 2 loops on the left and right side walls of the cabinet for anchoring field wiring using tie
wraps. These steps are important to minimize the risk of panel RF interference with television reception.
DETAIL A
SIDE VIEW OF
BOARD INSERTED
INTO SLOTS
DETAIL B
SIDE VIEW OF SHORT
MOUNTING CLIPS
(TYP.)
hi_end_mnt-PCB
Figure 2-3: Mounting the PC Board
2-4
S E C T I O N 3
Installing the Operating Panels

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ About the Operating Panels ♦ Addressing the Operating Panels
♦ Installing the Operating Panels ♦ Operating Panel Programming Mode
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About the Operating Panels

The FOCUS 200 PLUS system is controlled via a user-friendly operating panel. The system supports
up to 16 operating panels. The operating panel provides:
• An interactive 19-character four-line LCD (17 characters per line) display that operates in a
manner similar to an automatic teller machine (ATM).
• A numeric keypad similar to one on a TouchTone phone.
• An internal sounder that annunciates for alarms, troubles, when a key is pressed, etc.
One operating panel can control all BA groups. Multiple operating panels may be needed when:
• An installation involves two or more BA groups with separate entrance/exit paths.
• An operating panel is installed inside of a separately protected area within the premises.
• An operating panel is used in conjunction with an access point.
Operating Features
Help screens are available to assist the user in operating the system. The operating features of the
operating panel are as follows:
• Menus are employed to guide the user through the various operating procedures. Choices are
shown on the screen with an arrow (>) that lines up with buttons on the screen.
• The display screen and the numeric keypad become illuminated when any key is pressed.
• The customer can use the operating panel to change certain programming such as descriptors,
access codes, privilege levels, and permanent, temporary, and holiday schedules.
• The operating panel performs an automatic self-test whenever power is applied. If it passes the
power-on test, it emits a single beep, flashes the backlight, and displays the following message:
ADT INTERACTIVE KEYPAD WAITING FOR COMM.
Installing the Operating Panels

Each operating panel connects to the control unit via a cable known as an RS-485 bus. The control unit
accommodates two independent RS-485 buses of 4000 feet each. The total end-to-end reach can be
extended to 8,000 feet (16,000 for both buses) by using a 472430 RS-485 Repeater at the end of each
bus. Current loading and voltage drop considerations may limit the maximum allowable wire lengths
on each RS-485 bus to less than 4000 feet. See the Power Requirements section for additional details.
RS-485 Cable Types

Two types of bus cable are used. Each is a 4-conductor multi-gauge cable as described in the table
below, differing only in the type of insulation.
• 494465 (B6445) Cable - used as general-purpose.
• 494467 (B6467) Cable - used specifically in air-handling plenums.
3-1
Cable Run Considerations

The safeguarding of RS-485 bus cable(s) from physical damage is vital to continuous uninterrupted
operation of the FOCUS 200 PLUS System. Keep the following guidelines in mind when running the
cable:
• Bus cable(s) should be routed to take advantage of the shortest possible length of cable, to
minimize voltage drop.
• Any junction boxes (test terminals) that are required can be placed to be accessible from the floor.
Junction boxes can also be used to sectionalize the bus, and in this way serve as an aid during
troubleshooting.
• There are no bus-terminating jumpers on the control unit circuit board. Each device on the bus has
a terminating jumper. The bus requires a terminating jumper in the last device of the RS-485 bus
run. Also, neither of the buses by itself can be used in a dual-run configuration (two runs from a
common connector).
Do not locate the operating panel in any area where the temperature may drop below 32° F (0° C) or rise
above 122° F (50° C). At temperatures below 32° F, the display will fade and the glass may crack.
Temperatures above 122° F will affect the display output.
JUMPER E1
(REMOVE JUMPER TO
DISCONNECT BLACK WIRE 4 FLYING LEADS
TERMINATION RESISTOR) FOR FIELD WIRING
U4 U3 U2 U1
EXTERNAL TAMPER
CONNECTION
Figure 3-1: Details of the Operating Panel Circuit Board
Mounting and Wiring the Operating Panel

To mount and wire the operating panel, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Locate the operating panel(s) where the user may conveniently turn BA protection to Day
Set or Nite Set. The right-hand side of the operating panel should be located no closer than
4” from a side wall.
2 Run the buses as required and make sure to appropriately tag them, so that it can be
readily identified, if maintenance becomes necessary. Do not T-tap the RS-485 cable.
3 Connect the RS-485 bus cable to the control unit (see table below).
Wire Gauge/Color Function RS-485 #1 RS-485 #2
Terminal Terminal
#19 AWG Blue RS-485 17 21
#19 AWG Yellow RS-485 18 22
#16 AWG Red + 12 VDC Power 19 23
#16 AWG Black DC Return Power 20 24
4 Remove the nylon screw on the bottom of the operating panel and separate the back plate
from the front of the unit.
3-2
Section 3 – Installing the Operating Panels
Step Action
5 Mount the back plate to the wall using any of the appropriate holes.
6 Connect the operating panel wires to the RS-485 cable matching color to color.
7 Each device that connects to the RS-485 bus has a terminating jumper designated E1 (see
Figure 3-1). Inserting the jumper connects a terminating resistor; removing the jumper
disconnects the resistor. Insert the jumper on the last device on each RS-485 bus. All other
devices on the RS-485 bus run must have the jumper removed.
8 Reconnect the front plate to the back plate and reinsert the nylon screw.
9 Install the instruction label at the rear of the operating panel in the slot provided.
10 Repeat the steps for each operating panel.
Addressing the Operating Panels

Each operating panel must be addressed with a communication group number and a unit number for
proper communication with the control unit. The group number and unit number serve to supervise the
panel, permitting the control unit to periodically address each panel and verify a response.
There are two group numbers (numbers 00 and 01) that are reserved for the operating panels (the
communication group default value is number 31). The unit numbers available are 0 through 7. We
recommend that the unit numbers start with the default value 0 for the first operating panel in the
communication group, and continue with 1 for the second panel, and so on, up to unit number 7.
NOTE: The control unit must be powered up to address the operating panels.
Addressing Considerations
Be aware of the following considerations when addressing the operating panels:
• One operating panel can control all BA groups.
• Regardless of whether communication group number 00 or 01 is used, all operating panels display
the same alarm and/or trouble information. If the sounder comes on for one panel (because of an
alarm, trouble, entry delay alert, etc.), it also comes on for the other panels.
• When there are several operating panels using the same communication group number, and one of
the operating panels is activated by touching a key or entering an ID code, the other panels are
locked out and display “Keypad In Use, Please Wait” until the first panel is deactivated. The active
period ends 60 seconds after the last key is pressed. Operating panels using a different
communication group number are not affected.
• Where there are two BA groups with the same communication group number and with similar
opening or closing schedules, it is possible to generate an Entry alarm unintentionally. For
example, one person enters the premises and triggers the entry delay for one BA group. When a
person enters the second BA group they cannot turn off the second BA group until the first entry
delay expires. An entry alarm may also be generated when an impatient person doesn’t wait for an
operating panel to clear before being able to close. To avoid such unintentional entry alarms,
assign one panel to communication group number 00 and assign the other panel communication
group number 01.
• When addressing operating panels, make sure that no two operating panels have the same address
(same group and unit number). Failure to do so may result in a communication clash.
• If you are pre-programming operating panels in the shop, DO NOT change the default communication
group number 31 at that time. Wait until the operating panel has been wired to the RS-485 bus in the
premises. Failure to do so results in a communication clash when the control unit is powered up, which
can be corrected only by powering down the control unit and then powering it back up again.
Setting the Address of the Operating Panel

If you desire to address the operating panels at this time, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Apply AC power temporarily to the control unit. If the LCD display cannot be read upon
power-up, press [0] and [#] simultaneously and use the middle two keys to the right of the
display to adjust the contrast until the display is readable.
3-3
Step Action
2 Wait for the operating panel to perform the power-on self-test. After this is completed, the
panel displays “ADT INTERACTIVE KEYPAD WAITING FOR COMM.”
3 Press the [1] and [8] keys simultaneously to enter the operating panel program mode.
4 Enter the default code 1 2 3 (or other number if you are not using 1 2 3).
5 Press Change.
6 Enter the new communication group and unit number for this operating panel.
7 Press Quit to exit the program mode. The control unit will recognize the operating panel if
it has been properly addressed.
NOTE: The firmware level is shown by characters in upper right-hand corner of the parameter display.
Where an operating panel is being used for access control with an ACIU, its communication Unit number
on the RS-485 bus must coincide with the communication Unit number of the ACIU. An operating panel
being used for access control (Communication Group 0) becomes locked out during the period that any
other operating panel at Communication Group 0 becomes activated, and vice versa.
Operating Panel Program Mode

The Operating Panel Program mode is to establish the operating panel’s parameters.
Selecting CHANGE on the parameter screen while in the operating panel program mode brings up the
change menu. From this screen, the system will allow:
• Any of the RS-485 communication parameters to be changed.
• The keypad and screen of the operating panel to be tested for proper operation.
• The adjustment of the contrast level of the screen.
• The operating panel to be placed in a temporary training mode.
• The operating panel to be configured as an annunciator.
Changing Parameters
To change any parameter, select the parameter to be changed, enter the new value at the keypad, and
then select ENTER. The following table explains the parameters and the values to be chosen:
Parameter Default Value Explanation of Value Required
Keycode 1,2,3 Any three digits, for entering the operating panel program
mode. Should not be changed unless there is a particular reason
for changing it, such as standardization within the area or
region served by a given ADT office.
Baud 9600 9600 baud is required; 4800 cannot be used at this time.
Group Number 31 Range is 0-31 (00 and 01 are reserved for the operating panels).
Unit Number 7 Range is 0-7.
Contrast Center Can be increased or decreased using the contrast screen. To call
up contrast screen without first entering Programming mode,
press [0] and [#] simultaneously.
Adjusting the Contrast Level

The contrast of the screen can be adjusted at any time, without entering a code, by simultaneously
pressing [0] and [#]. This will bring up the contrast adjustment screen, allowing the contrast to be
increased by pressing CONTRAST (+) or decreased by pressing CONTRAST (-).
If the AC and battery power are temporarily disconnected, the contrast setting that is adjusted by the
method described above will be overridden by the contrast setting established via the operating panel
parameter screen.
3-4
S E C T I O N 4
Basic Hardwired Points

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ About the Hardwired Points ♦ Point 8 Bell Box Tamper Configuration
♦ Wiring the Hardwired Points
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About the Hardwired Points

The FOCUS 200 PLUS system has eight built-in hardwired points. The points are individually
addressable to one of eight BA groups. All eight points may be programmed with any input point type,
although points 1 and 2 are set up to support 2-wire smoke detectors.
Some additional characteristics of the eight hardwired points:
• EOLR supervision using a 2k resistor.
• Support of normally-open or normally-closed sensors.
• Up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors each on points 1 and 2 (32 total).
• 4-wire smoke or heat detectors on points 1-8 (power to 4-wire smoke detectors must be supervised
with an EOL device).
• Points 3 and 4 may be set for a style “D” configuration.
• Point 8 may be configured as a bell box tamper.
Default point types for the hardwire points are:
Point Description Default Type Gateway # Hard ID
1 Hardwire Point 1 Fire (FA) 8 101
2 Hardwire Point 2 Fire (FA) 8 102
3 Hardwire Point 3 Moveable Delay (MD) 8 103
4 Hardwire Point 4 Moveable Instant (MI) 8 104
6 Hardwire Point 6 Moveable Delay (MD) 8 106
To disable a hardwired point, enter "00" for the point type (NZ) and enter zeroes (0) for the Hard ID.
Wiring the Hardwired Points

The wiring of the hardwired points is divided into four parts:
• Wiring burglary and panic devices to points 1-8.
• Wiring 2-wire smoke detectors to points 1 and 2.
• Wiring 4-wire smoke detectors to points 1-8.
• Wiring points 3 and 4 for style “D” configuration.
4-1
Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Points 1-8
To wire burglary and/or panic devices to points 1-8 (terminals 25 - 38), perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Connect normally closed devices in series with the high (+) side of the loop.
Note: The 2K EOL resistor must be connected in series with the devices, following the last
device.
2 Connect normally open devices in parallel (across) the loop.
Note: The 2K EOL resistor must be connected across the loop wires at the last device.
The maximum loop resistance is 100 ohms for points 1 and 2, and 300 ohms for all other points (excluding
the 2K EOL resistor).
Wiring 2-Wire Smoke Detectors to Points 1 and 2

Points 1 and 2 have the added capability of supporting 2-wire smoke detectors. Each point provides
enough standby current (2mA) to power up to 16 of the smoke detectors listed below.
• 2K EOL resistors must be connected across the loop wires of each point at the last detector for fire
points.
• The alarm current provided by points 1 and 2 will support only one smoke detector each in the alarmed
state.
Compatible 2-Wire Smoke Detectors

You may use up to 16 two-wire smoke detectors each on points 1 and 2 listed in the table below.
DETECTOR TYPE DEVICE MODEL #
Photoelectric 6-24 VDC (switch 1 “on”) ESL 521B
Photoelectric 6-24 VDC, multi-criteria algorithms, ESL 521BXT
fixed/rate of rise heat (switch 1 “on”)
Photoelectric 6-12 VDC, integrated fixed ESL 429AT
temperature and rate of rise heat
Photoelectric, direct wire System Sensor 2400
Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct wire System Sensor 2400TH
Photoelectric w/B401B base System Sensor 2451
Photoelectric w/heat sensor and B401B base System Sensor 2451TH
Ionization, direct wire System Sensor 1400
Ionization w/B401B base System Sensor 1451
Photoelectric duct detect. w/DH400 base System Sensor 2451
Photoelectric 440354 (3534-2C)
Photoelectric duct detect. w/DH400 base System Sensor 2451
Ionization duct detector w/DH400 base System Sensor 1451DH
Ionization w/B110LP base System Sensor 1151
Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct wire System Sensor 2100T
Photoelectric w/B110LP base System Sensor 2151
Photoelectric w/Thermostat 435021 (3534-2CT)
These smoke detectors are UL Listed for use with the FOCUS 200 PLUS, and are the only 2-wire smoke
UL detectors that may be used.
4-2
Section 4 – Basic Hardwired Points
Figure 4-1: 2-Wire Smoke Detector Connected to Point 1 (also Point 2, Terminals 27 and 28)
To wire 2-wire smoke detectors to points 1 and 2 (terminals 25 - 28), perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Select from the list compatible 2-wire smoke detectors.
Note: These are the only 2-wire smoke detectors that may be used with the FOCUS 200
PLUS system.
2 Connect 2-wire smoke detectors across point 1 and/or point 2 terminals (25 through 28).
See Figure 4-1.
Note: Observe proper polarity when connecting the detectors.
3 If EOL resistors are presently connected across point 1 and point 2 terminals, remove
them. Connect the EOL resistors across the loop wires of each point at the last detector.
Wiring 4-Wire Smoke Detectors to Points 1-8

When programmed for fire, points 1-8 can monitor 4-wire smoke detectors, normally-open fire alarm
initiating devices, or normally-open sprinkler system supervisory devices.
You may use as many 4-wire smoke detectors as can be powered from the panel's Auxiliary Relay
Output without exceeding the output's rating. Program the Auxiliary Relay Output to respond to 4-wire
smoke detector reset. Also, Jumper P3 must be set to the top position, shorting pins 1 & 2.
Power to 4-wire smoke detectors must be supervised with an EOL device (use a ADT 435243 or a System
UL Sensor A77-716B EOL Relay Module). See Figure 4-2.
Auxiliary power to 4-wire smoke detectors is not automatically reset after an alarm, and therefore must be
momentarily interrupted using the built-in auxiliary relay. This allows the detectors to be reset via the Alarm
Reset sequence.
Programming for the Alarm Reset sequence must be done via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader.
Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors

Use any UL Listed 4-wire smoke detector that is rated for 10-14VDC operation and that has alarm
reset time not exceeding 6 seconds. Some compatible 4-wire smoke detectors are listed below.
DETECTOR TYPE DEVICE MODEL #
Photoelectric 12-24 VDC ESL 541C
Photoelectric 12-24 VDC, multi-criteria algorithms, fixed/rate of rise heat ESL 541CXT
Photoelectric 12-24 VDC ESL 449C
Photoelectric 12-24 VDC, integrated fixed temperature and rate of rise heat ESL 449CT
Photoelectric 12-24 VDC, auxiliary relay, integrated fixed temperature and rate of ESL 449CRT
rise heat
Photoelectric 12-24 VDC, built-in sounder, integrated fixed temperature and rate of ESL 449CST
rise heat
Photoelectric 12-24 VDC, built-in sounder, auxiliary relay, integrated fixed ESL 449CSRT
temperature and rate of rise heat
Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct wire System Sensor 2412TH
4-3
N.C. 9
+
AUXILIARY
POLE 10
RELAY
N.O. 11 BLK – + RED

• •
GROUND 12 - 4-WIRE SMOKE
OR COMBUSTION
EOL POWER
SUPERVISION
+ DETECTORS
+ RELAY
MODULE
- - VIOLET ADT PART #435243
CONTROL
PANEL 2000 •
OHM SHOWN POWERED.
EOLR • RELAY OPENS WHEN
POWER IS LOST.
+
POINT HEAT
TERMINALS DETECTOR
(25-38)
-
Figure 4-2: 4-Wire Smoke Detector Connections Points 1-8
To wire 4-wire smoke detectors to points 1 - 8 (terminals 25-38), perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Select compatible 4-wire smoke detectors. Some are listed on the previous page.
2 Connect 4-wire smoke detectors across points 1 through 8 (25 through 38). See Figure 4-2.
3 If EOL resistors are presently connected across the terminals, remove them.
4 Connect the EOL power supervision relay module (System Sensor A77-716B) and the 2k
EOL resistor at the last detector on each point. See Figure 4-2.
Note: Each point must have its own power supervision relay module.
5 Connect the power wires from the 4-wire smoke detectors and the EOL power supervision
relay module to the control unit. Connect the ground wire to terminal 12, and the positive
power to the normally closed side of the auxiliary relay (terminal 9). See Figure 4-2.
Note: Auxiliary power is not automatically reset after an alarm, and therefore must be
momentarily interrupted using the built-in auxiliary relay.
6 Move jumper P3 to short pins 1 and 2, making the auxiliary relay wet (12-volt output).
7 Program the Auxiliary Relay Output to 4-wire smoke detector reset.
Points 3 and 4 Style "D" (Class A Fire Loop) Configuration

The style "D" configuration is a Class A Fire Loop. It can annunciate an alarm condition even with an
open in the wire run. A break or open in the wire run will annunciate a trouble condition on point 3,
but the system can still annunciate an alarm condition, if a sensor is shorted.
Wiring for Style "D" Configuration
CONTROL
PANEL
+ 32
2k
POINT 4 EOLR C
- 31
Break #2
- 30
POINT 3
A B
+ 29
Break #1
Figure 4-3: Style "D" Configuration on Points 3 and 4
4-4
Section 4 – Basic Hardwired Points
Referring to Figure 4-3, if Break #1 occurs, point 3 goes into a trouble condition, but will continue to
monitor device "A" for an alarm condition. Point 4 will continue to monitor devices "B" and "C" for
alarm conditions. If Break #2 occurs, point 3 goes into a trouble condition and will still monitor devices
"A", "B" and "C" for alarm conditions. The trouble and alarm messages will be sent to the CCC as point
3 trouble or alarm.
To wire points 3 and 4 for the Style “D” configuration, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Select UL Listed fire sensors (4-wire smoke detectors, sprinkler system supervisory devices,
etc.).
2 Run the wiring starting at point 3 terminals (29 and 30) through the facility and homerun
back to the control unit to the terminals for point 4 (31 and 32).
3 Connect the fire sensors in parallel along the wire run. See Figure 4-3.
4 If EOL resistors are presently connected across the terminals, remove them. Connect only
one 2k resistor directly across the terminals for point 4 inside the control cabinet. See Figure
4-3.
5 Connect the power wires from the fire sensors to the control unit. Connect the ground wire
to terminal 12, and the positive power to the normally closed side of the auxiliary relay
(terminal 9).
Note: Auxiliary power is not automatically reset after an alarm, and therefore must be
momentarily interrupted using the built-in auxiliary relay.
Programming for Style ‘D’ Configuration

Programming for the Style 'D' configuration may be done via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader.
Point 8 Bell Box Tamper Configuration

Point 8 may be used as a tamper input for the tamper switches and tamper liner on a Grade A Bell Box.
See the Installing the Control Unit and Bell Outputs and Auxiliary Relay sections for wiring
information.
To program point 8 for the tamper configuration, assign it to a BA group and program the point as a
Supervisory (SPV) input type. This disables the ground fault detection for HW point 8. See the
Programming section for information about the procedure.
If you are using the bell box tamper, program the option via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader. Otherwise
the system will not detect a "short" on point 8.
4-5
4-6
S E C T I O N 5
Gateways
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ About the Gateways ♦ Installing the RF Gateway
♦ PID Gateway ♦ Installing the RF Receiver
♦ Installing the PID Gateway ♦ 5800 Series Transmitters
♦ Installing Sensors to the PID ♦ Long Range Radio Gateway
♦ SIM Gateway ♦ Installing the LRR Gateway
♦ Installing the SIM Gateway ♦ Long Range Radio Trouble Conditions
♦ Installing SIM and SIM Sensors ♦ Gateway Off-Normal Conditions
♦ RF Gateway
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About the Gateways

A gateway is an interface device for sensors and output devices. There are three types of gateways:
• 248239 PID gateway
• 472368 SIM gateway
• 472490 RF gateway.
The gateways connect to the RS-485 buses on the control unit and use Communication Group 03. Any
combination up to eight gateways can be used on the buses (maximum one RF gateway). The gateway
continuously monitors the status of all sensors. When interrogated by the control unit, it reports any
points that are off-normal. Additionally, when signaled by the control unit, the gateway issues
commands to reset sensors or control an on/off output function at appropriate points.
Each sensor and output device is identified by a Hard ID number. The control unit uses this
information, along with the number of the gateway on the RS-485 bus, to identify the point. This data
is programmed into the control unit at the time of installation.
RS-485 Buses
Each gateway connects to a port in the control unit via a cable known as an RS-485 bus. The control
unit can accommodate two independent RS-485 buses of 4000 feet each, permitting an end-to-end reach
of up to 8000 feet if using both buses. The total end-to-end reach can be extended to 16,000 feet by
using a 472430 RS-485 Repeater at the end of each bus. Current loading and voltage drop
considerations may limit the maximum allowable wire lengths on each RS-485 bus to less than 4000
feet. See the Power Requirements section for additional information.
RS-485 Bus Cable Types

Two types of bus cable are used. Each is a 4-conductor multi-gauge cable, differing only in the type of
insulation.
• 494465 (B6445) Cable - used as general-purpose.
• 494467 (B6467) Cable - used specifically in air handling plenums.
5-1

operation of the FOCUS 200 PLUS System. Use the following guidelines when running the cable:
• Bus cable(s) should be routed to take advantage of the shortest possible length of cable, to
minimize voltage drop.
Junction boxes can also be used to sectionalize the bus to serve as an aid during troubleshooting.
common connector).
PID Gateway
The PID gateway utilizes the quad trunk monitoring (two wires for power and two for signaling) and
control circuitry of the FOCUS 200 PLUS system. It employs the same Point Interface Devices (PID's),
Commandable Output Point Interface Devices (COPID's), and other interface devices as used on
previous FOCUS Systems.
Each PID provides a point of protection and serves to interface a sensor into the system. Each COPID
occupies a point in the system, but the COPID is equipped with a pair of relays (form C, dry) that
operate in response to a predetermined function being monitored. A point of protection used in
conjunction with a PID is considered an input point, and one that is used with a COPID is considered
an output point.
A PID gateway:
• Connects to an RS-485 bus from the control unit and serves as a data gathering terminal for any
combination of up to 62 monitoring points.
• Interrogates its PID's and their sensors, issues commands from the control unit to its COPID's, and
reports the status of its connected devices to the FOCUS 200 PLUS control unit.
• May be used for retrofit applications.
• May be used for installations where the sensor or other device cannot be connected to the SIM
Gateway.
• Functions in a manner similar to the control unit circuitry used for interfacing the quad trunk on a
FOCUS 100 System.
• Operates with most presently used FOCUS System accessories (PIDs, COPIDs, etc.). A COPID is
not interrogated by its PID gateway and is therefore not supervised.
• Can be used for retrofitting previous FOCUS Systems (FOCUS 48, FOCUS 100B, C and D, FOCUS
256, and FOCUS 300 Systems).
Point Interface Devices (PIDs)

The Point Interface Device:
• Continuously monitors its loop for a cross, open, or tamper condition, stores this information, and
reports it to the PID gateway when it is interrogated.
• Controls the application of (+) 12 VDC power from the gateway trunk to its sensor (if the sensor is
being powered by the system).
• When commanded by the control unit, will open the power line to its protection loop, for the
purpose of resetting an alarm on a latching-type sensor, such as a smoke detector.
Commandable Output Point Interface Devices (COPIDs)

The Commandable Output Point Interface Device:
• Is a listening-type device and is not interrogated by the control unit.
• Awaits a command from the control unit to operate its output relays, A and B, in response to a
change in a function being monitored.
• Provides Form C dry contacts on the relays.
5-2
Section 5 – Gateways
• Can be assigned to the same address as another COPID on the gateway trunk.
• Can be assigned to the same point as the sensor that it will follow, and its relay will then operate
when the point alarms, and will remain activated until the point restores.
• Is not supervised and cannot be used where point supervision is required.
PID Gateway Physical Description

The gateway consists of a printed wiring board that is installed in a separately ordered housing unit.
The following are important items on the board (see Figure 5-1):
Part Purpose
Terminal Strip TB1 Used for making connections to the RS-485 bus.
Terminal Strip TB2 Used for connecting gateway quad Trunk 1A.
Terminal Strip TB3 Used for connecting gateway Trunk 1B. This second trunk is used in
instances where there would ordinarily be one long cable run that would
result in an excessive voltage drop on the power lines. By locating the
gateway near the center of this run and using two gateway trunks, the
voltage drop of each trunk can be kept to an acceptable level.
Jumpers E10 (for TB2) Used to accommodate an increase current level, with a rating greater than
and E11 (for TB3) 0.5A, when the gateway is connected to a separate power supply, Inserting
the jumpers serves to connect a larger internal fuse (1.6A per trunk).
Otherwise, remove jumpers if the gateway is not connected to a separate
power supply.
Jumpers E2 through E9 Used for setting the gateway communication address on the RS-485 bus.
Terminating jumper E1 Insert only if the gateway is located at one end of the RS-485 bus.
TXD and RXD LEDs Indicates the gateway communication status as follows:
• TXD LED - flashing when the gateway is transmitting
• RXD LED - flashing when the gateway is receiving.
Tamper Space is provided for adding a tamper switch, which must be ordered
separately as a 248116 Tamper Kit.
5-3
RS-485 BUS LEDs TERMINAL STRIP TB1 JUMPER E1
TXD (YEL) RXD (RED) CONNECTIONS TO (REMOVE JUMPER TO
RS-485 BUS DISCONNECT RS-485
TERMINATING RESISTOR)
RS-485
DS1 DS2
TB1
GATEWAY TXD RXD
MICROPROCESSOR E2 (BLK) 1 GND
E3
(RED) 2 + 12V E1
E4
U6
E5 (YEL) 3 COM
RS-485 BUS E6
ADDRESS JUMPERS E7 (BLU) 4 COM +
E8
E9
JUMPER E10 JUMPER E11

E 10 TRUNK 1B E 11
(BLU) 4 TRUNK 1A 1 (BLK)
(YEL) 3 2 (RED)
(RED) 2 3 (YEL)
(BLK) 1 TA 4 (BLU)
TB2 TB3
FOR TAMPER
TERMINAL STRIP TERMINAL STRIP
(IF USED)
TB2 FOR TRUNK 1A TB3 FOR TRUNK 1B
SEE NOTE 2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
UNIT NO. E2 UNIT NO.
E3
E4
E5
COMMUNICATION E6
GROUP NO. 3 E7
E8
E9
JUMPER IN JUMPER OUT
JUMPER CONDITIONING SHOWN FOR COMMUNICATION GROUP 3

IN COMBINATION WITH UNIT NUMBERS 0 THROUGH 7.
NOTES:
1. RS-485 BUS LEDs:

(A) TXD (YEL) FLASHES WHEN GATEWAY IS TRANSMITTING
(B) RXD (RED) FLASHES WHEN GATEWAY IS RECEIVING.
2. A 248116 TAMPER KIT MAY BE ORDERED SEPARATELY;

CONSISTS OF TAMPER SWITCH PLUS MOUNTING HARDWARE.
3. REMOVE JUMPERS E10 AND E11 UNLESS GATEWAY IS BEING

POWERED BY A SEPARATE POWER SUPPLY THAT IS RATED
AT MORE THAN 0.5A (SEE PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION).
Figure 5-1: PID Gateway Module
PID Gateway Applications

The PID Gateway is limited to applications involving the following items that cannot be used with the
SIM Gateway:
• 471898(7187-028) Quad Powered Sounder PID Module.
• 471854 (7187-039) Waterflow Retard Module.
• 471998(7187-112) Remote Keyswitch (requires 471997 (7187-097) Switch Interface Module).
• 471999(7187-113) Janitor Keyswitch (requires 471997(7187-097) Switch Interface Module).
• 471921(7187-061) Daytime Annunciator.
Additionally, the following sensors must be connected to the PID gateway:
• Lacing and foil.
• 487351 Type Glassbreak Detectors.
5-4
Installing the PID Gateway

Installation Guidelines
The following guidelines should be considered when planning the installation:
Function Guideline
Minimizing Voltage Where an appreciable number of system-powered devices are involved,
Drop consider using a dual run of the quad trunk cable, with one cable run
connected to the Trunk 1A terminal strip and the other run connected to
the Trunk 1B terminal strip (see Figure 5-1). If a dual cable run is being
used, try to locate the gateway so that the sensor load will be evenly
distributed between the two runs.
Maximum RS-485 4000 feet. This distance may be less to comply with the minimum
Length from Control voltage to the PID gateway.
Unit to Gateway
Maximum Cable Must not exceed 100 feet.

Length from PID to
Sensor
Total Length of Must not exceed 1000 feet. This length may be less to comply with
Gateway Trunk Cable minimum voltage to farthest PID sensor. If using both gateway trunks,
limit applies to the sum of both runs.
Minimum Voltage to 12.1VDC with a fully charged battery and AC power applied to the
PID Gateway control unit, or to an external power supply, if used.
Farthest PID Sensor control unit, or to an external power supply, if used.
Maximum Current 85mA.

Draw from PID for
System Powered
Sensor
Maximum Current The current on each gateway trunk must not exceed:
Draw from Gateway • 0.5A if the gateway is receiving power from the control unit power
Trunk supply (remove jumpers E10 and E11)
• 1.6A if gateway is receiving power from 472372 Power Supply
module (leave jumpers E10 and E11 on)
Gateway Log Form Complete the Gateway Log Form shown later in this section. When the
form has been completed, make a duplicate copy. Store one copy in the
control unit and file the other copy in the office.
Location Make sure the PID gateway is:
Considerations • Protected from physical damage.
• Not mounted on temporary walls or partitions.
• Mounted in an area free from excessive vibrations, corrosive
atmospheres, high temperatures.
• Mounted within the protected area.
• Never exposed to the outside elements.
PID Housing Unit The Housing provides combination cable entry ports with built-in strain
relief and a snap lock-hinged cover with a writing surface on its exterior
for the PID address. It can be mounted on walls, ceilings, and building
structures in any position. The PID modules snap into the housing unit
and are held in place with a locking catch. Modules are easily removed
by depressing the locking catch.
5-5
Mounting the PID Gateway

To mount the PID gateway, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 At the control unit, make sure the Power switch is in the "OFF" position and proceed with
wiring the gateway.
2 Select a location using the guidelines previously stated.
3 Mount the housing for the gateway so that the knockouts face the direction of the wire run.
If this results in the ADT logo being mounted upside down, use the stick-on logo as a
corrective measure to show the "ADT" right-side up.
Note: 471917 Lined and Tampered Housing Unit is used when the unit is outside of the
protected area of a UL-certificated installation.
4 Insert the PC board on the two standoff mounting posts. Depress the PC board until the
locking catch snaps over the PC board edge.
5 Install any combination of two modules in one housing unit (one module is installed in one-
half of a housing unit) (e.g., micro PID and COPID).
6 Install the 248116 Tamper Kit, if being used.
Wiring the PID gateway

To wire the PID gateway, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Run the buses as required and make sure to appropriately tag them. Limit each RS-485
bus port to a single wire run.
Note: The same 494465 (B6465) Quad Cable is used for both the RS-485 bus and the
gateway quad trunk. Therefore, it is important to appropriately tag these cables so that
they can readily be identified. This is especially important if troubleshooting becomes
necessary at some future date.
2 Cut the gateway trunk cable and remove enough sheathing and insulation from each wire
to allow fastening under the pressure plate of a terminal strip screw.
3 Measure the resistance between the black and red conductors (the (+) lead of the meter to
the red conductor and the (-) lead to the black conductor). A reading less than 12 ohms
indicates a short on the power conductors or an excess of protection points. Make the
necessary corrections before proceeding.
4 Connect the RS-485 cable to TB1 of the PID gateway. Identify terminal wires so that the
proper wires can be connected to each terminal. Terminal 1 is identified by the letter "G"
on the circuit board and is used for connection of the black wires. Terminals 2, 3, and 4 are
used for the red, yellow, and blue wires, respectively. See Figure 5-1.
Terminal Terminal
#19 AWG Blue RS-485 17 21
#16 AWG Red + 12 VDC 19 23
#16 AWG Black DC Return 20 24
6 Insert each branch receptacle onto the appropriate molex connector, observing the proper
positioning for the type of sensor connected.
• Powered sensors use Pins 1-2-3-4.
• Non-powered sensors use Pins 3-4-5-6.
7 Form the branch cable(s) around the strain relief posts and over the slotted branch cable
entry port(s), and depress so the cable is flush with the edge of the housing base.
5-6
Addressing the PID Gateway

To address the PID gateway, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Set the RS-485 address jumpers (E2 – E9) to Communication Group 3 and to a Unit
Number from 0 to 7 (see Figure 5-1).
2 Set jumpers E10 and E11 to the appropriate setting:
• Remove jumpers if gateway is powered from control unit.
• Leave jumpers intact if gateway is powered from a separate power supply module.
Installing Sensors to the PID

All sensors are connected to the PIDs via branch cables. See Figures 5-2, 5-3a & b, and 5-4. Figure 5-3a
shows the wiring connection for a 4-wire smoke detector that uses a power supervision relay. Three
types of branch cables are available for sensor connections. Each is a 4-conductor, 22-AWG cable,
differing only in the thickness or type of insulation for the specific application for which the cable is
approved. The cables are:
• 493744 (D6441-4B) Inside BA Cable - approved for BA and HUA loops only.
• 487347 (B6466-4) - approved for FA, SUPV, and Telco connections. May be used for BA.
• 494468 (B6468-4) - approved for all loop connections intended for use in air-handling plenums.
Do not connect more than 8 smoke detectors to a single PID, and make sure that all smoke detectors so
connected are physically located in the same fire point.
Sensor Power Classification

The various types of sensors employed with the FOCUS 200 PLUS System can be divided into the
following basic categories according to the source of power required:
Sensor Type Power Source Wiring Configuration

Non-powered Does not require system or Uses all four conductors of the branch cable
sensor independent operating power, or with the EOLR located in PID.
draws only a small amount of • Black = low-side feed
current from the loop. • Red = high-side feed
• Yellow = low-side return
• Blue = high-side return
System-powered Powered via the PID branch Uses two conductors of the branch cable,
sensor cable. The sensor must be capable black (-) and red (+), for nominal 12VDC
of operating between 8 and 15 power; and two conductors, yellow and blue,
volts, with a maximum current of for connection of a separately ordered 3010-
85mA. ohm EOLR. The EOLR in the PID is not
used.
Independently Uses operating power from an Uses a separate power source and does not
powered sensor external source. need power from the quad trunk cable. Is
wired in the same way as a non-powered
sensor.
System-powered sensors cannot be adjusted or tested until the system power has been turned on, the
point data has been loaded into the control unit, and communication has been established between the
control unit and the gateway and between the gateway and its PID's.
5-7
Setting the Hard ID Number
Remember that the Hard ID number is not the system point number, but is used for communication with the
PID gateway. The Hard ID will be linked to a system point number during the programming of the point. Also,
once the Hard ID is programmed, it is permanent.
A DIP shunt is used to set the PID or COPID’s Hard ID number, which serves to identify the PID or
COPID to its gateway. The DIP shunt consists of a series of six conductive straps. The straps come in a
closed circuit condition, and are “broken” to produce an open circuit. Once programmed, the Hard ID
number is permanent. To change a Hard ID number, the DIP shunt must be removed from the socket
and another DIP shunt with the new Hard ID number must be inserted.
When assigning the Hard ID numbers, always start with the number 1 and continue numbering
consecutively (2, 3, 4, and so on). This will provide a faster gateway interrogation process.
The straps in a DIP shunt are numbered 1 through 6, with number 1 designated by a hole next to it
through which the shunt strap material can be seen. As an aid to proper positioning of the DIP shunt in
the socket, the strap numbers are printed on the PID board next to the socket.
Program the Hard ID by breaking the straps to produce a sum equal to the desired PID address.
Example: Program address 16 by breaking straps 1 ,2, 3, 4, and 6. Strap 5 (16) would remain
unbroken.
Table of DIP Shunt Numbers
Hard ID# Break DIP Shunt Number(s) Indicated Hard ID# Break DIP Shunt Number(s) Indicated
00 NOT USED 32 1 2 3 4 5 —
01 — 2 3 4 5 6 33 — 2 3 4 5 —
02 1 — 3 4 5 6 34 1 — 3 4 5 —
03 — — 3 4 5 6 35 — — 3 4 5 —
04 1 2 — 4 5 6 36 1 2 — 4 5 —
05 — 2 — 4 5 6 37 — 2 — 4 5 —
06 1 — — 4 5 6 38 1 — — 4 5 —
07 — — — 4 5 6 39 — — — 4 5 —
08 1 2 3 — 5 6 40 1 2 3 — 5 —
09 — 2 3 — 5 6 41 — 2 3 — 5 —
10 1 — 3 — 5 6 42 1 — 3 — 5 —
11 — — 3 — 5 6 43 — — 3 — 5 —
12 1 2 — — 5 6 44 1 2 — — 5 —
13 — 2 — — 5 6 45 — 2 — — 5 —
14 1 — — — 5 6 46 1 — — — 5 —
15 — — — — 5 6 47 — — — — 5 —
16 1 2 3 4 — 6 48 1 2 3 4 — —
17 — 2 3 4 — 6 49 — 2 3 4 — —
18 1 — 3 4 — 6 50 1 — 3 4 — —
19 — — 3 4 — 6 51 — — 3 4 — —
20 1 2 — 4 — 6 52 1 2 — 4 — —
21 — 2 — 4 — 6 53 — 2 — 4 — —
22 1 — — 4 — 6 54 1 — — 4 — —
23 — — — 4 — 6 55 — — — 4 — —
24 1 2 3 — — 6 56 1 2 3 — — —
25 — 2 3 — — 6 57 — 2 3 — — —
26 1 — 3 — — 6 58 1 — 3 — — —
27 — — 3 — — 6 59 — — 3 — — —
28 1 2 — — — 6 60 1 2 — — — —
29 — 2 — — — 6 61 — 2 — — — —
30 1 — — — — 6 62 1 — — — — —
31 — — — — — 6 63 — — — — — —
Notes:
• Do not break DIP shunts indicated by dashes. Break only number(s) shown above. The Hard ID number of any
unused PID must be set to 63 (unbroken) DIP shunts.
• For identification, mark the hard ID number and the system point number on the Housing Unit cover on the
writing surface provided using an indelible marker.
5-8
Gateway Log Form

Group 03 Total Bus Load ______mA
Unit # ____
GATEWAY
SIM PID
___ ___
TRUNK 1A TRUNK 1B
Point # ____ Description _____________________ Point # ____ Description _____________________
ID # __________ Location ________________________ ID # __________ Location ________________________
BA Group _____ ________________________________ BA Group _____ ________________________________

BA Group _____ ________________________________ BA Group _____ ________________________________

BA Group _____ ________________________________ BA Group _____ ________________________________

BA Group _____ ________________________________ BA Group _____ ________________________________

BA Group _____ ________________________________ BA Group _____ ________________________________

BA Group _____ ________________________________ BA Group _____ ________________________________

BA Group _____ ________________________________ BA Group _____ ________________________________

BA Group _____ ________________________________ BA Group _____ ________________________________

BA Group _____ ________________________________ BA Group _____ ________________________________
5-9
When Using Double-Ended Sensor

When using any double-ended sensor in which the transmitter does not initiate an alarm, the PID
connected to the transmitter supplies power, but does not report back status to the gateway. However,
the PID connected to the transmitter must be modified as follows:
Type of PID Modification
471877 (7187-007) Quad PID Cut Diode D5 or Diode D8. Diodes D5 and D8 are located on the
outer edge of the shield and they are accessible for easy cutting
using a small pair of clippers.
Note: It is recommended that the inner two PIDs on the Quad
PID board not be used. The diodes will be easier to access.
471941(7187-106) Micro PID Remove Jumper JB from the micro PID being used for the
transmitting element.
471967 (71187-207) Tampered Cut Diode D2, D6, D10, or D14, as required.
Quad PID
PID BRANCH
CABLE CONNECTOR
HEADER RECEPTACLE
(NOTE 4)
BLK - 12VDC
1 1 1 TA TA
RED +12VDC 12VDC 12VDC SEE
2 2 (NOTE 1) (NOTE 1)
YEL LOW SIDE (NOTE 3)
3 3 EOLR EOLR
BLU HIGH SIDE NO
4 4 3K OHMS 3K OHMS
5 (NOTE 2) (NOTE 2)
NC
6 (NOTE 3)
NOT BA SENSOR NON-BA SENSOR FOCUS TYPE

USED (FA, SUPV, HUA) SENSORS
NOTES:
1. ELECTRICAL POSITION OF TAMPER, WHERE USED.
2. SEPARATELY ORDERED END-OF-LINE RESISTOR,

EXCEPT FOR 7187 TYPE SENSOR, WHICH HAS OWN RESISTOR.
3. RECEPTACLE POSITION ON HEADER INDICATES SENSOR IS

SYTEM-POWERED.
4. LETTER "G" ON PRINTED WIRING BOARD INDICATES PIN 1 OF HEADER.
5. CERTAIN FOCUS 7187 TYPE SENSORS MAY HAVE SOLID STATE ALARM
OUTPUTS, WHICH INCLUDE TAMPER, END-OF-LINE RESISTOR,
AND FOCUS CONNECTOR.
Figure 5-2: PID Wiring Connections to System-Powered Sensors
5-10
PID CABLE BASIC BA - FIXED AND
CONNECTOR MOVABLE SENSORS
HEADER RECEPTACLE
BA NORMALLY-CLOSED
(BREAK-ONLY)
(NOTE 1) 1 (NOTE 2) CONTACT
TA
2 (NOTE 3) OR
BLK LOW SIDE FEED
3 1 OR BLK BLK
RED HIGH SIDE FEED
4 2 RED NO RED
YEL LOW SIDE RETURN
Notes for Figures 5-3a and 5-3b: 5 3
BLU HIGH SIDE RETURN NC
YEL NC
6 4 YEL BLU
BLU
1. Letter “G” on printed wiring EOL FIXED PROTECTION (NOTE 4) MOVABLE
board indicates pin 1 header. RESISTOR (SCREENS - FLOOR MOVABLE PROTECTION
MATS OR FOIL) PROTECTION
2. Receptacle position on header is

determined by whether or not BLK TA
NO
sensor is system-powered. RED
YEL
(NOTE 3)
BLU
3. Electrical position of tamper,
WATER FLOW OR
where used. BASIC FA
SUPERVISORY DEVICE
(NOTE 5)
4. For break-only contact, jumper ALARM

4-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTOR
PID header pins 3 and 5, low- CONTACTS (NOTE 7)
POWER 435243 POWER
side feed and low-side return, + SUPERVISION
PID CABLE
respectively. CONNECTOR 4 3 2 1
RELAY
HEADER RECEPTACLE RED
5. Where no tamper is used, (NOTE 1) BLK - 12VDC

1 1 BLACK
connect yellow wire to same 2 2 RED +12VDC
YEL BROWN BROWN
terminal with black wire. 3
4
3
4
BLU
5
6. 494468 branch cable must be 6
494466 OR 494468 975306 RESISTOR
used in ceilings that are air- NOT USED BRANCH CABLE 3010 OHM, 1%, 1/2W
handling plenums. (NOTE 5)
7. Do not connect more than eight Figure 5-3a: Basic Sensor Connections to PID
4-wire smoke detectors to a PID CABLE COMBINATION OF SYSTEM-POWERED AND
CONNECTOR INDEPENDENTLY POWERED SENSORS ON SAME LOOP
single PID. Install supervisory
HEADER RECEPTACLE
relay and EOLR in same outlet
BLK - 12VDC
box used for electrically last (NOTE 1) 1 1
RED +12VDC
X X X
2 2 X X X
smoke detector. All smoke 3 3
YEL
BLU EOLR
detectors on the one PID must 4 4 (NOTE 9)
5
be located in the same fire 6
CONTACT CONTACT CONTACT
(NOTE 8) SYSTEM- (NOTE 8) (NOTE 8)
point. POWERED SYSTEM-
NOT USED (NOTE 2) SENSOR POWERED
SENSOR
8. Transfer contact of
independently powered sensor
is shown. Sensor is powered by
separate power supply (not
shown).
DOOR CONTACTS DOOR CONTACTS
9. Separately ordered EOLR,

BASIC BA MULTIPLE
except for 7187 type sensor, SENSORS ON SINGLE
LOOP
which has own resistor.
GRN
GRN
RED
RED
YEL
BLK
YEL
BLK
10. Use 370320 Junction Box where PID CABLE

223414 TERMINAL UNIT
CONNECTOR
required. HEADER RECEPTACLE
WHERE REQUIRED
(NOTE 11)
11. Make butt splices (X) of wires (NOTE 1) 1 (NOTE 2)
D6441-4B CABLE
with wire connectors. 2

BLK
3 BLK BLK X
1 X X X
RED RED RED
4 2 X X X X
YEL YEL YEL
5 3 X X
BLU BLU X GRN
6 4 X
OR GRN OR GRN
EOL 370320 JUNCTION BOX 370320 JUNCTION BOX DOOR CONTACTS

RESISTOR (NOTE 10) (NOTE 10)
D6441-4B, 494466
OR 494468 CABLE
(NOTE 6)
Figure 5-3b: Basic Sensor Connections to PID
5-11
(NOTE 6)
TA AL
+
PID BRANCH
CABLE CONNECTOR
HEADER RECEPTACLE
(NOTE 1)
RESISTOR
(NOTE 5) 3010 OHM, 1%, 1/2 W
BLK - 12VDC
G 1 1 (SCN 975305) (NOTE 4)
2 RED +12VDC
2
YEL LOW SIDE
3 3
BLU HIGH SIDE
4 4
OR GRN
5
6 (NOTE 2)
D6441-4 CABLE OR 36468
EOL RESISTOR
BRANCH CABLE (NOTE 7)
IN PID (NOTE 3)
(A) WIRING DIAGRAM FOR TYPICAL SYSTEM-POWERED BA SENSOR
(NOTE 6)
TA AL
BA SENSOR +
TERMINALS
PID BRANCH
CABLE CONNECTOR
HEADER
(NOTE 1) G 1
RECEPTACLE TO SEPARATE
POWER SOURCE {
2 (NOTE 5)
3 1 BLK LOW SIDE FEED
4 2 RED HIGH SIDE FEED
YEL LOW SIDE RETURN
5 3
BLU HIGH SIDE RETURN
6 4
OR GRN
EOL RESISTOR
D6441-4 CABLE OR 36468
ON PID BOARD
BRANCH CABLE (NOTE 7)
(B) WIRING DIAGRAM FOR TYPICAL INDEPENDENTLY POWERED BA SENSOR
NOTES:
1. LETTER "G" ON PRINTED WIRING BOARD INDICATES PIN 1 OF HEADER.

2. RECEPTACLE POSITION ON HEADER INDICATES A SYSTEM-POWERED SENSOR.
3. EOL RESISTOR IN PID IS NOT USED FOR SYSTEM-POWERED SENSOR.
4. EOL RESISTOR IS ORDERED SEPARATELY FOR SYSTEM-POWERED SENSOR.
5. ADD JUMPER BETWEEN TA AND AL RELAY CONTACTS AS SHOWN.
6. TAMPER CONTACT IS WIRED ELECTRICALLY AHEAD OF ALARM CONTACT.
7. 6468 BRANCH CABLE CAN BE USED IN PLENUMS.
Figure 5-4: Connections of BA Sensors with Field Wiring Terminals to PID
PID CABLE
CONNECTOR
HEADER RECEPTACLE
( ) ( )
1 1
(+) (NOTE 1)
2 2 (+)
3 3
4 4
5 PA400W
SOUNDER
6
(INDOOR)
NOTES:
1. MAXIMUM CURRENT TO SOUNDER = 85mA.
2. PROGRAM PID AS COPID POINT, SELECTING

DESIRED FUNCTION THAT WILL CAUSE SOUNDER
TO TURN ON (e.g. BA FIXED, FA, SUPERVISORY).
Figure 5-5: Using a PID to Turn On a PA400W Sounder
5-12
Section 5 - Gateways
SIM Gateway
The SIM gateway is used to interface SIM (Sensor Interface Module) sensors with the FOCUS 200
PLUS system. The SIM gateway can accommodate up to 72 points.
The sensor types employed on the SIM gateway can be divided into two categories:
• Sensors that have been uniquely manufactured with a built-in SIM.
• Standard sensors, which require connection to a separate SIM in order to be connected to the
gateway.
The SIM gateway quad trunk consists of four wires. Two wires are used for power (+ 12V and ground).
The other two wires are used in a multiplexed arrangement to serve a dual function. During one half-
cycle, the wires are used for communication with the gateway; during the next half-cycle, they provide
limited + 12V operating power.
Sensor Interface Module (SIM)

An SIM is either connected to a sensor or has a built-in sensor (SIM sensor). SIMs with external
sensors, that require 12VDC power are wired to all four wires of the gateway trunk cable. SIMs with
built-in sensors are wired to a two conductor cable, which is wired to the blue and yellow wires of the
trunk cable. A open in the blue and yellow wires of the trunk cable or in the branch cable will be sensed
as a comm fail condition.
Each SIM and SIM sensor comes with a label containing the Hard ID number as well as information
that identifies the manufacturer and gives the date of manufacture. The Hard ID number is used to
identify the SIM or SIM sensor to its gateway, and is linked to a system point number during the
programming of the point.
Sensors with a built-in SIM:
• Have been designed for the multiplexed operation.
• Require only a 2-wire connection to the quad trunk.
• Are appreciably smaller than a separate SIM, permitting them to be housed in devices as small as
contacts.
The SIM connected to a sensor is:
• A small circuit board, protected by shrink tubing, with four input wires and six output wires.
• Housed either in the device with which it is being used or in a separately ordered 370320(7032)
Junction Box.
• A low-current device drawing less than 1mA.
• Powered from the + 12V wires of the gateway quad trunk, if system power is required.
• Capable of being used in a manner similar to a COPID by programming its point to function as an
output point. When activated, it will provide a + 12V output to operate a relay, LED, etc. Unlike a
COPID, a SIM output is supervised because it is interrogated by its SIM gateway.
SIM Gateway Physical Description

The gateway consists of a printed wiring board that is installed in a separately ordered Micro-PID
Housing Unit see Figure 5-6. The following important items on the board are:
Item Purpose
Terminal Strip TB1 Makes connections to the RS-485 bus.
Terminal Strip TB2 Makes connections to the Gateway Trunk.
RS-485 Address Dip Switches Establishes the Gateway address on the RS-485 bus.
Tamper Switch Triggers a trouble when activated by removal of the cover.
Receive LED (RED and Indicates the gateway communication status as follows:
Transmit LED (YELLOW • Receive Red LED flashes when the gateway is receiving
• Transmit Yellow LED flashes when the gateway is
transmitting
E1 Jumper Terminates the RS-485.
5-13
TAMPER SWITCH
OPERATOR
2
1
4
3
TAMPER SWITCH
TB2
GATEWAY TRUNK
TERMINAL STRIP
(RED)
(BLU)
(YEL)
(BLK)
GATEWAY
MICROPROCESSOR TERMINAL STRIP
TB1 CONNECTIONS TO
RS-485 BUS
1 (BLK) GND
2 (RED) +12V
TRANSMIT LED (YEL) E1 JUMPER E1
3 (YEL) COM (REMOVE JUMPER
RS-485 BUS ADDRESS TO DISCONNECT RS-485
4 (BLU) COM + TERMINATING RESISTOR)
DIP SWITCHES
NOTE: TRANSMIT LED FLASHES

RECEIVE LED (RED)
WHEN GATEWAY IS TRANSMITTING.
RECEIVE LED FLASHES WHEN
GATEWAY IS RECEIVING.
4
5
UNIT COMMUNICATION
NUMBER GROUP 3
DIP SWITCH POSITIONS SHOWN FOR COMMUNICATION GROUP 3

Figure 5-6: SIM Gateway Module
SIM Gateway Applications

The 472368 SIM Gateway is designed to be used with the following:
• 472366 Sensor Interface Module (SIM), used with Junction Box SCN 148320.
• 472367 SIM Door/Window contact.
• 472371 SIM Overhead Door contact.
• 472370 SIM Manual FA Pullbox.
• 472374 SIM Holdup Alarm Switch.
• 248309 SIM Relay Output Module kit and/or with Relay Module SCN 248026.
• 429CTAD SIM Smoke Detector.
• 472488 Supervised Horn/Strobe SIM.
• 450SIM, 633SIM, 690SIM Motion Sensors.
5-14
Installing the SIM Gateway

Function Guideline
Minimizing Voltage Where an appreciable number of system horn/strobes or other high-
Drop current devices are involved, consider using a dual run of the gateway
trunk cable. If a dual cable run is being used, try to locate the gateway
so that the sensor load will be evenly distributed between the two runs.
Gateway Location Make sure the SIM gateway is:
• As close as possible to any horn/strobes or other heavy loads.
• Within the protected area near points of protection.
• Not mounted on temporary walls or partitions.
• Protected from physical damage.
• Mounted in an area free from excessive vibrations, corrosive
atmospheres, and temperature extremes.
SIM Gateway control unit, or to an external power supply, if used. (8.4VDC at end of
standby time).
Maximum RS-485 Bus 4000 feet. This distance may be less to comply with the minimum
Length from Control voltage to the SIM gateway.
Unit to Gateway
Total Length of Must not exceed 1000 feet. This length may be less to comply with
Gateway Trunk Cable minimum voltage to farthest SIM sensor. If using a dual trunk run, limit
applies to the sum of both runs.
Maximum Cable 100 feet.

Length to SIM Sensor Note: T-tapping to an existing cable without cutting the existing cable is
permitted and will not adversely effect supervision.
Farthest SIM and control unit, or to an external power supply, if used (8.3VDC at end of
Sensor standby time).
Gateway Log Form As a part of the installation, complete the Gateway Trunk log Form
shown previously in this section. When the form has been completed,
make a duplicate copy. Store one copy in the control unit and file the
other copy in the office.
Maximum Current Black and Red wires: 1.0A; Blue and Yellow wires: 128mA.
Draw from Gateway
Trunk
Mounting the SIM Gateway

To mount the SIM gateway, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Locate the SIM gateway as outlined previously under the installation guidelines.
2 Mount the housing unit on a wall at the intended location using the two #8 screws in the
holes provided, making sure that its hinge is level and that the cover opens upward.
Note: If the housing unit is being mounted near a ceiling, and the wire rims exit the
ceiling, the box can be inverted. The ADT label supplied with the box can be placed over
the inverted molded logo. Now the wire runs can go directly to the box from the ceiling, and
not around the box.
3 Insert the gateway in the housing and depress the board until the locking catch snaps over
the PC board edge. Gateways are easily removed by depressing the locking catch.
5-15
Wiring the SIM Gateway

To wire the SIM gateway, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 At the control unit, make sure the Power switch is in the "OFF" position.
bus to a single wire run.
Note: It is important to appropriately tag the cables so they can readily be identified. This
is especially important if troubleshooting becomes necessary at some future date.
3 Run the cable through one of the three 1/2" knockouts of the housing unit. Cut the cable
and remove enough sheathing and insulation from each wire to allow fastening under the
pressure plates of TB1 and TB2.
5 Connect the RS-485 cable to TB1 of the gateway. Identify terminal wires so that the proper
wires can be connected to each terminal. See Figure 5-6.
Terminal Terminal
#19 AWG Blue RS-485 17 21
Addressing the SIM Gateway

To address the SIM gateway, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Set the RS-485 address jumpers to Communication Group 3 and to a Unit Number from 0
to 7 (see Figure 5-6).
2 Set jumper E1 to the appropriate setting:
• Remove jumper if gateway is NOT located at the end of the RS-485 bus.
• Leave jumper intact if gateway IS located at the end if the RS-485 bus.
3 Mark the SIM Gateway address on the Housing Unit cover using stick-on labels.
If system power calculations were required, make sure that the Gateway will be receiving at least 12.1 volts
(or 8.4V at end of standby time) and that the length of the Gateway trunk is within the maximum
permissible distance calculated in Power Requirements section.
5-16
Installing SIM and SIM Sensors

Install each sensor in the manner recommended in the manufacturer’s instructions.
System-powered sensors cannot be adjusted or tested until the system power has been turned on, the point
data has been loaded into the control unit, and communication has been established between the control
unit and the gateway.
All SIM sensors are connected to the SIM gateway trunk cable via a 2-conductor branch cable. Two
types of branch cable are available for sensor connections. Each is a 2-conductor, 18-AWG cable,
differing only in type of insulation. The cables are:
• 493494 - Approved for FA, SUPV, HUA, and BA.
• 493493 - Approved for FA, SUPV, HUA, and BA where wire is being installed in air-handling
plenums (Teflon or equiv.).

SIM Sensors Receives operating power and Uses the blue and yellow wires. The black
communications from the and red conductors are not used.
gateway trunk cable's blue and
yellow wires.
System-powered Receives operating power from Two types of system-powered sensors:
sensor the gateway trunk cable's red and • Integrated, such as Horn/Strobe, which
black wires. The sensor must be uses the 4 conductors of the trunk cable.
capable of operating between 8
and 15 volts, with a maximum • Non-integrated, which uses the output
current of 85mA. wires of the SIM: black/white (-) and
red/white (+). They also use 3 wires, for
connection of a 33k resistor: orange,
blue/white, and white.
Independently Uses operating power from an Wired the same way as a SIM sensor except
powered sensor external source. the 12-volt terminals are wired to the
external power source.
Wiring a SIM or SIM Sensor

An SIM Sensor is installed on branch cables from the Gateway trunk. These branch cables are limited
to 100 ft long. If the branch cable drops below 6 feet or is subject to damage that may result in shorting
of conductors, a 248302 Fuse must be installed. This protects the Gateway trunk from being disabled in
the event of a short on the wires. Only the SIM with the blown fuse will be in Comm Fail, not the entire
Gateway trunk.
Install a SIM or SIM sensor by taking the following steps and by referring to Figures 5-7 through 5-12.
Step Action
1 Run the branch cable no more than 100 feet long from the Gateway trunk. Use cable SCN
493494 or 493493 for two-wire SIM connections. Use SCN 494465 or 494467 for four-wire
SIM connections.
2 Cut the sheathing of the Gateway trunk to expose the four wires of the trunk.
3 Use Scotchlok SCN 809190 connectors (#558) to connect the branch cable to the Gateway
trunk, matching the colors of the wires on the trunk with the branch cable.
4 If the branch cable is subject to damage, splice in an SCN 248302 in-line fuse with holder
and place it close to the Gateway trunk.
5-17
Step Action
5 Snap the Trunk Junction box SCN 148320 around the connections to enhance appearance.
6 Connect the branch cable to the SIM or SIM Sensor. SIM sensors that have screw
terminals include the smoke detector, the FA Pullbox, motion sensors, and glassbreaks.
Connect these directly to the branch cable.
7 Splice the SIM module to the branch cable. Use SCN 810953 connectors to splice to the
branch cable.
8 Collect the point description, gateway number, and Hard ID's of all installed SIMs so they
can be programmed into the control unit. Use the Gateway Trunk Log Form to record the
Gateway, Hard ID, BA Group, and point description. Once the data has been collected, it
must be entered into the control unit via the operating panel. See the Programming
section for the procedure. Once the data has been programmed, walk-tests LEDs will
function.
The Hard ID label: The top line is the barcode. The second line is in readable text. The
first eight digits are the Hard ID. The next six digits are the Stock Code Number (SCN #).
The next four digits are the manufacturing date codes ("year week"). The last two digits
are for the vendor codes like "P" for Pine Brook.
9 Mark the SIM Sensor point number stick-on labels SCN 146844. Peel off the number that
represents the point number and stick it on the outside of the sensor so it is clearly visible
and can be referred to later.
Sensors cannot be walk-tested unless the sensor's point type, group, gateway, and Hard ID are in the
control unit's database.
GATEWAY 472366 SIM

TRUNK
CONNECTIONS
OUT 0
RED OUTPUT POWER

RED-WHT +12V
+12V (FOR INPUT POINT, TRANSISTOR SWITCH IS
TRANSISTOR CONTINUOUSLY CLOSED TO SUPPLY SENSOR POWER.
BLK SWITCH
GND BLK-WHT GND FOR OUTPUT POINT, TRANSISTOR SWITCH CLOSES ONLY
WHEN COMMANDED FROM CONTROL UNIT.)
BLU
COM (+) SYSTEM-POWERED NON-POWERED
SENSOR SENSOR
W/ TRANSFER CONTACTS W/ BREAK-ONLY CONTACT
AND TAMPER (NO TAMPER)
+12V
+12V
GND
ORG
IN 0
C5 AL-TBL
2.3 uf
25V
T
BLU-WHT
IN 2
TMPR
YEL
WHT
COM ( )
IN 0
MICROPROCESSOR CONDITION IN 0 IN 2 CONDITION IN 0 IN 2
INPUT NORMAL 6V GND NORMAL 6V GND
IN 2
ALARM GND GND ALARM 12V GND
MICROPROCESSOR TAMPER 6V 12V TAMPER 6V 12V
OUT 0
OUTPUT OPEN LOOP 12V 12V OPEN LOOP 12V 12V
Figure 5-7: SIM Wiring to System Powered and Nonpowered Sensors
5-18
BLU
COM+
+12V LED
SEE SENSOR
POWER
NOTE 3 POWER +12V
DATA SEE NOTE 1 SELF TEST

OUT 0
IN/OUT INPUT
OUT 1
SIM SENSOR
INTERFACE ELEMENT
IN 0 ALARM OUTPUT
SEE NOTE 2
IN 1 DIAGNOSTIC
IN 2 OUTPUT
GND GND
TAMPER
YEL
COM-
NOTES:
1. POINT OPTION 3="Y".
2. DIAGNOSTIC OPTION ENABLED.
3. IF LED DISABLE OPTION = "N", LED WILL LIGHT WHEN DETECTOR

ALARMS PROVIDED POINT IS NOT BYPASSED.
IF LED DISABLE OPTION = "Y", LED WILL LIGHT WHEN DETECTOR

ALARMS ONLY IN WALK TEST OR SERVICE MODE PROVIDED POINT
IS NOT BYPASSED.
Figure 5-8: Connection for a Gateway Loop Powered SIM Sensor
472488 HORN-STROBE SIM

OUT 1
RED OR
+12V +
TRANSISTOR
SWITCH 3K
EOLR HORN
BLACK
GND
BLK/W
OUT 0
+
RED/W
TRANSISTOR
SWITCH 3K
EOLR STROBE
BLK/W
BLU
COM+ POWER
SUPERVISION
33K
TRANSISTOR
SWITCH
IN 0
33K
YEL
COM-
Figure 5-9: SIM Wiring to a Horn and Strobe
5-19
472366 SIM
OUT 0
SEE NOTE 1
RED RED/W
+12V
TRANSISTOR +
SWITCH
BLK BLK/W
GND
BLU
COM+
TAMPER
33K
NC
33K
33K
OR
IN 0
AL-TBL C
BLU/W
IN 2
TMPR
NO
YEL WHT
COM-
NOTE: 1) POINT OPTION 3="N"

2) SIM MOUNTED INSIDE SENSOR OR IN JUNCTION BOX
SPACED NO MORE THAN 6 FEET FROM SENSOR.
Figure 5-10: SIM Wiring to a Sensor
472366 SIM
OUT 0
FOCUS-VVS
ADT VAULT VIBRATION SENSOR
SEE NOTE
RED RED/W
+12V X
TRANSISTOR
SWITCH
BLK BLK/W
GND X
33K
BLU + LED C NC NO TAMPER

COM+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
33K
33K
OR
IN 0
AL-TBL
BLK
BLU/W
IN 2
TMPR
RED
YEL WHT
COM-
TEST
TRANSMITTER
NOTE: POINT OPTION 3="Y"
Figure 5-11: SIM Connections to a Vault Vibration Sensor
5-20
BLACK
X
RED
X
YELLOW
X
BLUE
X
869706 (10K 5% 1/2W)
X REMOVE
JUMPER J1
GRN YEL 10.2 - 13.8VDC
SUPERVISED
BLK 472366 BLU/GRN 247650 BLU/YEL 4Ma NORMAL STANDBY
SIM X
RED ORA WHT ORA 30Ma MAX WHEN ALL DEVICES IN ALARM
4W/2W
X ADAPTER
YEL BLU/WHT 10K 5% 1/2W
BOARD 244708
BLU WHT BLU/WHT 3K EOLR
X (8mA NORMAL
(INSIDE ELECTRICALLY
RED/WHT RED STANDBY)
X (35mA ALARM) LAST DEVICE IN LOOP)
BLK/WHT BLK BLU/ORA
X
Figure 5-12: SIM Connections to a 4-Wire/2-Wire Adapter
Compatible Detectors for 4-Wire/2-Wire Adapter

Spot-Type Detector UL ID Base UL ID
429C; 429CT; 521B ESL Photoelectric S10 ---
521BXT Photo w/Thermostat S10 ---
429AT Photoelectric Head S10A 435006 (3536-601) S00
435008 (3536-612) Ionization Head --- 435006 (3536-601) S00
435170 (3536-613) Heat Head --- 435006 (3536-601) S00
Air-Duct Detector Function Card UL ID
435152 (3537-001) 611UD Photoelectric Head 435150 (3537-010) (609U10) S00
435153 (3537-002) 612UD Ionization Head 435150 (3537-010) (609U10) S00
When smoke and fire doors are held in the open position to allow free movement in corridors of
buildings, it is required that the doors be released when a fire alarm is activated. This requires a
472488 supervised SIM or 472366 SIM to release the Door Hold-Open device.
To install a 472488 supervised SIM or 472366 SIM to release the Door Hold-Open device, perform the
following steps:
Step Action
1 Mount and connect the SIM device. See Wiring a SIM or SIM Sensor shown previously in
this section.
Note: When 472366 SIM is used, the cable run between the SIM and Door Hold-Open
device can not exceed 3 feet.
2 Program it as FAC (21) point type.
For NFPA Life Safety applications, install a 472367 Door Contact to monitor the status of the door.
Program it as MID (5) point type.
5-21
RF Gateway (472490)
The 5800ADT RF gateway provides additional RF points for the FOCUS 200 PLUS system, up to 72
points. The RF gateway is designed for use in conjunction with a 5881H/5881EH/5882H/5881ENHC RF
receiver only, and can support up to two receivers. It monitors individual 5800 series transmitters and
only reports changes in their status to the control panel. Only 1 RF gateway may be connected to the
RS-485 bus. It is automatically set for Communication Group 03, Unit 7 once the control unit is
powered-up with the gateway connected.
The Unit number for the RF gateway’s identification with the control unit is fixed at 7.
The RF gateway used only in conjunction with the 5881ENHC RF Receiver and the 5869 Holdup Switch
UL Transmitter are listed for UL Commercial Burglary applications. All other RF receivers and transmitters are
not listed for UL Commercial Burglary applications.
RF Gateway Physical Description

The gateway consists of a printed wiring board that is installed in a plastic housing unit. The following
are important items on the board (see Figure 5-14):
Part Purpose
Terminal Strip TB1 Used for making connections to the RS-485 bus, to the RF receiver, and to
power the RF gateway.
Panel LED (red) Indicates the following status:
Steady OFF: No communication/activity between the control panel and the
RF gateway.
Flashing: Normal condition.
Steady ON: The RF gateway is in an error state.
RF LED (green) Indicates the following status:
Steady OFF: The RF gateway is in an error state or is receiving no power.
Steady ON: Power indication for the RF gateway. No RF transmission
activity, or receiver(s) have failed, or the receiver’s antenna has
a problem.
CONNECT TO
5881H/5881EH/5882H/5881ENHC
PANEL LED (RED) 5800ADT RF RECEIVER
RF LED (GREEN)
CONNECTOR
YELLOW
GREEN
BLACK
RED
ECP
DATA INPUT BUS
6
DATA OUTPUT
5
+ (+) 12VDC
4
( ) GND
3
+ 2 H BUS (+)
1 H BUS ( )
YELLOW
BLACK
BLUE
TB1
RED
RS485
BUS
(-) GND
P1
(+) 12V
5800ADT-002-V1
(+)
(-)
TO
5800ADT RF EXPANDER MODULE CONTROL PANEL
Figure 5-14: RF Gateway Wiring Connections
5-22
Installing the RF Gateway

Mounting the RF Gateway
To mount the RF gateway, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Remove the RF gateway’s circuit board from its plastic case and mount the case with the
appropriate mounting hardware.
2 Re-insert the circuit board into the plastic case.
Wiring the RF Gateway

To wire the RF gateway, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 At the control unit, make sure the power switch is in the "OFF" position.
2 Run the buses as required and make sure to appropriately tag them. Limit each RS-485 bus
to a single wire run.
3 Run the cable through the side opening of the housing unit. Cut the cable and remove
enough sheathing and insulation from each wire to allow fastening under the pressure
plates of TB1.
the red conductor and the (-) lead to the black conductor). A reading of less than 12 ohms
indicates a short on the conductors. Make the necessary corrections before proceeding.
5 Connect the RS-485 cable to TB1 of the gateway. Identify terminal wires so that the proper
wires can be connected to each terminal. See Figure 5-14.
Terminal Terminal
#19 AWG Blue RS-485 17 21
#16 AWG Red + 12VDC Power 19 23
7 Remove jumper P1 unless the RF gateway module is to be located at the end of the RS-485
bus; in that case, leave the jumper on.
Installing the RF Receiver

• The receiver can detect signals from transmitters within a nominal range of 200 feet.
• Mount the receiver in a high, centrally located area for best reception. Do not place the receiver on
or near metal objects or inside a metal cabinet.
• For maximum range, the receiver should be at least 10 feet from the control panel or any remote
keypads to avoid interference from their microprocessors.
• The 5881ENHC receiver contains front and back tampers that permit its use in commercial
burglary installations and can be enabled only via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader.
• You may only mount the 5881ENHC its own plastic housing. Otherwise, the receiver constantly
reports a tamper condition.
• If two RF receivers are used:
• Each must be at least 10 feet from the other receiver, the control panel and remote keypads.
• Using two receivers does not increase the number of RF points that the system can support.
• In Canada, the 5882H receiver must be used.
5-23
Mounting and Wiring the RF Receiver

To mount the RF receiver, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Remove the RF receiver’s circuit board from its plastic case and mount the case, using the
appropriate mounting hardware. See receiver’s instructions for mounting information.
Note: The receiver can be mounted up to 500 feet from the RF gateway (see table below).
Wire gauge Maximum length for one receiver Maximum length for two receivers
#18 500 feet 250 feet
#22 225 feet 112 feet
Note: The length of all wire runs combined must not exceed 500 feet when unshielded
quad conductor cable is used (250 feet if shielded cable is used).
2 If installing a 5881ENHC, install a flat-head screw (supplied) in the case tamper tab as
shown in Figure 5-15. When the receiver is pried from the wall, the tamper tab will break
off and remain on the wall. This will activate a tamper switch in the receiver and cause
generation of a tamper signal. Note that this signal will also be generated when the
receiver’s front cover is removed.
3 Connect the RF gateway to the RF receiver. See Figure 5-14 for wiring connections.
4 Install the two antennas into the right-hand terminals of the 2-terminal block in the
receiver (see receiver’s instructions). If you are using a second receiver, install the
antennas on that receiver.
SCREW
5881ENHC-001-V0
Figure 5-15: Installer the 5881ENHC with Tamper Protection
Addressing and Programming the RF Receiver

ON OFF ON OFF
*SWITCH
5
POSITION 5
IS PRESENT
4
ONLY ON
5881ENHC
3
(SEE
2
RECEIVER
INSTRUCTIONS
ON
ON
1
FOR USAGE).
RF_dip_sw-001-V0
DIP SWITCH SETTING DIP SWITCH SETTING

FOR 1st RECEIVER FOR 2st RECEIVER
(ADDRESS "1") (ADDRESS "2") -
Figure 5-16: RF Receiver DIP Switch Settings
5-24
To address and program the RF receiver, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Set the RF receiver’s DIP switches as follows:
Set the first receiver’s device address to “1” (see Figure 5-16). If a second receiver is used,
set its device address to "2."
2 Program the number of RF receivers, set the RF Jam options (point 242), and set the
supervision interval via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader.
• Program the supervision of the receiver(s) (Receiver 1 = point 244 and Receiver 2 =
point 243) with input type 13 SPV.
• Program the supervision for RF Jam (point 242) with input type 13 SPV.
• Enable the tamper detection for the 5881ENHC RF receiver, if used, via the
ADEMCO Compass Downloader.
5800 Series Transmitters

5800 Series transmitters have built-in serial numbers (Hard ID) that must be programmed into the
system. The serial number may be programmed via the operating panel while programming the point
data, or via the downline loading.
For button-type transmitters (wireless keys), such as the 5804, 5802, and 5801, you must assign a
unique point number to each individual button used on the transmitter (i.e., arm, disarm). Each button
on the transmitter also has a pre-designated loop or input number. Refer to the Programming section
for a detailed description of the procedure for programming RF points.
If an RF transmitter is used to arm or disarm the system, the point must be assigned to a user. Otherwise,
the system will show the arm/disarm prompts when the button is pressed, but the system will not change
state. We recommend using an outdoor annunciator for confirmation of arming.
Transmitter Input Types

All of the transmitters described have one or more unique factory-assigned inputs (loops). Each of the
inputs requires its own programming point (e.g., 5804’s four-buttons require four programming points).
Transmitters can be programmed as one of the following types:
Type Description
RF Sends periodic Check-in signals, as well as Fault, Restore, and Low Battery
signals. Transmitter must remain within the receiver’s range.
Supervised RF
UR Sends all the signals that the RF type does, but the control does not supervise
the Check-in signals. Transmitter may therefore be carried off-premises (i.e.
Unsupervised RF
holdups).
BR These only send Fault signals. They only send Low Battery signals when they
are activated (button pressed). Transmitter may be carried off-premises (i.e.
Unsupervised Button RF
keyfobs).
Transmitter Supervision
Except for some transmitters that may be carried off premises (5804), each transmitter sends a
supervisory signal to the RF receiver every 70–90 minutes. If at least one signal is not received from
each supervised transmitter within a programmed check-in interval, the “missing” transmitter(s) will
display a trouble condition. For transmitters that may be carried off the premises (5802MN), turn off
the supervision by programming it as a “UR” (unsupervised RF) type.
The system is shipped with the transmitter check-in interval defaulted to (0) no supervision. Be sure to
program a check-in interval if you are using RF supervised transmitters. Otherwise, the system will not
annunciate a supervisory trouble condition from those transmitters.
Some 5800 Series transmitters have built-in tamper protection and will annunciate a trouble condition
if covers are removed.
5-25
Transmitter Battery Life

• Batteries may last from 4 to 7 years, depending on the environment, usage, and the specific
wireless device being used. Factors such as humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large
swings in temperature may all reduce the actual battery life in a given installation.
• The wireless system can identify a true low-battery situation, thus allowing the user time to
arrange a change of battery and maintain protection for that point within the system.
• Button-type transmitters (e.g., 5801 and 5802) must be periodically tested for battery life.
Testing the Transmitters

For information about how to test the transmitters, refer to the Testing the System section.
Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters

Model Product Input Type Description
5802MN Miniature (Personal UR or RF • Has single pushbutton.
Emergency Transmitter) • If you are using this for
arming/disarming, the button must
be assigned to a user code.
• Contains a replaceable battery.
Wireless Key Transmitter BR Only • Has four pushbuttons, each with a
5804KEY Blue unique input (loop).
5804ADTGR Green
• If you are using this for
5804ADTRD Red arming/disarming, the button must
5804ADTYE Yellow be assigned to a user code.
5816MC Money Clip Transmitter UR or RF • Has a normally closed contact loop.
• Typically used in a cash drawer.
• Triggers when all the money is
removed from the money clip.
5869 Holdup Switch RF • Typically mounted under a counter
Transmitter or money draw for inconspicuous
operation.
• Once activated, can only be reset by
the reset key.
• Tamper switches are activated
when the cover is removed, or if the
unit is forcibly removed from its
installation location.
Long Range Radio Gateway

The 7800ADT LRR gateway is an interface for a single 7845C Long Range Radio. Only 1 LRR gateway
may be connected to the RS-485 bus.
NOTE: Currently the 7845C Long Range Radio link is not yet Factory-Mutual approved.
5-26
LRR Gateway Physical Description

The gateway consists of a printed wiring board that is installed in a plastic housing unit. The following
are important items on the board (see Figure 5-17):
Part Purpose
Terminal Strip TB1 Used for making connections to the RS-485 bus, to the 7845C, and to power
the LRR gateway.
Panel LED (red) Indicates the following status:
Steady OFF: No communication/activity between the control panel and the
LRR gateway.
Steady ON: The LRR gateway is in an error state.
LRR LED (green) Indicates the following status:
Steady OFF: The LRR gateway is in an error state or is receiving no power.
Steady ON: Power indication for the LRR gateway. No LRR transmission
activity, or 7845C has failed.
TO 7845C LONG
RANGE RADIO
7800ADT TB2 TB1
PANEL LED (RED)
RF LED (GREEN)
DATA OUT
DATA IN
GND
V+
YELLOW
GREEN
BLACK
RED
ECP
DATA INPUT
BUS
6
DATA OUTPUT
5
+ (+) 12VDC
4
( ) GND
3
+ 2 H BUS (+)
1 H BUS ( )
YELLOW
BLACK
BLUE
TB1
RED
RS485
BUS
(-) GND
P1
(+) 12V
(+)
(-)
7800ADT LONG RANGE RADIO GATEWAY TO
CONTROL PANEL
7800ADT-002-V0
Figure 5-17: LRR Gateway Wiring Connections
Installing the LRR Gateway
Mounting the LRR Gateway

To mount the LRR gateway, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Remove the LRR gateway’s circuit board from its plastic case and mount the case with
the appropriate mounting hardware.
2 Re-insert the circuit board into the plastic case.
5-27
Wiring the LRR Gateway

To wire the LRR gateway, perform the following steps:
Step Action
Note: It is important to appropriately tag the cables so they can readily be identified.
This is especially important if troubleshooting becomes necessary at some future date.
3 Run the cable through the side opening of the housing unit. Cut the cable and remove
enough sheathing and insulation from each wire to allow fastening under the pressure
plates of TB1.
4 Measure the resistance between the black and red conductors (the (+) lead of the meter
to the red conductor and the (-) lead to the black conductor). A reading of less than 12
ohms indicates a short on the power conductors. Make the necessary corrections before
proceeding.
5 Connect the RS-485 cable to TB1 of the gateway. Identify terminal wires so that the
proper wires can be connected to each terminal. See Figure 5-17.
Terminal Terminal
#19 AWG Blue RS-485 17 21
#16 AWG Red + 12VDC Power 19 23
7 Remove jumper P1 unless the LRR gateway module is to be located at the end of the RS-
485 bus; in that case, leave the jumper on.
Installing the 7845C Long Range Radio

Use 4-conductor cable to connect the 7845C to the LRR gateway. Refer to Figure 5-17 for wiring
connections. The maximum length of the wire run depends on the wire gauge see the table below.
Wire gauge Maximum length

#18 500 feet
#22 225 feet
Note: The maximum length of the wire run must not exceed 500 feet when unshielded quad conductor
cable is used (250 feet if shielded cable is used).
Operation
The FOCUS 200 PLUS features Dynamic Signaling Delay and Dynamic Signaling Priority
message reporting when Long Range Radio is used. These message outputs are programmed only via
the ADT Compass Downloading software.. The Dynamic Signaling feature is designed to reduce the
number of redundant reports sent to the Customer Care Center.
The feature is described as follows:
• Dynamic Signaling Delay
Select the time the panel should wait for acknowledgment from the first reporting destination
before it attempts to send a message to the second destination. Delays can be selected from 0 to 225
seconds, in 15-second increments.
• Dynamic Signaling Priority
Select the initial reporting destination for messages, Primary Dialer (0) or Long Range Radio (1).
5-28
• Without line security (Grade A), the maximum Dynamic Signaling Delay, is 15 seconds for Fire and
UL •
UL Burglary installations.
With line security (Grade AA), the Dynamic Signaling Delay must be 0 (no delay) for UL Burglary
installations. The reports will be sent to both the primary phone number and the LRR.
The chart below provides an explanation of how the Dynamic Signaling feature functions.
If the Priority is… And message is… Then…
Primary Phone Acknowledged before delay expires Message is removed from queue and no
Number message is sent to LRR.
Not acknowledged before delay Message is sent to both the Primary
expires Phone No. and LRR.
Long Range Radio Acknowledged before delay expires Message is removed from queue and no
message is sent to Primary Phone No.
Not acknowledged before delay Message is sent to both the Primary
expires Phone No. and LRR.
Programming the Control Unit for the LRR Gateway

Programming the control unit for the LRR gateway is done only via the ADEMCO Compass
Downloading software.
To programming the 7845C you must use either the 7720P Programming Tool or the 7845C PRO Mode.
Refer to the 7845C Installation and Setup Guide for the programming details.
Long Range Radio Trouble Conditions

The following is a list of trouble conditions that can occur when using the LRR Gateway with the 7845C
Long Range Radio.
Display Description
T – LRR Tamper Fault The tamper on the long range radio has been tripped
B – LRR Low Batt The battery connected directly to the long range radio is low
V – LRR VSWR The long range radio’s antenna is malfunctioning and not communicating
with the tower.
D – LRR DC Fault The DC power from the gateway is low or not present.
C – LRR Comm Fault The long range radio was unable to transmit the last message
E – LRR ECP Fault The gateway and the long range radio are not communicating with each
other.
R – RS485 Fault The control unit and the gateway are not communicating with each other.
Gateway Off-Normal Conditions

During operation, the gateway polls the point sensors that are connected to its trunk, and stores the
status of the protection loop. When interrogated, the gateway reports any change in status to the
control unit where it is processed to determine whether there is an alarm or trouble condition.
5-29
Specific off-normal conditions monitored by the gateway and reported to the control unit are as follows:
PID Gateway
Off-Normal Condition Cause
Cross A short across the EOLR of the protection loop.
Open An open or ground in the protection loop and may include the sensor
tamper.
Comm Fail Failure to receive a response from a point when it is interrogated. PID
may be defective, or there may be a fault with the cable to the gateway
trunk, or PID has not been addressed correctly.
Point Tamper Activation of a tamper on a PID.
Multiple Conditions These are combinations of cross and open, cross and tamper, open and
tamper, and cross, open, and tamper.
PIDs addressed the same The gateway will interpret this as a tamper plus comm fail.
SIM Gateway
Cross Indicates an alarm condition.
Open Indicates a trouble condition.
Comm Fail Failure to receive a response from a point when it is interrogated. SIM
may be defective, or there may be a fault with the cable to the gateway,
or the gateway has been addressed incorrectly.
Point Tamper Activation of a tamper on a sensor. If the BA group is Nite Set, this is
interpreted as an alarm.
Multiple Conditions These are combinations of cross and open (alarm and trouble), cross and
tamper (alarm and tamper), open, and tamper (trouble and tamper), and
cross, open, and tamper (alarm, trouble and tamper).
Diagnostics The false alarm immunity of the sensors is impaired. Examples: A Dual
motion detector with one of its technologies malfunctioning may increase
in sensitivity to motion. A smoke detector that is dirty may increase in
sensitivity to smoke.
RF Gateway
Cross FA point: Alarm condition.
BA point: Normal condition.
Open FA point: Trouble condition.
BA point: Alarm condition.
Comm Fail 1. Failure to receive a response from a point when it is interrogated.
RF transmitter may be defective, or there may be a fault with the
cable to the gateway trunk, or the gateway has not been addressed
correctly.
2. Low battery condition in a RF transmitter.
Note: To determine which of these conditions the system is
annunciating, check the system's history log.
Point Tamper Activation of a tamper on an RF transmitter.
5-30
S E C T I O N 6
Built-in SIM Loop

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ About the SIM Loop ♦ Installing SIM and SIM Sensors
♦ SIM Loop Supervision ♦ Installing a Keyswitch to the SIM Loop
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About the SIM Loop

The SIM Loop is a built-in interface used to connect SIM (Sensor Interface Module) sensors with the
FOCUS 200 PLUS system. The SIM Loop can accommodate up to 72 points and provides up to 128mA
of current.
The sensor types employed on the SIM loop can be divided into two categories:
• Sensors that have been uniquely manufactured with a built-in SIM.
• Standard sensors, which require connection to a separate SIM in order to be connected to the loop.
The SIM loop quad cable consists of four wires. The two wires (blue and yellow) are used in a
multiplexed arrangement to serve a dual function. During one half-cycle, the wires are used for
communication with the panel; during the next half-cycle, they provide limited + 12V operating power.
The other two wires (red and black) provide power for those devices that require system power.
All SIM Loop devices must be programmed to Gateway 9.
Sensor Interface Module (SIM)

A Sensor Interface Module (SIM) is either connected to an external sensor or has a built-in sensor (SIM
sensor). A SIM sensor is wired to the blue (terminal 39 (+)) and yellow (terminal 40 (-)) wires of the
branch cable. When you are using an external sensor, the SIM connects to all four wires of the SIM
Loop quad branch cable (Red to terminal 19 (+) and Black to terminal 20 (-)).
Each SIM and SIM sensor comes with a label containing the Hard ID number as well as information
that identifies the manufacturer and gives the date of manufacture. The Hard ID number is used to
identify the SIM or SIM sensor to the control unit, and is linked to a system point number during the
programming of the point.
Sensors with a built-in SIM:
• Have been designed for the multiplexed operation.
• Require only a 2-wire connection to the SIM Loop quad trunk.
• Are appreciably smaller than a separate SIM, permitting them to be housed in devices as small as
contacts.
The SIM connected to a sensor is:
• A small circuit board, protected by shrink tubing, with four input wires and six output wires.
• Housed either in the device with which it is being used or in a separately ordered 370320(7032)
Junction Box.
• A low-current device drawing less than 1mA.
• Powered from the + 12V (red and black) wires of the SIM Loop trunk cable, if system power is
required.
• Capable of being used as an output point. When activated, it will provide a + 12V output to operate
a relay, LED, etc.
6-1
SIM Loop Applications

The SIM Loop is designed to be used with the following:
• 472366 Sensor Interface Module (SIM) used with Junction Box SCN 370320.
• 472367 SIM Door/Window contact.
• 472371 SIM Overhead Door contact.
• 472370 SIM Manual FA Pullbox.
• 472374 SIM Holdup Alarm Switch.
• 248309 SIM Relay Output Module kit and/or with Relay Module SCN 248026.
• 429CTAD SIM Smoke Detector
• 472425 Loop Interface Module (LIM)
• 472488 Horn/Strobe SIM.
• 450SIM, 633SIM, 669 SIM Motion Sensors.
Total Length of SIM Must not exceed 2000 feet. This length may be less to comply with
Loop Trunk Cable minimum voltage to farthest SIM sensor.
Maximum Length to 100 feet.

SIM Sensor Note: T-tapping to an existing cable without cutting the existing cable is
permitted and will not adversely effect supervision.
Minimum Voltage to 12.0VDC with a fully charged battery and AC power applied, or an
Farthest SIM and external power supply, if used (8.3VDC at end of standby time).
Sensor
SIM Loop Log Form As a part of the installation, complete the SIM Loop Log Form shown
previously in this section. When the form has been completed, make a
duplicate copy. Store one copy in the control unit and file the other copy
in the office.
Maximum Current Black and Red wires: 1.0A; Blue and Yellow wires: 128mA.
Draw from SIM Loop
Trunk Cable
SIM Loop Supervision

A short on the SIM Loop is indicated by a trouble on its supervisory point (241) and reports as a trouble
condition only. As such, it should be assigned the point type SPV, if annunciation as a trouble condition
is desired. An open in the blue and/or yellow wires of the branch cable will be sensed as a comm fail
condition.
Installing SIM and SIM Sensors

Install each sensor in the manner recommended in the manufacturer’s instructions.
System-powered sensors cannot be adjusted or tested until the system power has been turned on, the
point data has been loaded into the control unit, and communication has been established between the
control unit and the SIM sensors.
All SIM sensors are connected to the SIM Loop via a 2-conductor cable. Two types of cables are
available for the connections. Each is a 2-conductor, 18-AWG cable, differing only in type of insulation.
The cables are:
• 493494 - Approved for FA, SUPV, HUA, and BA.
• 493493 - Approved for FA, SUPV, HUA, and BA where wire is being installed in air-handling
plenums (Teflon or equiv.).
6-2
Section 6 – SIM Loop

SIM Sensors Receives operating power and Uses the blue and yellow wires. The black
communications from the SIM loop and red conductors are not used.
trunk cable's blue and yellow wires.
System-powered Receives operating power from the Two types of system-powered sensors:
sensor SIM Loop trunk cable's red and • Integrated, such as Horn/Strobe,
black wires via the SIM. The sensor which uses the 4 conductors of the
must be capable of operating SIM Loop trunk cable.
between 8 and 15 volts, with a
maximum current of 85mA. • Non-integrated, which uses the
output wires of the SIM: black/white
(-) and red/white (+). They also use 3
wires, for connection of a 33k resistor:
orange, blue/white, and white.
Independently Uses operating power from an Wired the same way as a SIM sensor
powered sensor external source. except the 12-volt terminals on the SIM
are connected to an external power source.
Compatible SIM Loop Devices

Model Description Function
4208U Universal 8- • Uniquely identifies 8 EOLR-supervised points (all points
Point Expander use 10k resistors, supplied).
• Each Hard ID in the selected group can be assigned to
any point number.
• Loops A&B can be programmed for fast (10mSec)
response.
• Can be optionally powered from an external DC power
supply to reduce current draw from the SIM loop.
• Tamper protected.
4209U Universal • Uniquely identifies 4 supervised points or 2 supervised
Group Zoning points in the “grouped” mode.
Module • Supports up to 16 two-wire smoke detectors on each of
its 4 loops, regardless of group setting.
• Each Hard ID in the selected group can be assigned to
any point number.
4208SNF Universal Class • Provides 6 Class B supervised points and 2 Class A
A Module supervised points (all points use 10k resistors, supplied).
• Can be optionally powered from an external DC power
supply to reduce current draw from the SIM loop.
• Each hard ID in the selected group can be assigned to
any point number.
• Loops A&B can be programmed for fast (10msec)
response.
6-3
Wiring a SIM or SIM Sensor

A SIM Sensor is connected to the SIM Loop quad trunk cable. The cables are limited to 100 ft long. If
the branch cable drops below 6 feet or is subject to damage that may result in shorting of conductors, a
248302 Fuse must be installed. This protects the SIM Loop trunk from being disabled in the event of a
short on the wires. Only the SIM with the blown fuse will be in Comm Fail, not the entire SIM Loop
trunk.
When running SIM loop wires, they must not be run within 6" of AC power, telephone, or intercom wiring.
Because the SIM loop is carrying data between the control unit and the devices, interference on this loop
can cause an interruption of this communication. The SIM loop can also cause outgoing interference on
the intercom or phone lines. If this spacing cannot be achieved, shielded wire must be used. (Note that
the maximum total wire length supported is cut in half when shielded wire is used.)
SIM Loop Log Form

Total Loop Load ______mA Unit # 9

BA Group _____ ________________________________ BA Group _____ ________________________________

BA Group _____ ________________________________ BA Group _____ ________________________________

BA Group _____ ________________________________ BA Group _____ ________________________________

BA Group _____ ________________________________ BA Group _____ ________________________________

BA Group _____ ________________________________ BA Group _____ ________________________________

BA Group _____ ________________________________ BA Group _____ ________________________________

BA Group _____ ________________________________ BA Group _____ ________________________________

BA Group _____ ________________________________ BA Group _____ ________________________________
6-4
Install an SIM or SIM sensor by taking the following steps and referring to Figures 6-1 through 6-7.
Step Action
1 Run the cable no more than 100 feet long from the SIM Loop. Use cable SCN 493494 or
493493 for 2-wire connections. Use SCN 494465 or 494467 for 4-wire connections.
2 Cut the sheathing of the SIM Loop trunk to expose the four wires of the trunk.
3 Use Scotchlok SCN 809190 connectors (#558) to connect the branch cable to the SIM Loop
and place it close to the SIM Loop trunk.
5 Snap the Trunk Junction box SCN 148320 around the connections to enhance appearance.
6 Connect the branch cable to the SIM Sensor. Connect SIM sensors with screw terminals
(smoke detectors, FA Pullboxes, motion sensors, glassbreaks) directly to the branch cable.
7 Splice the SIM module to the branch cable using SCN 810953 connectors to splice it.
8 Collect the point description and Hard ID's of all installed SIMs so they can be
programmed into the control unit. Use gateway unit # 9 for the SIM Loop. Use the SIM
Loop Log Form to record the Hard ID, BA Group, and point description. Once the data has
been collected, it must be entered into the control unit via the operating panel. See the
Programming section for the procedure. Once the data has been programmed, walk-tests
LEDs on the units will function.
The Hard ID label: The top line is the barcode. The second line is in readable text. The first
eight digits are the Hard ID. The next six digits are the Stock Code Number (SCN #). The
next four digits are the manufacturing date codes ("year week"). The last two digits are for
the vendor codes like "P" for Pine Brook.
9 Mark the SIM Sensor point number stick-on labels SCN 146844. Peel off the number that
represents the point number and stick it on the sensor so it can be referred to later.
Sensors cannot be walk-tested unless the sensors' point type, group, gateway, and Hard ID are in the
control unit's database.
CONTROL 472366 SIM

UNIT
CONNECTIONS
OUT 0
RED RED-WHT OUTPUT POWER

19 +12V (FOR INPUT POINT, TRANSISTOR SWITCH IS
+12V TRANSISTOR CONTINUOUSLY CLOSED TO SUPPLY SENSOR POWER.
BLK SWITCH BLK-WHT FOR OUTPUT POINT, TRANSISTOR SWITCH CLOSES ONLY
20 GND
GND WHEN COMMANDED FROM CONTROL UNIT.)
BLU
39 SYSTEM-POWERED NON-POWERED
COM (+)
SENSOR SENSOR
W/ TRANSFER CONTACTS W/ BREAK-ONLY CONTACT
AND TAMPER (NO TAMPER)
+12V
+12V
GND
ORG
IN 0
C5 AL-TBL
2.3 uf
25V
T
BLU-WHT
IN 2
TMPR
YEL WHT
40
COM ( )
IN 0
MICROPROCESSOR CONDITION IN 0 IN 2 CONDITION IN 0 IN 2
INPUT NORMAL 6V GND NORMAL 6V GND
IN 2
ALARM GND GND ALARM 12V GND
MICROPROCESSOR TAMPER 6V 12V TAMPER 6V 12V
OUT 0
OUTPUT OPEN LOOP 12V 12V OPEN LOOP 12V 12V
Figure 6-1: SIM Wiring to System-Powered and Nonpowered Sensors
6-5
BLU
39
COM+
+12V LED
SEE SENSOR
POWER
NOTE 3 POWER +12V
DATA SEE NOTE 1 SELF TEST

OUT 0
IN/OUT INPUT
OUT 1
SIM SENSOR
INTERFACE ELEMENT
IN 0 ALARM OUTPUT
SEE NOTE 2
IN 1 DIAGNOSTIC
IN 2 OUTPUT
GND GND
TAMPER
YEL
40
COM-
NOTES:
1. POINT OPTION 3="Y".
2. DIAGNOSTIC OPTION ENABLED.
3. IF LED DISABLE OPTION = "N", LED WILL LIGHT WHEN DETECTOR

ALARMS PROVIDED POINT IS NOT BYPASSED.
IF LED DISABLE OPTION = "Y", LED WILL LIGHT WHEN DETECTOR

ALARMS ONLY IN WALK TEST OR SERVICE MODE PROVIDED POINT
IS NOT BYPASSED.
Figure 6-2: Connection for a SIM Loop Powered SIM Sensor
472488 HORN-STROBE SIM

OUT 1
RED OR
19 +
+12V TRANSISTOR
SWITCH 3K
EOLR HORN
BLACK
20
GND BLK/W
OUT 0
+
RED/W
TRANSISTOR
SWITCH 3K
EOLR STROBE
BLK/W
BLU
39
COM+ POWER
SUPERVISION
33K
TRANSISTOR
SWITCH
IN 0
33K
YEL
40
COM-
Figure 6-3: SIM Wiring to a Horn and Strobe
6-6
472380 HORN-STROBE
OUT 1
RED
19 +
+12V TRANSISTOR
SWITCH HORN
BLACK
20
GND
OUT 0
+
TRANSISTOR
SWITCH
STROBE
BLU
39
COM+ POWER
SUPERVISION
33K
TRANSISTOR
SWITCH
IN 0
33K
YEL
40
COM-
Figure 6-4: Wiring of SIM Horn/Strobe
472366 SIM
OUT 0
SEE NOTE 1
19
RED RED/W
+12V TRANSISTOR +
SWITCH
BLK BLK/W
20
GND
BLU
39
COM+ TAMPER
33K
NC
33K
33K
OR
IN 0
AL-TBL C
BLU/W
IN 2
TMPR
NO
YEL WHT
40
COM-
NOTE: 1) POINT OPTION 3="N"

2) SIM MOUNTED INSIDE SENSOR OR IN JUNCTION BOX
SPACED NO MORE THAN 6 FEET FROM SENSOR.
Figure 6-5: SIM Wiring to a Sensor
6-7
472366 SIM
OUT 0
FOCUS-VVS
ADT VAULT VIBRATION SENSOR
SEE NOTE
RED RED/W
19 X
+12V TRANSISTOR
SWITCH
BLK BLK/W
20
GND
X
33K
BLU + LED C NC NO TAMPER

39
COM+ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
33K
33K
OR
IN 0
AL-TBL
BLK
BLU/W
IN 2
TMPR
RED
YEL WHT
40
COM-
TEST
TRANSMITTER
NOTE: POINT OPTION 3="Y"
Figure 6-6: SIM Connections to a Vault Vibration Sensor

869706 (10K 5% 1/2W)
X REMOVE
JUMPER J1
GRN YEL 10.2 - 13.8VDC
SUPERVISED
BLK 472366 BLU/GRN BLU/YEL 4Ma NORMAL STANDBY
20
SIM X 247650
RED ORA WHT ORA 30Ma MAX WHEN ALL DEVICES IN ALARM
19 X 4W/2W
YEL BLU/WHT 10K 5% 1/2W ADAPTER
40 244708
BOARD
BLU WHT BLU/WHT 3K EOLR
39 X (INSIDE ELECTRICALLY
RED/WHT RED (8Ma NORMAL
X STANDBY) LAST DEVICE IN LOOP)
BLK/WHT BLK (35Ma ALARM) BLU/ORA
X
Figure 6-7: SIM Connections to a 4-Wire/2-Wire Adapter

Compatible Detectors for 4-Wire/2-Wire Adapter
Spot-Type Detector UL ID Base UL ID
429C; 429CT; 521B ESL Photoelectric S10 ---
521BXT Photo w/Thermostat S10 ---
429AT Photoelectric Head S10A 435006 (3536-601) S00
435008 (3536-612) Ionization Head --- 435006 (3536-601) S00
435170 (3536-613) Heat Head --- 435006 (3536-601) S00
Air-Duct Detector Function Card UL ID
435152 (3537-001) 611UD Photoelectric Head 435150 (3537-010) (609U10) S00
435153 (3537-002) 612UD Ionization Head 435150 (3537-010) (609U10) S00
Fire Door Application

Smoke and fire doors, normally held in the open position to allow free movement in corridors of
buildings, are required to be released when a fire alarm is activated. This requires a 472488 Supervised
SIM or 472366 SIM to release the Door Hold-Open device.
To install a 472488 Supervised SIM or 472366 SIM, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Mount and connect the SIM device. See Wiring a SIM or SIM Sensor shown previously in
this section.
Note: When 472366 SIM is used, the cable run between the SIM and Door Hold-Open
device cannot exceed 3 feet.
Program it as FAC (21) point type. See the Programming section for details on the
2
programming procedure.
6-8
For NFPA Life Safety applications, install a 472367 Door Contact to monitor the status of the door.
Program it as MID (5) point type.
The 4208U, 4209U and 4208SNF must be set for "Serial Number" mode. See the device's installation
instructions for the correct dip switch setting for this mode of operation. Each module must be set for a
different serial number.
4208U
1
OO
N
N
2
3
4
TB2
5
DIP Switches
6
5 NOT
7
USED
8
4 ( ) GROUND
3 (+) 12V
( )
REED (TAMPER) SWITCH
TB1
2
1 }
(+)
TO
SIM
LOOP
(USE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TWISTED
PAIR)
(EACH LOOP’S MAX

10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k 10k RESISTANCE:
300 ohms + 10k EOLR)
LOOPS: A B C D E F G H
Figure 6-8: Wiring of the 4208U to the SIM Loop
ON 4209U
POSITION 1: SELECT GROUP MODE
1
O
ON
N
} (SHOWN OFF = NON GROUPED). TB2

2
3
POSITIONS 2-5: SELECT THE 2 (GROUPED) OR

4
OFF ON 4 (NON GROUPED) SENSOR

5
DEVICE GROUP ADDRESS 4 ( ) GND

6
SIDEVIEW (SHOWN ON, ON, ON, OFF =

7
8
2nd GROUP SELECTION). (+) 12VDC SWITCHED

POSITION 6: DEVICE TYPE (SHOWN ON 3 POWER SOURCE,
= “SERIAL NUMBER” MODE). (VIA CONTROL
POSITION 7: NOT USED. SET TO “OFF.” PANEL’S AUXILIARY
POSITION 8: SELECT TAMPER PROTECTION RELAY-PROGRAM
SETTING (SHOWN OFF =
2
RELAY FOR SMOKE
TAMPER ENABLED).
DETECTOR RESET.
TB1
1 ( )
(+) } TO
SIM
LOOP
(USE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TWISTED
PAIR)
(+) ( ) (+) ( ) (+) ( ) (+) ( )
LOOPS: A B C D
THE EOL RESISTOR MUST (+) ( ) (+) ( ) (+) ( )

SMOKE
(+) ( )
SMOKE SMOKE SMOKE
BE CONNECTED ACROSS
THE LOOP WIRES AT THE UP TO 16 2-WIRE
LAST DETECTOR SMOKE DETECTORS
2k EOLR 2k EOLR 2k EOLR 2k EOLR
MAX OF 100 ohms WIRING
RESISTANCE AND 2k EOLR
Figure 6-9: Wiring of the 4209U to the SIM Loop
6-9
DIP SWITCHES (TYPICAL SETTING; ALL TB2
SWITCHES SHIPPED IN ON POSITION)
POSITION 1: SELECT RESPONSE TIME FOR LOOPS A &B 6
(SHOWN ON = SLOW: 400 msec.) NOT USED
5
POSITIONS 2-5: SELECT SERIAL NUMBERS FOR MODULE LOOPS A - H EARTH GROUND (WHEN
FROM THE SERIAL NUMBER ASSIGNMENT TABLE 4 (–)
MOUNTED REMOTELY)
SELECTED VIA DIP SWITCH POSITIONS 6 & 7 (SHOWN
ON, ON, ON, OFF )
3 (+) 12 VDC
OPTIONAL
POSITIONS 6,7: SELECT THE SERIAL NUMBER ASSIGNMENT (–) GROUND
TABLE (SHOWN ON, ON = TABLE 1)
2
TO SIM LOOP
POSITION 8: SELECT TAMPER PROTECTION SETTING (–)
(USE TWISTED PAIR;
(SHOWN OFF = TAMPER ENABLED) (+) WIRING SUPERVISED BY
1
OFF ON CONTROL PANEL)
TB1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
10K 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K

LOOPS A B C D E F G H
CLASS B ZONES CLASS A ZONES

EACH LOOP MAX RESISTANCE: 300 + 10k EOLR EACH LOOP SIDE MAX RESISTANCE: 150 Ω
Figure 6-10: Wiring of the 4208SNF to the SIM Loop as a Point Expander
DIP SWITCHES (NOT USED) 4208SNF TB2
TO CONTROL
PANEL HARDWARE
6 LOOP H OUTPUT + POINTS
NOTE:
5 LOOP G OUTPUT + GROUND
RETURN IS
VIA TB2-2
4 (–) EARTH GROUND
(NOT REQUIRED)
3 (+) 12 VDC
TO CONTROL PANEL
AUXILIARY POWER
2 (–) GROUND (SUPERVISED)
1 NO CONNECTION

(NOT FUNCTIONAL)
TB1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
NO CONNECTION
LOOPS G H
EACH LOOP SIDE MAX RESISTANCE: 150
Figure 6-11: Wiring of the 4208SNF to the SIM Loop as a Class B to Class A Converter
Installing a Horn/Strobe SIM (472488) to Reset a 4208U or 4209U

The FOCUS 200 PLUS provides the capability to reset latching type glassbreak detectors. This
requires the use if a Horn/Strobe SIM (472488) connected to either a 4208U or 4209U module. See
Figure 6-12 for the connections.
Program the point associated to the Horn/Strobe SIM as Fire Alarm type 09 (FA) with option 1 (Smoke
Reset) set as YES. During a Reset Alarm sequence, the Horn/Strobe SIM removes power from the
4208U/4209U for 6 seconds resetting the latching glassbreak detectors connected to the module.
6-10
THE EOL RESISTOR MAX OF 100 ohms WIRING
MUST BE CONNECTED RESISTANCE AND 2k EOLR
ACROSS THE LOOP
2k EOLR 2k EOLR 2k EOLR 2k EOLR
WIRES AT THE LAST
UP TO 16 2-WIRE
BLU (+) DETECTOR
SMOKE DETECTORS
YEL (-)
472488 HORN - STROBE SIM LOOPS: D C B A

TB2
( ) (+) ( ) (+) ( ) (+) ( ) (+) 4209U
OUT 1
TB1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
RED (ORG)
19 1
+12V TRANSISTOR
EOLR
3K
SWITCH
BLACK
20 (BRN)
2 ON
GND
OUT 1 POSITION 1: SELECT GROUP MODE
(SHOWN OFF = NON GROUPED).
POSITIONS 2-5: SELECT THE 2 (GROUPED) OR
(RED) 4 (NON GROUPED) SENSOR
3 }
TRANSISTOR DEVICE GROUP ADDRESS
EOLR
SWITCH (SHOWN ON, ON, ON,
3K
OFF = 2nd GROUP SELECTION).
POSITION 6: DEVICE TYPE (SHOWN
4 ON = “SERIAL NUMBER” MODE).
(BLK) POSITION 7: NOT USED. SET TO “OFF.”
OFF ON
BLU POSITION 8: SELECT TAMPER PROTECTION
39 COM+ POWER SETTING
SUPERVISION SIDEVIEW (SHOWN OFF = TAMPER ENABLED).
33K
NOTES:
TRANSISTOR
1. THE 472488 MUST BE PROGRAMMED
SWITCH
AS FA TYPE (09) WITH OPTION 1 SET.
IN 0
33K
2. DURING A RESET ALARM, THE 472488 WILL
REMOVE POWER FROM 4209U/4208U FOR
6 SECONDS.
YEL
40
COM
4209USIM-001-V0
Figure 6-12: Wiring a Horn/Strobe SIM to a 4209U for Resetting Glassbreak Detectors
Installing the Loop Interface Module (LIM) (472425)

The LIM connects to the trunk of a SIM Loop and it functions like a SIM, but it employs a 2-wire
protection loop that is supervised for grounds. Consequently, it can be used for retrofit applications
involving sensors connected to a 2-wire loop, fire alarm applications that require a ground-supervised
loop, and other applications in which a SIM cannot be used for one reason or another.
Mounting and Wiring the Loop Interface Module
To mount and wire the LIM, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Mount the housing unit in a location where the LIM will be protected from tampering or
damage caused by machinery-moving equipment.
2 Record the Hard ID number of the LIM and its associated gateway.
3 Snap the LIM circuit board into the housing.
4 Make the wiring connections from the LIM to the gateway (see Figure 6-13).
5 Make the wiring connections from the LIM to the sensor (see Figures 6-14 and 6-15). The
loop resistance must not exceed 300 ohms.
6 Using a 148380 Label (sensor number sheet), peel off the appropriate sensor point number
and stick it onto the cover of the housing unit. We recommend that a label indicating the
type of sensor involved and its location be affixed to the inside cover of the housing unit.
7 Close the cover of the housing unit.
8 Load the LIM point data into the control unit. See the Programming section for
information about the procedure.
6-11
TAMPER SWITCH
OPERATOR
JUMPER J1
(REMOVE IF
USING TAMPER)
248116 TAMPER SWITCH
(ORDERED SEPARATELY) TB2 LOOP
(NOTE 1) CONNECTIONS
TA J1 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 (BLK)
SIM GATEWAY 2 (RED)
TRUNK CONNECTIONS
3 (YEL)
4 (BLU)
471943
HOUSING UNIT
Figure 6-13: Loop Interface Module

472425 LOOP
INTERFACE MODULE
SENSOR
TB1
TB2 1
12V @ 80mA (max.)
{
BLK
1 2 +
FROM SIM RED 3
GATEWAY 2 TA
TRUNK YEL 3 4
NO
BLU 4 5
C
6
JUMPER NC
3K EOL
RESISTOR
Figure 6-14: Loop Interface Module Wiring to Powered Sensor

472425 LOOP
INTERFACE MODULE LACING / FOIL
TB1
1
2
CONTACT
3 LOW SIDE FEED BLK
TB2
4 HIGH SIDE FEED RED C NO
20 BLK 1
2 5 LOW SIDE RETURN YEL
19 RED NC
3 6 HIGH SIDE RETURN BLU
40 YEL
BLU 4
39
Figure 6-15: Loop Interface Module Wiring to Lacing/Foil and Non-powered Sensor
6-12
Installing a Keyswitch to the SIM Loop

The FOCUS 200 PLUS supports the 471999 Keyswitch on the built-in SIM loop. Two SIM devices
(472488 and 472366) are needed to interface the keyswitch to the SIM loop. The two SIM devices
occupy two points on the system.
Wiring the Keyswitch to the SIM Loop
BRN/WHT
472488 SUPERVISED
HORN / STROBE SIM BLK/WHT
3k 3k
RED/WHT
BLU
ORG
BLK
RED
WHT
YEL 12VDC
472366 SIM DEVICE ORG BUZZER
RED/WHT
+
BLU/WHT
BLK/WHT
33k
JUMPER
EARTH
YEL RED ORG GRY VIO BLK GRN GROUND
LED YEL LED RED TAMPER SWITCH
2k 2k
Figure 6-16: Keyswitch Wiring Connections
To install a keyswitch to the SIM loop, perform the following steps:

Step Action
1 Mount the Keyswitch according to the instruction provided with it.
2 Run the branch cable no more than 100 feet long from the SIM Loop trunk. Use cable SCN
494465 or 494467 for the 4-wire SIM connections.
3 Cut the sheathing of the SIM Loop trunk to expose the four wires of the trunk.
4 Use Scotchlok SCN 809190 connectors (#558) to connect the branch cable to the SIM Loop
and place it close to the SIM Loop trunk.
6 Snap the Trunk Junction box SCN 148320 around the connections to enhance the
appearance.
7 Connect the branch cable to the SIM device 472488 see Figure 6-16.
8 Run an additional branch cable from the 472488 device to the 472366 SIM device.
9 Connect each SIM device to the appropriate connection on the Keyswitch see Figure 6-16.
6-13
Programming for the Keyswitch

Program both SIM devices as input point type 28 for a Janitor Keyswitch or input type 29 for a BA
Keyswitch. Enable option #2 (LED used) for the 472488 SIM point and option #3 (buzzer used) for the
472366 SIM point.
Refer to Programming the Point Data in the Programming section for information about the procedure.
Using the 4297 Loop Extender Module

The 4297 Loop Extender may be used to provide additional SIM loop current, to extend the SIM loop
wire run length, and/or to provide individual electrically isolated SIM loops. Refer to Figures 6-17, 6-18,
and 6-19, to follow.
9 +
8 –
} EXTENSION
LOOP
7 –
+}
INPUT LOOP
6 (FROM CONTROL)
TB1
5 AC 16.5VAC, 25VA
4
} TRANSFORMER
AC No. 1321 (SEE NOTE 1)
3 Earth Ground
2 –
1 } 12VDC POWER INPUT OR
+ 12V LEAD ACID BATTERY
INPUT. 1.2 AH MIN/
2.6AH MAX. MAKE
J1 (BLUE) CONNECTIONS USING
CABLE SUPPLIED.
(SEE NOTE 1)
SHORT ISOLATION JUMPER: NOTES:
INTACT: EXTENSION LOOP SHORTS ARE 1. WHEN A SUPPLEMENTARY POWER SUPPLY IS USED,
ISOLATED FROM INPUT LOOP. CONNECT IT TO TERMINALS 1 & 2 AND MAKE NO
CUT: EXTENSION LOOP SHORTS ARE CONNECTIONS TO 4 & 5. USE A CLASS II (POWER LIMITED)
NOT ISOLATED FROM INPUT LOOP. SUPPLY.
WHEN A No. 1321 TRANSFORMER IS USED, CONNECT IT
TO TERMINALS 4 & 5.
2. ALL CIRCUITS ARE SUPERVISED EXCEPT CONNECTIONS
TO THE No. 1321 TRANSFORMER AND TO THE LEAD-ACID
BATTERY.
3. ALL OUTPUT CIRCUITS ARE POWER LIMITED.
Figure 6-17: 4297 Extender Module
Notes: - Do not use the 4197 module.

- Refer to 4297 instructions for more detailed installation information.
- The limits shown below supercede the limits described in the 4297 instructions.
- Do not connect 4297 modules in series.
Input SIM Loop Extension SIM Loop
CONTROL 4297
RPM - - - RPM RPM - - - RPM
PANEL MODULE
Input Loop Limits: Extension Loop Limits:

- 128mA max. No more than 64mA - All wire runs combined may not exceed 4000 feet.
on any individual wire run. Combined Input and Extension SIM Loop Limits:
- All combined wire runs may not exceed 2000 feet. - No more than 72 devices combined.
Figure 6-18: SIM Loop Connections Using One 4297 Extender Module
6-14
Notes: - Do not use 4197 module.

- Refer to 4297 instructions for more detailed installation information.
The Limits shown below supercede the limits described in the 4297 instructions.
- Do not connect 4297 modules in series.
Extension Loop #1
Input SIM 4297 RPM - - - RPM
Loop
Extension Loop #2
CONTROL
PANEL
4297 RPM - - - RPM
---
---
Extension Loop #8
RPM - - - RPM
4297
Extension Loop Limits:

All wire runs combined may not
exceed 4000 feet. See Installation
Guidelines for more info.
Up to 8 modules may be connected
in parallel. Extension loops will be
electrically isolated if blue jumper
on each 4297 is left in tact.
}
Combined Input and Extension Loop Limits:
- No more than 72 devices combined on all loops
Figure 6-19: SIM Loop Connections Using Multiple Extender Modules
Note: The input loop limits stated in Figure 6-18 apply to Figure 6-19 as well. Devices labeled as
“RPM” may also be SIM devices.
6-15
6-16
S E C T I O N 7
Bell Outputs and Auxiliary Relay

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ About the Bell Outputs and Auxiliary Relay ♦ Programming the Bell Outputs and Auxiliary
Relay
♦ Output Functions
♦ Installing the External Sounders
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About the Bell Outputs and Auxiliary Relay

The FOCUS 200 PLUS provides two bell circuits and an auxiliary relay. These outputs are
programmable via the ADEMCO Compass downloader as to when and how they will function.
There are two entries that can be programmed for each output. The first entry is the alarm condition to
be monitored, which will cause the output to operate. The second entry determines whether the output
is to be used to trigger a backup-connected transmitter in the event of a telco line trouble. In this latter
case, the output will not operate for the selected alarm condition unless there is a telco line trouble.
The total alarm current available on auxiliary power #2, auxiliary power #3, the auxiliary relay
terminal 10 (set for wet operation), bell 1, and bell 2 is determined by the transformer used and the
setting of Jumper P4. See the Summary of Connections diagram for the location of Jumper P4.
Total Alarm
Transformer Jumper P4 Setting
Current Available
50VA (443216 or N8167) Plug-in Transformer 1.5A Pins 2 and 3 shorted
72VA (472404) Wired-in Transformer 2.3A Pins 1 and 2 shorted
75VA (FTA7518ULC) 2.3A Pins 1 and 2 shorted
Features of the Bell Outputs

• Each bell output is rated at 12VDC, 1.7 amps max.
• Circuits are power-limited by PTC type circuit protectors, which automatically reset when the
short is removed.
• There is an optional setup for supervision.
• Outputs can be used for operating fire and burglary alarm notification appliances.
Features of the Auxiliary Relay

• Form C relay.
• Can be set as either wet (12VDC) or dry contacts (determined by Jumper P3). See the Summary of
Connections diagram for the location of Jumper P3.
• Wet Pins 1 & 2 shorted. Terminal 10 is wet and rated at 12VDC, 1.7A max. power limited.
• Dry Pins 2 & 3 shorted. Terminal 10 is dry and contacts rated at 28VAC/VDC. 2.0A max.
7-1
Output Functions
• Commercial burglary alarm systems require bell circuits to be programmed for a minimum timeout of
16 minutes.
• Commercial fire alarm systems require bell or indicating circuits to be supervised. Polarized fire-
indicating devices must be used.
UL • Commercial fire alarm systems require bell or indicating circuits to be programmed for a minimum
timeout of 5 minutes.
• Residential fire alarm systems require bell or indicating circuits to be programmed for a minimum
timeout of 4 minutes.
Each output can be programmed for one of the following functions:

Description Function
Fire Alarm The output activates and latches when an alarm occurs at any fire alarm point. If all fire
alarm points have restored to normal, the output resets by entering a RESET command at
any operating panel.
NOTES:
It takes 40 seconds before the output resets.
This output type has the option to complement the output state whereby the output is
normally activated and de-activates when an alarm occurs.
Holdup The output activates when either of the following occurs:
Alarm • An alarm condition occurs at a holdup point. It resets when the holdup device is restored.
• A hostage ID code is entered. The output resets when the operating panel deactivates
(after 45 seconds).
NOTE: This output type also has the option to complement the output state whereby the
output is normally activated and de-activates when an alarm occurs.
Supervisory The output activates when an alarm condition occurs at any supervisory point. It resets
Alarm when all supervisory devices are restored.
Alarm in any The output activates when an entry alarm occurs in any BA group during Nite Set. The
BA Group output resets when the involved BA group is changed to Day Set. This form of output control
can be used for direct-connect type applications.
Alarm in a This is the same as the above option except that it is used for an alarm in a single selected
Selected BA BA group rather than for any BA group.
Group
BA1 Alarm Output is normally operated. It releases when an entry alarm occurs in BA1 during Nite
Set. It returns to operated condition when either the programmed bell time ends and the
points are secure or when BA1 is returned to Day Set.
BA2 Alarm Same function as BA1 Alarm, except it relates to BA2.
4-Wire This operates the output when fire alarms are reset during the Alarm Reset sequence. The
Smoke function requires the power to the 4-wire sensors to be wired via the output. The output
Detector operates for approximately 6 seconds.
Reset
7-2
Section 7 – Bell Outputs and Auxiliary Relay
Telco This is a separate option associated with each of the three outputs, and is intended for
Backup systems that are connected to a CCC. It is used in conjunction with the selected function for
which the output is to operate. If this option is chosen, the output will operate for the
selected function only if there is a telco problem on the AC or FSK dialer line, in which case
the output can be used to trigger a direct-connect transmitter to a Police Headquarters or
other receiving station as a backup.
Light Output turns on when the protection of a pre-selected BA group is turned off, or the
entry/exit delay period is activated. The output turns off when the protection of a BA group
is turned on.
Note: If the Recycle Exit Delay is enabled, the output turns on whenever any key is pressed
on the operating panel.
Bell Note: The output is reset by entering a valid ID code at any operating panel, unless stated
otherwise.
Note: Programmed bell timeout is 0 to 255 minutes in 1-minute increments unless stated
otherwise.
The output activates when triggered by the following occurrences:
• Burglar Alarm: Alarm in any BA group will cause steady activation until valid ID code is
entered or bell timeout is reached. If the BA group has been programmed for a delay in
start of bell ringing, the start of the bell is delayed by the programmed delay time (up to
20 minutes in 1-minute increments).
• Fire Alarm: Bell rings for 10 minutes with the pattern 1-second-On/1-second-Off, with a
5-second pause every 10 seconds until silenced by entering a valid ID code, or until the
10 minutes expire. The bell can also be silenced using special Fire Marshall Code
(222222). (May also be set via option 3 for temporal pattern). See the Input and Output
Point Types section.
NOTE: The Fire Bell can be programmed for continuous operation (No Timeout) when a
fire alarm occurs. This option can only be programmed via the ADEMCO Compass
Downloader.
• BA Keyswitch Point: Output activates bell (∗) for an open, tamper, or comm fail condition
during Nite Set of the BA group. Bell will continue to ring until valid ID is entered or bell
timeout is reached.
• Remote Power Supply Point: Output activates bell (∗) for a tamper or comm fail condition
of remote power supply point. Bell will continue to ring until valid ID is entered or bell
timeout is reached.
• System Self-Supervision: Output activates bell (∗) for a cabinet tamper during Nite Set of
BA1.
• Janitor Keyswitch Point: Output activates bell for a tamper or comm fail condition
during Nite Set. Bell will continue to ring until valid ID is entered or bell timeout is
reached.
• Bell On No Close: Output activates bell for 10 minutes if system has not been closed at
scheduled closing time. Bell ringing starts either 5 or 15 minutes after scheduled closing
time, depending on the choice made for the No Close option (see the Scheduling section).
• Display and Bell Test: This is a 30-second test that is initiated from an operating panel
(see the Testing the System section). Output activates bell for the final 4 seconds of test.
• Auto Bell Test (programmable option): Bell will "bing" at the end of any BA group’s exit
delay for Local systems. Alternately, for CCC connected systems, bell will "bing" at end of
exit delay as an indication that closing has been acknowledged by the CCC.
• Closing Trouble Bell (programmable option): Bell will ring for 5 minutes if customer has
turned the BA group On and has exited, but has failed to close the exit door and exit
delay has expired. Used to remind customer to re-enter the premises and turn the BA
group off, and re-exit the premises properly. Failure to do so will result in an entry
alarm.
∗ Start of bell can be delayed up to 255 minutes (1-minute increments).
7-3
UL The start of bell ringing delay may not be programmed for UL Burglary alarm systems.
Access Used for controlling access to any selected BA group by having the output operate a door
Control strike. The output is normally locked. It operates for 10 seconds when valid ID is entered at
the operating panel if BA group is Off or when BA group is turned Off.
Access Used for controlling access to BA1 group by having an output operate a door strike. The
Control BA1 output is normally released. It operates for 10 seconds when a valid ID code is entered at
the operating panel if BA group is off or when BA group is turned off. Operating panel must
be assigned to Unit Number 0.
Access Same function as Access Control BA1 except it relates to BA2. Operating panel must be
Control BA2 assigned to Unit Number 1.
For the above Access Control functions the controlling operating panel must be located outside of the
entry door for the associated BA group. For information about installing and addressing, refer to the
Installing the Operating Panel and Access Control sections.
Installing the External Sounders

Select compatible alarm-indicating devices from the list that follows. Be sure the total current drawn
on each output and the total combined with the auxiliary power outputs does not exceed the values
stated earlier in this section.
Bell/Sounder Applications
Method Application Bell Sounding Event Implementation

471898(7187-028) • Indoor supervised sounder for • Fire alarm and/or burglar • Each point used for 471898 Module
Quad Sounder PID FA and BA applications. alarm, as programmed. must be downline loaded as a Remote
Module (Requires • Qualifies for driving and • Manual bell test. Bell PID. Program DIP shunt S1 on
PlD gateway) supervising a fire alarm • Bell on no close (option). module for appropriate point number.
sounder or strobe. Do not program S2 because it is not
• Auto bell test (option).
• Multiple 471898 Modules can used for FOCUS 200 PLUS
• Closing trouble bell (option).
be connected to a quad trunk. applications.
• Strobe- Fire alarm only.
• Refer to Tech Data Sheet PID-5 for
Restores when all PA devices
details of 471898 Quad Powered
are restored and Reset. Alarm is
Sounder PID Module.
selected at operating panel.
Remote Sonalert • For remote annunciation of • Will mimic the sound patterns • Output point must be programmed for
Output Point closing reminder and warning, of operating panel sounder. remote Sonalert function.
holdup, test, entry/exit delay,
and entry alarm. Output used to
control power to bell or sounder.
7-4
Section 7 – Bell Outputs and Auxiliary Relay
Bell Output Supervision

The bell outputs are automatically supervised whenever an output point type is programmed for points
246 (bell 2) and 247 (bell 1). The system will trigger a trouble condition, regardless of the On/Off status
of the BA group(s), whenever a short or an open is detected on the bell output wiring. To supervise the
bell outputs:
1. Install a 2k ohm resistor across the last notification appliance on each output.
2. Program an SPV point type for points 246 and 247.
Compatible Alarm-Indicating Devices
Model Description Model Description
ADEMCO AB12M-ADT UL listed Grade A Bell in System Sensor S24110 Strobe Red ADA
Housing System Sensor S2415 Strobe Red
RX7 (875936) Indoor Sounder
System Sensor S241575 Strobe Red
System Sensor BBS Back Box Skirt Red
System Sensor SP200W Speaker White 8”
System Sensor BBS-W Back Box Skirt White
System Sensor Speaker/Strobe Red 5”
System Sensor BB-D Back Box Deep Red SP2R241575
System Sensor MP-F Mounting Plate Red Flsh System Sensor Speaker/Strobe Red 5”
System Sensor MP-SF Mounting Plate Red Semi-flsh SP1R2415ADA
System Sensor S-MP Single Mounting Plate System Sensor SP2R2415 Speaker/Strobe Red 5”
System Sensor MA 12/24D Sounder Red Non-ADA Wheelock LS1-12-VFR Strobe
System Sensor MDL Synch Circuit Mod Red Wheelock MS1-12-VFR Strobe
System Sensor P1215 Horn/Strobe Red ADA Wheelock MT-12-LS-VFR Horn/Strobe
System Sensor P121575 Horn/Strobe Red ADA Wheelock MT4-12-LS-VFR Horn/Strobe
System Sensor P1215W Horn/Strobe White ADA Wheelock MT-12-MS-VFR Horn/Strobe
System Sensor P24110 Horn/Strobe Red ADA Wheelock MT4-12-MS-VFR Horn/Strobe
System Sensor P2415 Horn/Strobe Red ADA Gentex GXS-2-15 Strobe

System Sensor P241575 Horn/Strobe Red ADA Gentex GXS-2-1575 Strobe
System Sensor P2475 Horn/Strobe Red ADA Gentex SHG-12-15 Horn/Strobe
System Sensor PA400R Sounder Red Non-ADA Gentex SHG-12-1575 Horn/Strobe
System Sensor PA400W Sounder White Non-ADA Faraday 5336L-U-14-12-DC Horn/Strobe

System Sensor S121575 Strobe Low Current Red ADA Faraday 5337L-U-14-12-DC Horn/Strobe
Installing an Alarm Housing
The 471956(7187-101) Alarm Housing and ADEMCO AB12 Bell are UL-approved exterior sounding
devices for local mercantile premises bell certification. For exterior auxiliary BA or FA bell applications,
UL other sounding devices such as the 471859 (7187-037) Bell Unit may be used, provided applicable UL
installation guidelines are followed.
If 471956 Alarm Housing is being used, install it as follows:

Step Action
1 Mount the alarm housing on an outside wall of the building, visible from a public street. It
should be mounted at least 10 feet above street level, but no higher than the ceiling level of
the fourth story above street level.
2 Install the wiring between the control unit and the alarm housing in conduit, without
boxes or openings unless covers are tampered or welded to the box.
3 Using locally available caulking compound, caulk around the conduit connection at the rear
of the alarm housing to prevent water seepage into the housing.
4 If the alarm housing is flush-mounted, the building wall must include an opening 15"
(38.lcm) H x 24" (61cm) W x 5-1/2” (14cm) D with a louvered grille (provided by the
customer). Mount the housing within this opening, and affix a sign (supplied by the
customer) that prominently displays the words "BURGLAR ALARM."
7-5
Wiring Bell Outputs

Wire sounding devices to the bell outputs as shown in Figure 7-1.
5 6 7 8
BELL 1 SHOWN AS A
BURGLARY BELL
OUTPUT WITH NON-
+ – + – POLARIZED
BELL 1 BELL 2 INDICATING DEVICES.
BELL 2 SHOWN AS A
FIRE BELL OUTPUT
WITH POLARIZED
INDICATING DEVICES.
BURG FIRE
2k EOLR
TO PANEL'S EARTH GROUND

AB12M-ADT BELL/BOX WIRING
AB12M WIRING NOTES:
• Disconnect the AB12M-ADT's factory-
(EG: BELL 2–; TB8)

TO PANEL'S BELL –
TO POINT 8 + (TB38)
TO POINT 8 – (TB37)
(EG: BELL 2+; TB7)
TO PANEL'S BELL +
wired connection from its terminal #4 to
its outer box.
(Terminal 3 or 4)
• Assign point 8 to a BA Group. Program
it as a Supervisory (SPV) Point Type.
• All wiring from AB12M-ADT to panel
must be run in conduit.
2k EOLR
WIRING FOR 1 2 3 4 5 6
AB12M-ADT
COMMERCIAL AB12M-ADT OUTER BOX
BURGLARY TAMPER
GRADE A BELL SWITCHES
INNER LINER
BELL
Figure 7-1: External Sounder Connections to the Bell Outputs
If you are using the bell box tamper, program the option via the downline loader. Otherwise the system will
not detect a "short" on point 8.
Wiring the Auxiliary Relay

The auxiliary relay cannot be supervised. It is typically used for annunciating burglary alarms,
resetting 4-wire smoke detectors, elevator recall, or other situations that do not require the supervision
of the wiring. Be sure to set jumper P3 for either wet or dry operation.
P3
Figure 7-2 shows how to wire the ALARM JUMPER P3

Pins 1 & 2 shorted = wet
auxiliary relay to operate an Pins 2 & 3 shorted = dry
unsupervised external alarm sounder. AUX. RELAY

Short pins 1 and 2 on P3 for wet 9 10 11 12
operation for this application. See the

WET/DRY
Basic Hardwired Points section for the

GND
N.O.
N.C.
wiring of the auxiliary relay for 4-wire

smoke detector reset operation. BELL
Figure 7-2: External Sounder Connections to the

Auxiliary Relay
Programming the Bell Outputs

Refer to Programming the Point Data in the Programming section for the procedure. Bell output 1 and
bell output 2 are points 247 and 246, respectively.
Defaults for the bell output points are:
Point Description Default Type Gateway # Hard ID

246 Bell 2 SPV 8 122
247 Bell 1 SPV 8 121
7-6
S E C T I O N 8
System Communication
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ About the System Communication ♦ Paging Service
♦ Connecting the Telephone Lines ♦ Programming the System Communication
Options
♦ Description of ADEMCO Contact ID Format
♦ Types of Customer Care Center Service
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About the System Communication

The FOCUS 200 PLUS provides the following for communication to the Customer Care Center (CCC):
• A main built-in dialer.
• An optional 472402A backup dialer.
• An optional 472491 AC Communicator Module. See the AC Communicator Module section for
detailed information concerning this module.
• An optional 472491D AC Communicator Module for Data Encrypted Standard (DES). See the AC
Communicator Module section for detailed information concerning this module.
Additionally the system has the ability to send messages to up to 8 paging services.
For Listed fire central station (UL864/NFPA 72) applications, use either a LORRA alone, the main dialer
with the LORRA, or use the main dialer with the 472402A Backup Dialer. For Listed fire remote station
UL (UL864/NFPA72) applications, use the main dialer with the 472402A backup dialer. Telephone line
supervision is required for UL commercial fire alarm systems when a dual-line dialer is used for fire signal
transmission.
• The system supports the 472402A backup dialer. The older version 472402 cannot be used with the
FOCUS 200 PLUS system.
• The system supports either the AC Communicator or the backup dialer, not both.
• The system can uniquely identify troubles on the Telco lines.
Reporting Formats Available

The reporting formats supported by the FOCUS 200 PLUS system are:
• ADT SIA
• ADEMCO Contact ID
A Successful Transmission
Below is the communication sequence whenever a signal is transmitted:
1. The control panel seizes the phone line and dials the Customer Care Center (CCC).
2. The control panel waits to hear a “handshake” frequency tone from the receiver to confirm that the
receiver is on-line and ready to receive its message.
3. After the panel hears the correct handshake, it transmits its message.
4. If the message is received and understood by the receiver, it transmits a “kissoff” frequency tone.
8-1
The FOCUS 200 PLUS system will attempt, up to a programmed number of times, to transmit a signal
to the CCC using the built-in dialer. If, after the programmed number of attempts, the signal still has
not been properly accepted by the CCC, and the backup dialer is not enabled, a Comm Fail message
will be displayed on the operating panel. If the backup dialer is enabled, then, after additional
unsuccessful attempts using the backup dialer for a programmed number of times, the system will
display the Comm Fail message.
If the system detects low voltage on the main telephone lines, it will switch to the backup dialer, if
enabled.
• The number of dialing attempts is a programmable option. The system is shipped with 10 attempts as
the default.
• The system will switch to the backup dialer only when it detects a fault (low voltage) on the main
telephone line or when the maximum number of programmed attempts on the main telephone line is
reached.
• For information about how to program the CCC telco numbers, see the Programming section.
The number of dialing attempts must be programmed for a minimum of 5 and a maximum of 10 attempts
UL for Commercial fire and UL Burglary alarm systems.
Main Telephone Line Supervision

The supervision circuit on the main dialer will indicate a fault when the tip/ring voltage falls below
approximately 4 volts.
Backup Telephone Line Supervision

The supervision circuit on the backup dialer will indicate a fault when the tip/ring voltage falls below
25 volts (13 if blue jumper is cut) or when the handset current is less than approximately 10mA.
If the communicator is connected to a telephone line inside a PABX, be sure the PABX has a backup
power supply that can support the PABX for 24 hours (central station usage) or 60 hours (remote station
usage). Many PABXs are not power-backed up, and connection to such a PABX will result in a
communication failure if power is lost.
Service Telephone Jack

The FOCUS 200 PLUS system includes a service telephone jack to provide the installer/serviceman a
quick access to a telephone line. See the Summary of Connections diagram for the location of this jack.
Connecting the Telephone Lines
• DO NOT connect both dialers to the same telephone line.

• DO NOT connect the dialers to telephone lines that provide ground start service.
To connect the telephone lines to the main and backup dialer, if used, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Conduct an electrical test of the line to the CCC or receiving station in accordance with the
requirements for the type of communication method to be employed.
Note: Any limitations or conditions that will affect satisfactory operation must be
immediately brought to the attention of the local telephone company for correction. Any
differences in operation that will affect programmable option selections must be brought to
the attention of the CCC data group for correction before the customized database is
downline-loaded.
8-2
Section 8 – System Communication
Step Action
2 Install an RJ31X jack within the proximity of the control unit. Install a second one if you
are using the backup dialer.
3 Run telephone company lines to the jack(s) and connect them to the red and green
terminals. Connect to the brown and gray terminals all premise phones that use the same
telephone line(s).
4 Connect the main dialer to the RJ31X jack using the RJ31X Cable supplied.
5 Mount the backup dialer to the main PCB as shown in Figure 8-1.
6 Connect the backup dialer to the main PCB J6 connector using a ribbon cable (supplied).
Do not run the ribbon cable underneath the backup dialer PC board.
The J6 header is static-sensitive. Make connections to the header with the power
to the control unit off and after grounding yourself.
7 Connect the backup dialer to the RJ31X jack, using the RJ31X Cable supplied.
8 Connect the earth ground screw on the backup dialer to the earth ground screw (terminal 3
or 4) on the main PCB using 16 AWG wire.
To prevent the risk of shock, disconnect phone lines at the RJ31X jack before servicing the panel.
The 472402A Dialer

Complies with FCC Rules, Part 68
FCC Reg. No.: AC398U-68628-MO-N
Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B
OPTIONAL 472402A
BACK-UP DIALER
MODULE Connect to main PCB
header J6 using J5
ribbon cable BACK-UP
RJ31X 1
(supplied) PHONE JACK 2
3
4
5
(connect using supplied cable) 6
BACK-UP 7
LINE SEIZE Supervision is programmable 8
LED (GREEN) 9
BACK-UP DIALER EARTH GROUND SCREW

(wire to main PCB, terminal 3 or 4)
MAIN
DIALER
LED
J6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CONTROL
PANEL
MAIN
SERVICE
RS-485 #1 RS-485 #2 POINT 1 POINT 2 POINT 3 POINT 4 POINT 5 POINT 6 POINT 7 POINT 8
RJ31X
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
JACK PHONE JACK
Figure 8-1: Installing the 472402A Backup Dialer
• Do not run the ribbon cable underneath the backup dialer PC board.
• The J6 header is static-sensitive. Make connections to the header with the power off, and after
grounding yourself.
8-3
Paging Service
The FOCUS 200 PLUS system can transmit messages to up to 8 paging services (typically one for each
group). The types of messages are divided into 4 categories as follows: System Troubles, Point Troubles,
Alarms and Open/Closes. Each category can be enabled or disabled individually. Additionally, the
system can be programmed to attempt to dial the paging service either once or twice (the default is
twice).
The format of the pager message is as follows:
EEE GGG UUUU
Where:
EEE = Event Code
GGG = Group Number (001-008)
UUUU = User Number (for open/closes) or Point Number.
The possible event codes are:
111 = Fire Alarm
222 = Hold-up or Hostage Alarm
333 = Burglary Alarm
400 = Group failed to Turn OFF
444 = Group was Turned OFF
500 = Group Failed to Turn ON
555 = Point or System Trouble
777 = Group was Turned ON
911 = Personal Emergency (Medical Alarm)
The following is an example of a pager message:
444 001 0025 − Group 1 was turned OFF by user 25.
Programming for the Pager

All the programming options for the pager must be programmed via the ADEMCO Compass
Description of ADEMCO Contact ID Format

When using ADEMCO Contact ID, the FOCUS 200 PLUS system transmits the data in DTMF (Dual
Tone Multi-Frequency). This format requires the 1400Hz/2300Hz dual-tone handshake and the 1400hz
kissoff tone. The signal is comprised of a 4-digit subscriber number, 1-digit event qualifier ("new" or
"restore"), 3-digit event code, 2-digit BA group number, and 3-digit zone number, user number, or
system status number.
ADEMCO Contact ID Reporting takes the following format:
CCCC QEEE GG ZZZ
where: CCCC = Customer (subscriber) ID
Q= Event qualifier, where:
E = new event, and R = restore
EEE = Event code (3 hexadecimal digits)
GG = BA Group number (system messages show “00”)
ZZZ = Point number reporting the alarm, or user number for Open/Close reports.
System status messages (AC Loss, Walk-Test, etc.) contain zeroes.
8-4
Contact ID Event Codes and ADT SIA Report Codes

Description Printable-Only ADEMCO ADT
Event CID SIA
System Event
System Reset X
Reset Memory X
AC Fail 301 AA
AC Restore 301 AH
AC Fail 4-Hour 926 AT
AC Fail 4-Hour Restore 926 AJ
Telco Line Trouble (built-in dialer) 351 L1
Telco Line Restore (built-in dialer) 351 LR
Telco Line Trouble (backup dialer) 352 L2
Telco Line Restore (backup dialer) 352 LR
Telco Line Trouble (AC module) 350 L3
Telco Line Restore (AC module) 350 LR
Low Battery System 302 YT
Low Battery System Restore 302 YR
Battery Charger Fail 314 KT
Battery Charger Restore 314 KR
Change Date X
AC Module Communication Failure YC
AC Module Communication Failure Restore YO
Expansion Module
Interactive Keypad Tamper 143 IA
Interactive Keypad Trouble − supervision 333 IT
Interactive Keypad Trouble Restore 143 IR
Cardreader Alarm 143 DA
Cardreader Trouble 333 DT
Cardreader Trouble Restore 143 DR
Point Gateway Tamper Alarm 143 EA
Point Gateway Trouble − supervision 333 ET
Point Gateway Trouble Restore 143 ER
Printer Tamper Alarm 336 PA
Printer Trouble − supervision 336 PT
Printer Trouble Restore 336 PR
RF Low Battery 384 WL
Burglary
BA Burglary Alarm 130 BA
BA Burglary Point Bypass 573 BB
BA Burglary Alarm Restore 130 BR
BA Burglary Point Trouble 380 BT
BA Burglary Point Unbypass 573 BU
Open/Close
BA Auto Close 403 CA
BA Auto Close with Bypass – within Group 910 CB
BA Trouble Closing (closed with burglary alarm during exit) 920 CF
BA Bypass Closing – within group 911 CG
8-5

Event CID SIA
Open/Close (continued)
BA Closing 401 CL
BA Auto Open 403 OA
BA Irregular Opening 450 OI
BA Opening 401 OP
BA No Close – scheduled close time expired 454 OT
BA Exit Fail – exit error (user) 457 EF
BA Bypass Closing by User 928 ZB
BA STAY (Local) Arming 441 CS
Fire
Fire Alarm 110 FA
Fire Trouble 373 FT
Fire Alarm Restore 110 FR
Fire Alarm Silence X
Fire Point Bypass 571 FB
Fire Alarm Point Unbypass 571 FU
Supervisory Alarm 922 SS
Supervisory Trouble 924 ST
Supervisory Restore 922 SR
Supervisory Point Bypass 923 SB
Supervisory Point Unbypass 923 SU
Waterflow Alarm 113 XA
Waterflow Bypass 571 XB
Waterflow Restore 113 XR
WaterflowTrouble 373 XT
WaterflowUnbypass 571 XU
Panic
Holdup Alarm 122 HA
Holdup Point Trouble – sensor trouble 376 HT
Holdup Restore 122 HR
Holdup Point Bypass 925 HB
Holdup Point Unbypass 925 HU
Hostage Alarm – Duress 121 HH
Medical Alarm 100 ZA
Medical Alarm Restore 100 ZR
Medical Trouble 380 ZT
Medical Bypass 570 UB
Medical Unbypass 570 UU
Downloading
DLL Aborted 900 RA
Start DLL 901 RB
DLL Interrupted 902 RI
End DLL Altered 412 RS
DLL Comm Fail 413 RU
End DLL Not Altered 901 RG
8-6

Event CID SIA
Scheduling
BA Change Close Time (extend closing) 630 CE
BA Change Open Time 630 CO
Change Close Time X
Change Auto-On Level X
Change Latest Close – sent only if closing schedule is altered 630 DB
Change Open Time – schedule change 630 CL
Change Time – time/date reset X
Other X
Supervised Bell Alarm (remote bell) 323 UA
Supervised Bell Trouble (remote bell) 320 UT
Supervised Bell Trouble Restore (remote bell) 323 UR
Remote Power Supply Alarm 380 UA
Remote Power Supply Trouble 380 UT
Remote Power Supply Trouble Restore 380 UR
Keyswitch Alarm 140 UA
Keyswitch Trouble 380 UT
Keyswitch Restore 140 UR
Janitor Keyswitch Alarm 140 UA
Janitor Keyswitch Trouble 380 UT
Janitor Keyswitch Alarm Restore 140 UR
Janitor On Premises – user on premises 458 JI
Janitor Off Premises – user on premises restore 458 JO
ADT On-Premises 466 SI
ADT Off-Premises 466 SO
Tamper Alarm 137 TA
Tamper Restore 137 TR
Tamper Bypass 570 TB
Tamper Unbypass 570 TU
VVS Bypass 578 VB
VVS Unbypass (after 12 AM auto-off) 578 VU
Bypass by User 928
Keypad Active X
Audible Walk-Test X
Change Code X
Change Early Open X
Change Holiday X
Carbon Monoxide Alarm 162 GA
Carbon Monoxide Bypass 571 GB
Carbon Monoxide Restore 162 GR
Carbon Monoxide Trouble 380 GT
Carbon Monoxide Unbypass 571 GU
Access
ND
2-Man 2 Person X
Keypad Lockout X
Cardreader Irregular Access 436 DI
8-7

Event CID SIA
Access (continued)
Manual Pushbutton Access – remote arm/disarm opening X
Access Denied Code Known – access denied 421 DK
Access Denied Code Unknown – access denied 921 DD
Long Range Radio
DC Fault 337 LB
DC Fault Restore 337 LA
Tamper Fault 341 LD
Tamper Fault Restore 341 LC
Low Battery 338 LF
Low Battery Restore 338 LE
VSR Fault (antenna) 353 LK
VSR Fault Restore (antenna) 353 LL
ECP Fault 355 LJ
ECP Fault Restore 355 LI
Communication Fault 353 LK
Communication Fault Restore 353 LL
System Test
Walk-Test X
Bell Test X
Holdup Test Alarm X
Holdup Test Restore X
Start Fire Alarm Test 604 FM
End Fire Alarm Test 604 FK
Start Burglary Alarm Test 607 BM
End Burglary Alarm Test 607 BK
Start Supervisory Test 913 SM
End Supervisory Test 913 SK
Start Holdup Alarm Test 914 HM
End Holdup Alarm Test 914 HK
Long Print X
Short Print X
Supervisory Test Print – manual trigger test report X ST
Supervisory Test Restore X ST
Fire Alarm Test Print X FA
Fire Alarm Test Print Restore X FR
Burglary Alarm Test Print X BT
Burglary Alarm Test Print Restore X BT
Holdup Suspicion Print X HS
Keypad No Access X
Untyped Bypass 570 UB
Untyped Unbypass 570 UU
Burglary Alarm Diagnostics 917 BW
Fire Alarm Diagnostics 918 FW
Output Trouble 927 UT
Output Trouble Restore 927 UR
8-8

Event CID SIA
System Test (continued)
Point Trouble 380 UT
Point Alarm – general alarm 140 UA
Point Alarm Restore – general alarm restore 140 UR
Untyped Diagnostics 919 UW
Burglary Alarm Weak Battery 384 BL
Fire Alarm Weak Battery 384 FL
Holdup Alarm Weak Battery 384 HL
Supervisory Alarm Weak Battery 384 SL
Untyped Alarm Weak Battery 384 UL
Weak Battery Restore 384 WR
Dialer Test
Dialer Test Report 602 RP1
Dialer Test Report with System Trouble Present 608 RP5
Types of Customer Care Center Service

The Customer Care Center (CCC) can provide several types of service. The types of service range from
monitoring only alarm signals to monitoring opening and closing schedules along with the ID codes
(passcodes) of the person involved.
There are five types of CCC service, as follows:
1. Passcode Schedule Supervision (PCS)
In addition to monitoring alarm and trouble signals, the CCC:
• Maintains a daily log of openings and closings along with the passcodes that performed these
functions. A record of the daily log can be provided.
• Maintains a listing of all passcodes and schedules, and has sole control of making changes. If
an attempt is made to open a BA group outside of a schedule by someone without the proper
privilege level, a PVF (Passcode Verification Failure) condition will be generated at the CCC.
• Monitors up to five daily schedules (2 permanent, 2 temporary, and 1 holiday) for a given BA
group. The CCC must be notified immediately of any changes to the schedules, or the
introduction of a temporary schedule.
• Will generate a No Close condition if the BA group is not closed at the scheduled closing time.
If the closing time is extended, the CCC must be notified. Then the monitoring of the No Close
condition is transferred to the control unit. This service exceeds the requirements for UL
Central Station Connect Certification.
To establish PCS service, you must, via downline loading only, program the following:
• UUUU (unscheduled) for the Permanent Opening Schedule for the BA group.
• The same close time for the Permanent Closing Schedule for the BA group as recorded in the
CCC schedule. This is to provide a time when a Change Close Time signal will be transmitted.
• NO for the general control unit option "PVF From Control." All supervision of schedules is
performed at the CCC.
• NO for the SANS option for the BA group.
• Non-changeable for all ID codes associated with BA groups using this service. (Changes can
only be made from the CCC.)
• The capability of changing a permanent schedule as non-changeable for any customer ID code.
8-9
2. Access/Passcode Schedule Supervision (ACS)

The ACS type of service exceeds the requirements for UL Central Station Connect Certification.
The CCC will only log openings and closings. The control unit:
• Monitors the schedules and ID codes.
• Is programmed with the permanent opening and closing schedules. Temporary changes to
these schedules can be made locally using an ID code with a temporary-change privilege, or via
downline loading.
• The control unit PVF option must be selected to supervise against irregular openings. Upon
occurrence of an irregular opening, the control unit will transmit an irregular opening message
to the CCC.
To establish ACS service, you must, via downline loading only, program the following:
• The opening time for the Permanent Opening Schedule for the BA group. The control unit
monitors this and supervises for irregular openings based on the programmed opening time.
• The closing time for the Permanent Closing Schedule for the BA group. The control unit
provides No Close supervision based on the programmed closing time.
• YES for the general control unit option "PVF From Control." This enables the control unit to
transmit an irregular opening signal to the CCC if a BA group is opened early by someone
without the proper privilege level.
• Any or all ID codes associated with BA groups using this service as changeable.
3. Passcode No Schedule Supervision (PCNS)
With this type of service, the CCC:
• Supervision is limited to Closing Troubles and No Close conditions.
• Monitors alarm and trouble signals generated by the BA group.
• Does not supervise the schedules of openings and closings.
• Logs the openings and closings along with ID codes.
• Logs No Close signals.
With this type of service, the control unit:
• Is programmed with a permanent close time only, which can be changed temporarily.
• Does not monitor for irregular opening conditions.
To establish PCNS service, you must, via downline loading only, program the following:
provides No Close supervision based on this closing time.
• NO for the general control unit option "PVF From Control." This inhibits an irregular opening
signal.
• Any or all ID codes associated with BA groups using this service as being changeable.
4. Local Closing Supervision (LCS)

This service qualifies for UL Central Station Connect Certification. This service is a form of SANS
service (see next item) and differs from PCNS service in that the control unit:
• Only sends Alarms, Troubles, No Close, and Closing Troubles.
• Does not transmit Openings, Closings, Change Closing Time, or Bypass at Close points.
• Is programmed with a permanent close time only (no opening), which can be changed
temporarily by someone with an ID code having a temporary change privilege.
To establish LCS service, you must, via downline loading only, program the following:
provides No Close supervision based on this closing time.
8-10
signal.
• YES for the SANS option for the BA group.
• Any or all ID codes associated with BA groups using this service as being changeable.
5. Alarm Events Only (SANS)

The control unit will transmit only alarms and troubles to the CCC. No BA group openings or
closings will be transmitted.
To establish SANS service, you must, via downline loading only, program:
signal.
• YES for the SANS option for the BA group.
• Any or all ID codes associated with BA groups using this service as changeable.
Note: Do not program the Permanent Closing Schedule for the BA group.
Table of CCC Signaling
Signal SANS (2) Significance
BA (#) Day Set (3) No BA group (#) turned to Protection Off condition.
BA (#) Nite Set (3) No BA group (#) turned to Protection On condition.
Burglar Alarm (Point #) (4) Yes BA alarm at Point (#).
Burglar Alarm Bypass (Point #) (3) Yes BA Point (#) has been bypassed.
Burglar Alarm Unbypass (Point #) (3) Yes BA Point (#) has been unbypassed.
Burglar Alarm Trouble Yes BA trouble at Point (#). Typically indicates open in PID loop, PID comm fail, or tamper.
Holdup Alarm (Point #) (4) Yes Holdup alarm at Point (#).
Holdup Alarm Bypass (Point #) (3) Yes Holdup alarm Point (#) has been bypassed.
Holdup Alarm Unbypass (Point #) (3) Yes Holdup alarm Point (#) has been unbypassed.
Holdup Alarm Trouble (Point #) (4) Yes Holdup trouble at Point (#). Typically indicates open in PID loop, PID Comm fail, or
tamper.
Supervisory Alarm (Point #) (4) Yes Supervisory alarm at Point (#).
Supervisory Bypass (Point #) (3) Yes Supervisory Point(s) has been bypassed.
Supervisory Unbypass (Point #) (3) Yes Supervisory Point (#) has been unbypassed.
Supervisory Trouble (Point #) (4) Yes Trouble at supervisory Point (#). Typically indicates open in PID loop, PID comm fail,
or tamper.
Fire Alarm (Point #) (4) Yes Fire alarm at Point (#).
Fire Alarm Bypass (Point #) (3) Yes Fire alarm Point (#) has been bypassed.
Fire Alarm Unbypass (Point #) (3) Yes Fire alarm Point (#) has been unbypassed.
Fire Alarm Trouble (Point #) (4) Yes Trouble at fire alarm Point (#). Typically indicates open in PID loop, PID comm fail, or
tamper.
Untyped Alarm (Point #) (4,6) Yes Untyped alarm at Point (#).
Untyped Bypass (Point #) (3,6) Yes Untyped Point (#) has been bypassed.
Untyped Unbypass (Point #) (3,6) Yes Untyped Point (#) has been unbypassed.
Untyped Trouble (Point #) (4,6) Yes Trouble at Untyped Point (#). Typically indicates open in PID loop, PID comm fail, or
tamper.
Cabinet Tamper Alarm (4) Yes Cabinet tamper has operated.
Operating Panel Tamper Alarm (4) Yes Operating panel tamper has operated.
Printer Interface Tamper Alarm (4) Yes Printer interface unit tamper has operated.
ADT On Premises (3) Yes Signals entry of ADT service code at operating panel; system is in service mode.
ADT Off Premises (3) Yes Signals entry of Off Premises command at operating panel to terminate service mode.
Janitor On Premises Yes Key inserted in Janitor keyswitch.
Janitor Off Premises Yes Key removed from Janitor keyswitch.
BA Group (#) Exit Fail No Customer did not exit after turning on protection in BA group (#).
8-11
Signal SANS (2) Significance

BA Group (#) Closing Trouble (3) Yes One or more BA protection points in BA group (#) are in alarm after expiration of exit
delay.
BA Group (#) Bypass (3) No Protection has been turned on with BA point(s) bypassed in BA group (#).
BA Group (#) No Close No Protection not closed at the end of closing timer timeout at BA group (#).
BA Group (#) Change Closing Time (3) No Close time of BA group (#) has been temporarily changed at an operating panel.
BA Group (#) Irregular Opening (3) No Alarm due to someone turning a BA group off outside of the scheduled open period,
without having the privilege to do so. The irregular opening and user ID number are
transmitted. (Used with ACS service only.)
Dialer Test Yes Transmitted once upon initialization of control unit, again after 12 hours have elapsed
(as programmed), and thereafter as programmed. Serves to verify operation of dialing
circuitry and integrity of telco line.
Output Trouble Yes Trouble at a SIM output point (e.g., comm fail).
Output Restore Yes Trouble has been restored.
Start BA Test Yes Walk test of BA points has started.
End BA Test Yes Walk test of BA points has ended.
Start FA Test Yes Walk test of FA points has started.
End FA Test Yes Walk test of FA points has ended.
Start SPV Test Yes Walk test of supervisory points has started.
End SPV Test Yes Walk test of supervisory points has ended.
System Self-Supervisory Signals

AC Fail Yes Signal initiated after loss of AC power for 4 hours. May be sent with a BA trouble (Day
Set) or entry alarm (Nite Set).
Low Battery (4) Yes AC power has failed and standby battery is sensed as being low. May be sent with a
BA trouble or entry alarm.
Telco Line Trouble (4) Yes Telco line problem; or, if immediately followed by a restoration, it signals that problem
on telco line has been cleared.
Interprocessor Communication Trouble Yes Problem in communication link between communicator module and control unit
(4) microprocessors.
Downline Loading Signals

Start DLL Process Yes Signals that the downline loading (DLL) process with the ADEMCO Compass
downloading software unit has started upon receipt of a Contact ADEMCO Compass
downloading software command from the ADEMCO Compass downloading software
unit.
End DLL Process Yes Signals that DLL process has been completed.
Abort DLL Process Yes Signals that the DLL process has been aborted. Signal is initiated if communicator
loses contact with ADEMCO Compass downloading software.
DLL Interrupted Yes Signals that communication with the ADEMCO Compass downloading software unit
has been interrupted due to alarm condition.
DLL Time Limit Exceeded Yes Signals that the downline loading (DLL) time limit has been exceeded during
communication with the ADEMCO Compass downloading software unit.
DLL Comm. Fail Yes Signals that control unit has failed in three attempts to establish communication with
the ADEMCO Compass downloading software unit.
Notes:
1. Signals are transmitted in ADT version of Security Industry Association (SIA) format and include time and date.
2. "Yes" indicates signal is also applicable to SANS service.
3. Signal includes data that identifies the person performing the operation.
4. Signal is cleared when condition is restored.
5. BA points will be automatically unbypassed when the BA group is opened.
6. Untyped designation is used for the following points: BA Keyswitch, BA Janitor Keyswitch, BA End Delay, BA Blocklock, and
Remote Power Supply.
Programming the System Communication Options

To program for system communication, see the Programming section.
8-12
S E C T I O N 9
AC Communicator Module
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ About the AC Communicator Module ♦ Using Multiple AC Communicator Modules
♦ Installing the AC Communicator Module ♦ Programming for the AC Communicator Module
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About the AC Communicator Module

The FOCUS 200 PLUS can transmit alarm, trouble, and other reports to the central station via a
dedicated AC telephone line, dedicated DC telephone line, or an RS232 using the optional 472491 or
472491D ADT AC Communicator module. ADT SIA format only can be used via the AC Communicator
module. The 472491D supports encrypted communication using Data Encrypted Standard (DES).
The FOCUS 200 PLUS can be programmed to transmit reports to the central station using the AC
Communicator module alone, or using the module as the main communicator and using the built-in
dialer as a backup communicator. The system automatically switches over to the built-in dialer when it
detects that the output of the module is faulted. Regardless of which mode is selected, the system can
be downloaded via the built-in dialer.
The AC Communicator module must always be set up as the main communicator and any other type of
communication must be set up as the backup.
AC Communicator Supervision
Both the control unit and the module supervise the connections. The system polls the module every 45
seconds and provides a COMM FAIL indication if it does not get a response from the module.
The module transmits a COMM FAIL report (NYC) to the central station if it isn’t polled by the system
within a 45-second period, and sends a COMM FAIL RESTORE (NYO) when polling resumes. The
module may also be programmed to supervise its connection to the central station. A COMM FAIL is
indicated, if within a programmable time period, the module isn’t polled by the central station.
If the built-in dialer is not enabled as a backup, the system provides a COMM FAIL indication after the
module has failed to transmit a report to the central station. If the built-in dialer is enabled, the system
provides a COMM FAIL indication after both the module and built-in dialer fail to transmit the report.
Using Encrypted Communication

Encrypted communication requires the programming of 6 sixteen-character hexadecimal numbers, also
known as keys. All sixteen characters must be programmed. Data Encrypted Standard (DES) security
depends on the safety and integrity of the keys. The 6 keys are:
• Master Key main key used in the implementation of ADT’s proprietary protocol.
• Initial Vector Key used by the encryption algorithm for synchronization.
• Working Keys (4) these 4 keys are used in the transfer of data.
The FOCUS 200 PLUS is shipped with a set of default values for the keys. By simply turning DES ON,
encrypted communication can be established with the CCC. To program the system for DES, see the
Programming section.
The default values for the DES keys may be re-established by doing a reset of the system memory. Be
aware that this restores the default values for the entire system.
9-1
• All 16 characters must be entered.

• Do not enter all zeroes for the key.
• Do not press Enter whenever the asterisks are displayed. This enters zeroes for the entire key.
• Pressing Next whenever the asterisks are displaying, advances to the next DES Key screen without
changing the stored key number.
• For security purposes, once the key has been stored, it may never be viewed.
Installing the AC Communicator Module
• The system supports either the AC Communicator or the backup dialer, not both.
• The module draws 250mA from the FOCUS 200 PLUS’ auxiliary power #2 output. Be sure to include
this current draw in the power calculations.
Mounting the AC Module

The AC Communicator module mounts to the FOCUS 200 PLUS’ main PCB, using 3 standoffs
(supplied). This is the same mounting arrangement as that used for the 472402A backup dialer.
Wiring the AC Module
To wire the AC Communicator, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Power down the control unit before making any connections to the AC Module.
2 Connect the telephone lines to the module. See Figure 9-1 or 9-2 depending on which
module you are using.
1 If you are using AC telephone lines, connect these to terminals 1 & 2 (see Figure 9-3).
2 If you are using DVACS telephone lines or RS232 port, connect these to terminals 4 - 8.
Maximum length of RS232 cable is 50 feet (see Figure 9-4).
3 If you are using DC telephone lines, connect these to terminals 9 - 12 (see Figure 9-5).
3 Connect the ribbon cable (supplied) from the 9-pin header on the module to J6 on the
control unit’s PC board. Be sure the ribbon cable does not run under the AC module board.
The J6 header is static sensitive. Make connections to the header with the power
to the control unit off and after grounding yourself.
4 Connect the module’s earth ground (terminal 3) to the control unit’s earth ground (terminal
3 or 4), using 16AWG wire.
5 If you are using multiple AC Communicator modules, set the JL/JK header. See the text
that follows for the correct configuration.
9-2
Section 9 – AC Communicator Module
9-PIN HEADER
CONNECTION TO J6.
SEE NOTE 2.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 } 12
NOT USED
}
COM 2+
11 COM 2–
TO PAIR OF DC
10 COM 1+ TELEPHONE LINES
ACTIVITY LED
9 COM 1–
(GREEN)
(NOTE 3) 8
}
GROUND
7 TXD
6 TO DVACS TELEPHONE LINE
RXD
5 (OR RS232 PORT)
MOUNT MODULE
RTS
TO MAIN PCB
4
USING 3 CTS
STANDOFFS 3
EARTH GROUND (NOTE 4)
(SUPPLIED). 2
STANDOFFS
SNAP INTO 3
HOLES SHOWN.
472491 ADT AC COMMUNICATOR MODULE
1
RING
TIP } TO AC TELEPHONE LINE
4-PIN JL/JK HEADER
NOTE 1: MODULE DRAWS 250mA @ 12VDC.

NOTE 2: CONNECT RIBBON CABLE (SUPPLIED) TO J6 ON THE CONTROL
JK
UNIT’S CIRCUIT BOARD. AC TELEPHONE LINE IMPEDANCE
NOTE 3: THE MODULE TURNS THE ACTIVITY LED ON WHEN IT DETECTS AN MATCHING JUMPERS.
INCOMING CENTRAL STATION POLL. IF THE INCOMING POLL IS NOT JL SEE TEXT FOR SETTINGS.
ADDRESSED TO IT, THE MODULE TURNS THE ACTIVITY LED OFF
IMMEDIATELY. IF THE INCOMING POLL IS ADDRESSED TO IT, THE
MODULE KEEPS THE ACTIVITY LED ON UNTIL THE NEXT POLL
WHICH IS NOT ADDRESSED TO IT.
NOTE 4: CONNECT THE MODULE’S EARTH GROUND TO THE PANEL’S EARTH
GROUND (TERMINALS 3 OR 4) USING 16 AWG WIRE.
Figure 9-1: 472491 AC Communicator Module Wiring

9-PIN HEADER
CONNECTION TO J6.
SEE NOTE 2.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
12
}
COM 2+
11 COM 2– TO PAIR OF DC
10 COM 1+ TELEPHONE LINES
ACTIVITY LED 9
(GREEN) COM 1–
(NOTE 3) 8
}
GROUND
7 TO DVACS TELEPHONE LINE
TXD (OR RS232 PORT)
6
RXD
MOUNT MODULE 5
RTS
TO MAIN PCB
4
USING 3 T USED CTS
STANDOFFS 3
EARTH GROUND (NOTE 4)
(SUPPLIED). 2
STANDOFFS
SNAP INTO 3
HOLES SHOWN.
472491D AC COMMUNICATOR MODULE
1
RING
TIP } TO AC TELEPHONE LINE
4-PIN JL/JK HEADER
NOTE 1: MODULE DRAWS 250mA @ 12VDC.

NOTE 2: CONNECT RIBBON CABLE (SUPPLIED) TO J6 ON THE CONTROL
JK AC TELEPHONE LINE IMPEDANCE
UNIT’S CIRCUIT BOARD.
NOTE 3: THE MODULE TURNS THE ACTIVITY LED ON WHEN IT DETECTS AN MATCHING JUMPERS.
INCOMING CENTRAL STATION POLL. IF THE INCOMING POLL IS NOT SEE TEXT FOR SETTINGS.
JL
ADDRESSED TO IT, THE MODULE TURNS THE ACTIVITY LED OFF
IMMEDIATELY. IF THE INCOMING POLL IS ADDRESSED TO IT, THE
MODULE KEEPS THE ACTIVITY LED ON UNTIL THE NEXT POLL
WHICH IS NOT ADDRESSED TO IT.
NOTE 4: CONNECT THE MODULE’S EARTH GROUND TO THE PANEL’S EARTH
GROUND (TERMINALS 3 OR 4) USING 16 AWG WIRE.
Figure 9-2: 472491D AC Communicator Module Wiring
Using Multiple AC Communicator Modules

A total of four AC Communicator modules may be connected in parallel with the same dedicated AC
telephone line. Set the JL/JK plugs on each module for multiple module configuration.
The JL/JK header has jumper plugs (supplied) that must be properly configured when one or more
modules are connected to a dedicated AC telephone line. The table below indicates when to install the
jumper plugs on the JL and JK positions of this header. See Figure 9-1.
9-3
Number of Modules JL Jumper Plug JK Jumper Plug

1 module Installed Installed
2 modules Not Installed Installed
3 modules Installed Not Installed
4 module Not Installed Not Installed
YEL BLU
CONNECT RIBBON CABLE FROM BRN

9-PIN HEADER TO J6 ON THE GRN
CONTROL UNIT'S CIRCUIT BOARD
NO
CONNECTION } RED
GRY
12
11
BLK ORG
10
RJ31X TELCO JACK
9
8
7
6
5
4 TELCO
3
CORD
RING
2 TIP
1
(SEE NOTE 1)
4-PIN JL/JK
HEADER EARTH GROUND
472491 ADT AC COMMUNICATOR YEL BLU
BRN
GRN
RING
TO UCS
RED
TIP
GRY
BLK ORG
RJ31X TELCO JACK
Note 1: To install JL/JK header see text for multiple AC Communicator modules:
Figure 9-3: AC Communicator Module Wiring Using AC Telephone Lines
YEL BLU

RJ31X
NO
CONNECTION } TELCO
JACK
RED
GRY
12
11
BLK ORG
10
9
GND
8
TXD
7
RXD
6
RTS
5
CTS TELCO
4
3
CORD
2
1
(SEE NOTE 1)
4-PIN JL/JK
HEADER EARTH GROUND
472491 ADT AC COMMUNICATOR
YEL BLU
GND
BRN
GRN
RJ31X
TO UCS OR TELCO
EXTERNAL MODEM JACK
RED
TXD
RTS
GRY
BLK ORG
CTS
RXD
Note 1: Not used on RS232 communication
Figure 9-4: AC Communicator Module Wiring Using DVACS or RS232 Port
9-4
Section 9 – AC Communicator Module
YEL BLU

NO
CONNECTION } COM 2+
RED
GRY
12
COM 2-
11
COM 1+ BLK ORG
10
COM 1- RJ31X TELCO JACK
9
8
7
6
5
4 TELCO
3
CORD
2
1
(SEE NOTE 1)
4-PIN JL/JK
HEADER EARTH GROUND
472491 ADT AC COMMUNICATOR YEL BLU

COM 2+
BRN
GRN
COM 1-
TO UCS
RED
COM 1+
COM 2-
GRY
BLK ORG
RJ31X TELCO JACK
Note 1: Not used on DC communication
Figure 9-5: AC Communicator Module Wiring Using DC Telephone Lines
Programming for the AC Communicator Module

Programming for the AC Communicator Module can only be done via downline loading. Be sure to
enable the system for SIA type format communication. Additional programming options are DES, AC
module present, communication type, baud rate and supervision interval.
9-5
9-6
S E C T I O N 1 0
J5 Output Triggers
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ About the J5 Output Triggers ♦ Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment
♦ Types of Output Points ♦ Programming the Output Triggers
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About the J5 Output Triggers

The FOCUS 200 PLUS system provides 8 output triggers and 1 connection for ground by means of the
J5 connector pins. The J5 connector is located in the upper right-hand corner of the control unit PC
board. Each output may be set to activate in response to a specific condition being monitored by the
control unit. Additionally, Output Trigger 3 can be configured as a tamper input to monitor the cabinet
tamper(s).
Output Trigger 3 is normally configured as a tamper input to monitor the cabinet tamper(s).
The 4142TR cable is used to make connections to the J5 connector. The output triggers are primarily
intended to sink current, and are rated as follows:
Low Output: 0.7VDC through 100 ohm limiting resistor (can sink 33mA with a 4VDC drop).
High Output: 12VDC through 4k ohm limiting resistor.
These outputs can trigger low-current devices such as relays and sounders by wiring the device's (+)
terminal to one of the control unit's auxiliary power outputs and the device's (-) terminal to the desired
output trigger. A 12VDC relay with a 320 ohm coil and a 7.8VDC pull-in voltage is an example of a
device that may be used.
Types of Output Points

The following table indicates the entry number required at the operating panel, how the output point
type functions and the options associated with each type (see the Input and Output Point Types section
for an explanation of each option).
Entry Description Function Opt. 1 Opt. 2 Opt. 3
14 (CSC) Central Output turns on or off upon a command signal from Complement
Station the CCC.
Note: The command can only be issued using AC

communication.
15 (SMC) Service Output turns on the first time a valid service ID code Complement
is entered at an operating panel (ADT on-premises),
and turns off when an ADT off- premises signal is
initiated by selecting RESET~ ADT OFF at the
operating panel.
16 (TFC) Telco Fault Output turns on if a telco fault condition occurs (low Complement
voltage or current, or loss of interrogation on AC telco
line). The output turns off when the telco line becomes
normal.
10-1

17 (SCC) BA Schedule Output turns on at the start of the scheduled open Complement
period for a designated BA group, and turns off when
the close schedule starts.
18 (LTC) BA Lights Output turns on when the protection of a pre-selected Complement
BA group is turned off, or the entry/exit delay period
is activated. The output turns off when the protection
of a BA group is turned on.
Note: If the Recycle Exit Delay is enabled, the output
turns on whenever any key is pressed on the operating
panel.
19 (FXC) BA Fixed Output turns on when any BA Fixed or Fixed Local Complement
type point goes into alarm or, during Day Set, an
Instant Daytime Annunciation type point goes into
alarm. Output turns off when a valid ID code is
entered at any operating panel.
20 (OFC) BA Off Output turns on when the protection of a selected BA Complement
group is turned off, and turns off when the protection
is turned on.
21 (FAC) Fire Output turns on and latches when any fire type point Complement Silence
in the system goes into alarm. The output turns off
when the alarm condition has been cleared and the
fire alarm is reset.
22 (SPC) Supervisory Output turns on if any supervisory type point goes Complement
into alarm, and turns off when the point restores.
23 (HUC) Holdup Output turns on if: Complement
• A holdup type point goes into alarm and turns off

when the holdup device is manually reset.
• The ambush feature is activated and turns off
when the operating panel times out.
• A duress signal is initiated at any operating panel
and turns off when the operating panel times out.
24 (HSC) Holdup Output turns on when a Holdup type point or a Complement
Suspicion Holdup Special type point in which the Suspicion
option has been selected goes into alarm. The output,
which can be used to control a holdup and suspicion
camera, turns off when the point restores.
25 (RSC) BA Remote Output turns on to operate Sonalert(s) during any of Complement
Sonalert the following periods:
• Output follows the steady keypad audible pattern
during the pre-alarm entry delay of the selected
BA group, and operates the 2-seconds-On, 2-
seconds-Off pattern during the exit delay.
• During the holdup test (regardless of the BA
group involved), output operates the 2-seconds-
On, 2-seconds-Off pattern while the point being
tested is normal, and turns on steady when the
point is in alarm. When the point is restored to
normal, the output reverts to the 2-seconds-On, 2-
seconds-Off operation until the test is ended.
• Output turns on for 2 seconds, once each minute,
during the programmed closing reminder time of
the selected BA group, and turns on steady during
the close warning period.
10-2
Section 10 – J5 Output Triggers

26 (TSC) BA Bell and Output turns on for 30 seconds when a test of the local Complement
Vault Sensor bell and/or vault sensors is commanded from the
Test operating panel. When used in conjunction with the
testing of vault sensors, the output can be used to turn
on the test signal transmitter of a vault vibration
sensor system, and/or to turn on the test sounder of a
vault audio system.
27 (RBL) Remote Bell This output point type is intended for retrofit FOCUS Strobe Common
applications in which the Horn/Strobe point cannot be BA
(PID gateway
only) used. It can be used for controlling a bell for BA and
FA applications, and for controlling a fire alarm
strobe.
This type utilizes a 471898 (7187-028) Quad Powered
Sounder PID Module.
The quad powered sounder PID is employed for
controlling and supervising the wiring to a sounder or
strobe for local fire alarm applications. In the event of
a fire, the sounder pulses on and off, and the strobe
flashes continuously.
Note: A separate point is needed both the sounder and
strobe.
The supervised bell control unit is employed for
connecting a bell housing and local bell in order to
provide a local alarm for BA applications. The bell
operates steadily for a burglar alarm, and rings on and
off for a fire alarm.
33 (STC) System Output turns on for any of the following conditions Complement Off
and remains on until the condition is cleared: Normal
Trouble
• A point has been installed, but the point has not
been entered into the control unit data base.
• A “comm fail” has occurred for a point, an
operating panel, or a printer interface unit.
• A tamper condition has been detected at a Holdup
point, a keyswitch interface, a Remote Bell point,
an Ambush Start or End point, or a Remote
Power Supply point.
• A trouble condition has occurred at a Janitor
Keyswitch point.
34 (PLC) Point Link Output follows the status of a designated input point, Complement Output Active
or the output of a designated Point Link output point. Link When
Turned
On
37 (ACC) BA Access Output turns on for 10 seconds when: Complement
• A valid ID code is entered at the operating panel

during the Day Set condition of the associated BA
group.
• The BA group is turned to Day Set. A typical
application is having the output control a door-
strike release mechanism, permitting access to a
controlled area.
10-3

38 (HST) Horn/Strobe For use with a horn/strobe that will operate for an FA Inhibit BA Common Code 3
alarm and, optionally, also for a BA alarm, as follows: BA
(SIM
Gateway • For an FA alarm, strobe flashes continuously and
only). horn operates for an ongoing series of five 1-
second rings followed by a 5-second pause.
Horn/strobe can be silenced only after all FA
points become normal by entering any valid ID
code (or 2,2,2,2,2,2); otherwise, turn-off occurs
when 10-minute timeout expires.
• For a BA alarm, horn sounds continuously unless
silenced by entry a valid ID code (or automatic
turn-off occurs for the BA group that is involved).
Strobe does not operate for a BA alarm.
Note: Set option 3 for NFPA temporal pattern (Yes).
If set for (NO) the output is steady.
40 (PRC) AC Fail This point type is normally on and turns off whenever Complement Comm
an AC failure condition occurs on the system. Fail
59 (ACD) Access This output point can be used to trigger a camera or Complement
Denied activate an annunciation device in the event that
someone uses a card/key having a code that either:
• Is not in the system.
• Does not have Irregular Open, Open or Close
access to all BA groups associated with that
ACIU.
• Does not have the Irregular Open or Open option
for any of the associated BA groups that may be
On.
• Has a Close option and the person attempts to
enter outside of the scheduled open period even
though the associated protection is Off.
When the point is triggered, the output stays on for 10
seconds and then goes Off.
68 (ABA) Alarm in any This point type is normally off and turns on when an Complement Comm
alarm occurs in any BA group that is armed. The Fail
BA Group
output returns to the off condition when the BA group
with the alarm condition is changed to Day Set.
Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment

The J5 output triggers may be used to trip auxiliary alarm signaling equipment such as ADEMCO's
7720P, 7835C, 7830R, and 7920SE Long Range Radios.
These units are typically used as a backup to the Telco lines. They may be configured to send signals
when the system detects a Telco line fault. Refer to Figures 10-1, 10-2, 10-3 and 10-4 for the wiring and
configuration of the Long Range Radios to the J5 output triggers.
When a Long Range Radio is installed, configure the sense select for zones 1 and 2 in the Long Range
Radio to activate on +5V (positive trigger). This is necessary to prevent false alarms from occurring. Refer to
the installation instructions provided with your radio for instructions on setting the zone 1 and 2 levels.
10-4
Section 10 – J5 Output Triggers
7720
FOCUS 200 PLUS SafetyNet Radio
AUX. Relay N.O. 11 Power
Ground 12 16.5VAC / 40VA
J5 Out 5 6
Output Yellow Ground
Out 6 7
Triggers Gray
Out 7 8
Violet Zone1
Out 8 9
FOCUS 200 PLUS Setup: Zone 2
Set the P3 Jumper to 'WET' Zone 3

Program the AUX. Relay to activate
on any BA [ABA] Zone 4
Program Output 6 (Point 253) to
activate on Fire (type 21, FA)
ECP In
Program Output 7 (Point 254) to ECP Out
activate on Holdup (type 23, HU)
Radio Fault
activate on Telco Fault (type 16)
Output
Use any of the eight Hardwired B A +V GND +V GND

Inputs (ZN 1-8) on the control and
Program this point as an FI
(Type 1), or an SPV (Type 13) to
monitor Radio Fault J3 J2 J1
2k EOLR
Figure 10-1: Configuration of the 7720P to the J5 Output Triggers

7830R
FOCUS 200 PLUS SafetyNet Radio
AUX. Relay N.O. 11 Power
Ground 12 16.5VAC / 40VA
J5 White
Trigger
Out 5 6
Output Yellow Ground
Out 6 7
Triggers Gray
Out 7 8
Violet Zone1
Out 8 9
FOCUS 200 PLUS Setup: Zone 2
Set the P3 Jumper to 'WET' Zone 3

on any BA [ABA] Zone 4
activate on BA Off (type 20, OFC)
ECP In
ECP Out
Radio Fault
Program Output 8 (Point 255) to Output
B A +V GND +V GND
Use any of the eight Hardwired

Inputs (ZN 1-8) on the control and
Program this point as an FI J3 J2 J1
(Type 1), or an SPV (Type 13) to
monitor Radio Fault
2k EOLR
Figure 10-2: Configuration of the 7830R to the J5 Output Triggers
ADEMCO 7835C
FOCUS 200 PLUS AC1
16.5
AUX. Relay N.O. 11 40VA
AC2
Ground 12
+ Trigger Voltage
J5
Output Out 6 7 - Trigger (GND)
Triggers Out 7 8
Out 8 9 Zone 1 (FA)
FOCUS 200 PLUS Setup:
Zone 2 (HU)
Set the P3 Jumper to 'WET'
Program the AUX. Relay to activate Zone 3 (BA)
on any BA [ABA]
Zone 4 (Telco Fault)
activate on Holdup (type 23, HU) Zone 5
Zone 6 (Enable Radio)
Radio Fault Relay 1

Radio Fault Relay 2
New Programming
Options:
Q 27= Y
Q27a=Y
Q27b=Y
Q27c=Y
Q27d=N
Q27e=N
Figure 10-3: Configuration of the 7835C to the J5 Output Triggers
10-5
7920SE
No. 1349
16.5VAC
40VA
879-126
FOCUS 200 PLUS Battery
10k EOLR Fuse

AUX. Relay N.O. 11 No. 90-12
Ground 12 3A, 32V
CKT Zone Earth
TB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J5 GND TEST GND Red Blk
Output Yellow XMFR
Out 6 7
Triggers Gray Imputs
Out 7 8 Tamper
Violet No. 112
Out 8 9
FOCUS 200 PLUS Setup: Zone Inputs 1-6

Radio
Set the P3 Jumper to 'WET'
TB2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
on any BA [ABA] Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 OK
472366 SIM
Gnd Blk
ALTRONIX
RBTUL
To SIM Gateway Trunk

Red-Wht
+12V Red
To CP + 12V Trig
Pos
Neg
Com (-) Yel NO To CP GND
Org NC
Com (+) Blue Blue-Wht C
33k EOLR
White
Fix Instant BA pt
Figure 10-4: Configuration of the 7920SE to the J5 Output Triggers
Programming the Output Triggers

The output triggers are points 248 through 255 (output triggers 1 through 8). For information about the
procedure, refer to the Programming section.
Defaults for the Output Triggers:
Point Description 472412 Wire Default Type Gateway # Hard ID
Color
248 Trigger 1 Blue PLC 8 111
249 Trigger 2 Brown PLC 8 112
250 Trigger 3 Green PLC 8 113
(Tamper)
251 Trigger 4 Red PLC 8 114
252 Trigger 5 White PLC 8 115
253 Trigger 6 Yellow PLC 8 116
254 Trigger 7 Gray PLC 8 117
255 Trigger 8 Violet PLC 8 118
10-6
S E C T I O N 1 1
Access Control
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ About Access Control ♦ Access Control Options
♦ Installing the Access Control Interface Unit ♦ Maintenance of the Access Control System
♦ Using Readers, Keyloks, and Operating Panels
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About Access Control

The FOCUS 200 PLUS System accommodates up to 8 of the 472270 Access Control Interface Units
(ACIU). The ACIU's interface access devices into the system for the purpose of controlling access to one
or more designated BA groups. The devices are installed at the door to the protected area, allowing only
persons with a valid code on their card, key, or operating panel to gain access to the area being
controlled. The access devices available are:
• Card Readers
• Keypads
• Key Readers
• Keyloks
• Operating Panels
Features of the ACIU

Each Access Control Interface Unit:
• Attaches to the RS-485 bus, and can be distanced up to 4000 cable feet from the control unit.
Note: Required distance may be shortened to comply with the ACIU's minimum voltage rating.
• Can accommodate one card/key reader with associated electric strike (or a Keylok) for controlling
one door.
• Supports a Marlok key reader or Marlok Keylok, as well as a variety of specified card readers
(magnetic stripe, Wiegand or proximity) that communicate using an industry-standard Wiegand
format.
• Supports a separately ordered on-board battery, which provides power to the door strike. The
battery also enables the ACIU to operate in a super-degraded mode (explained later in this
section).
• Can be used to arm/disarm one or more BA groups.
• Supports buzz-through capability.
Additional Features when Using Access Control

• Each reader can be programmed to determine the length of door unlock time.
• The system can be programmed to log all attempts at entry or only unsuccessful attempts, plus
openings and closings (person, reader number, time, and date).
• All user cards and keys are shipped precoded, ready for use; no special site codes are required.
• Users can be assigned varying degrees of access to the BA group(s).
• A total of 999 access control users can be programmed, of which 255 can also have use of the
operating panels.
11-1
• A user with janitor privilege may shunt alarms on Janitor points in all BA group(s) with card/key.
• The system can be programmed to release all access control doors when a fire alarm occurs. This
option can only be programmed via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader.
Basic Operation Using Card/Key Reader

Each door being used for access control requires:
• A card-or key-reading device installed.
• An electric door-releasing mechanism installed.
• Both the reader and door-releasing mechanism wired to the ACIU.
• The card or key's unique code enrolled into the database of the control unit.
When a card/key is used at the reader, the following sequence of events occurs before the person is
permitted entry:
Step Action
1 The reader interprets the code on the card/key and forwards this data to the ACIU.
2 When interrogated by the control unit, the ACIU sends the code that was read.
3 The control unit then processes the information to determine whether to permit access.
Some of the questions that must be satisfied during this processing are:
• Does the code exist in the control unit database?
• Does the person have access to all of the BA groups assigned to the ACIU?
• Are the BA group(s) turned on in the area being accessed?
• Does the person have an open privilege?
• Is the time of day within the open schedule?
• Does the person have an irregular open privilege?
4 If the control unit determines that it is OK for the person to gain access, it signals the
ACIU, which then uses its battery to provide the power for operating the door strike or
other lock-releasing mechanism, thereby allowing the person to open the door.
The card/key code for the various users can be assigned locally from an operating panel or can be
downline loaded. See the ID Codes section for the details of the procedure using an operating panel.
Physical Description of ACIU

The ACIU fits into a separately ordered 472352 Housing Unit that is also used for a quad PID module.
The following are important items on the board (see Figure 11-1):
Part Purpose
Terminal Strip TB1 Used for making connections to the RS-485 bus.
Terminal Strip TB2 Used for connecting the reader.
Terminal Strip TB3 Used for powering the door-releasing mechanism.
Battery Area and There is space for a separately ordered 12V 0.8 AH standby battery that
Connector connects to a polarized connector on the circuit board.
Terminating jumper E1 Insert only if the ACIU is located at the end of the RS-485 bus.
Jumpers E2 through E9 Used for setting the ACIU communication address on the RS-485 bus.
Jumper E10 Remove jumper if you are using an on-board battery.
Jumper E11 Leave the jumper intact if it is powering a 12V device. Remove jumper if
it is powering a 5V device. Connect a standard 3k EOLR across TB3-1
and TB3-2 if it is not powering a door releasing mechanism.
11-2
Section 11 – Access Control
Part Purpose
TXD and RXD LEDs Indicates the ACIU communication status as follows:
• TXD LED - flashing when the ACIU is transmitting.
• RXD LED - flashing when the ACIU is receiving.
RS-485 BUS LEDs TERMINAL STRIP TB1

TXD (YEL) RXD (RED) FOR RS-485 BUS
CONNECTIONS
RS-485
DS1 DS2
TXD RXD
BATTERY AREA
E2 12V, O.8AH
E3
RS-485 BUS E4
ADDRESS JUMPERS E5
(SEE DETAIL "A") E6
E7
E8
E9
TB1 TB2
JUMPER E10 1
(SEE NOTE 4) (BLK) 1 GND
BATTERY 2+
(RED) 2 + 12V
3 "0"
JUMPER E11 (YEL) 3 COM
(SEE NOTE 3) 4 "1"
TB3 1
(BLU) 4 COM + 5 "A"
2+
CONNECTION FOR E1 6 "B"
ON BOARD BATTERY
IF USED) FOR TAMPER
TERMINAL STRIP JUMPER E1 (REMOVE JUMPER (IF USED)
TB3 FOR POWERING STRIKE TO DISCONNECT RS-485 SEE NOTE 2
OR SOLENOID (NOTE 3) TERMINATING RESISTOR) TERMINAL STRIP
TB2 FOR READER
CONNECTIONS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
UNIT NO. E2 UNIT NO.
E3
E4
E5
COMMUNICATION E6
GROUP NO. 4 E7
E8
E9
JUMPER IN JUMPER OUT
JUMPER CONDITIONING SHOWN FOR COMMUNICATION GROUP 4

NOTES:
1. RS-485 BUS LEDs:

(A) TXD (YEL) FLASHES WHEN ACIU IS TRANSMITTING
(B) RXD (RED) FLASHES WHEN ACIU IS RECEIVING.
2. A 248116 TAMPER KIT (ORDERED SEPARATELY) MUST BE INSTALLED

FOR UL INSTALLATIONS. CONSISTS OF TAMPER SWITCH PLUS
MOUNTING HARDWARE.
3. LEAVE JUMPER E11 IN IF POWERING A 12V STRIKE (CARD

READER OR MARLOK KEYREADER). REMOVE JUMPER E11 IF POWERING
A 5V MARLOCK KEYLOCK OR OTHER 5V DEVICE. CONNECT STANDARD
3K EOL RESISTOR ACROSS TB3-1 AND TB3-2 IF NOT USING KEYLOCK OR STRIKE.
4. REMOVE JUMPER E10 IF USING ON-BOARD 12VDC 0.8AH BATTERY.
Figure 11-1: Access Control Interface Unit (ACIU)
11-3
Installing the Access Control Interface Unit

The following installation procedures are limited to the installation of the Access Control Interface Unit
and the wiring to the various readers, the door strike (or Keylok), and the RS-485 bus. Manufacturer's
installation instructions for the various card/key readers, door strikes, etc. come with those devices.
Always follow these instructions when installing or working on these items.
The installation procedure entails installing the ACIUs and their on-board batteries and making
connections to the RS-485 bus to allow the batteries to charge. During this charging time, you can
install the card/key readers, electric strikes, Keyloks, etc. Once the batteries have fully charged, power
down the control unit and connect the readers, strikes, etc. to the ACIU. Then use the construction
card/keys to check that each electric strike or Keylok functions properly, and make mechanical
adjustments where necessary.
The Summary of Access Control Card/Key Readers Table, shown later in this section, provides
important information concerning the various card/key readers, including user operation, required
reader DIP switch settings, and instructions for jumper settings for E11 on the ACIU.
Application Guidelines
Use the following guidelines when planning an installation:
• All access control applications require a separate ACIU for each door.
• All readers, except for the Marlok Keyreader and Keylok, can be used on both sides of a door, and
share the same ACIU.
• Reserve the first 255 user ID codes for people who must use an operating panel.
• When using an access-controlled perimeter front door, always make sure that there is another
perimeter door having a mechanical lock for gaining access. In this way, if there is a problem with
the door release mechanism or the ACIU, someone with the key can enter the other door and then
open the front door to let people in.
• Where general access to an unprotected lobby is required, and there is no concern for scheduling, a
card/key reader can be used with an ACIU that does not have any BA groups assigned to it. This
will allow access to the lobby for all persons with valid card/key codes, while requiring all others
(visitors, etc.) to be buzzed in.
If access to the lobby is to be limited to certain working hours, assign the lobby reader to a BA
group that does not have any BA points. Then assign a schedule to that BA group. All persons
having limited access must be programmed with a close only privilege. All persons requiring
round-the-clock access must be programmed with either open or irregular open privilege.
• Install a card/key reader near an operating panel to facilitate the enrolling of new cards/keys.
Use the following guidelines when installing the ACIU:
• Do not use a mag stripe card on a Wiegand reader. It may corrupt the code on the mag stripe card.
• Each ACIU must receive a minimum of 12.5V from the RS-485 bus. Otherwise, the on-board
battery will not charge and there will not be any power for releasing the door strike. If necessary,
add a power supply to ensure that this voltage will be available.
• Maximum current for the electric door strike = 550mA.
• Make certain that the length of cable between the ACIU and its associated reader and door strike
does not exceed 150 feet.
• The ACIU must not be subjected to temperatures below 32°F (0°C) or above l20°F (49°C).
• Include each ACIU in the System Layout Diagram of the FOCUS 200 PLUS System, indicating the
BA group(s) that will be accessed via the ACIU.
• Each ACIU draws 60mA (including battery charge). Similarly, each card/key reader (or Keylok)
draws a current that is specified in the Equipment section. These current draws affect the overall
system power requirements; therefore, they must be incorporated into the power calculations in
the Power Requirements section.
When you are calculating power requirements, make sure that each ACIU will receive a minimum
of 8.5 volts (the same as the gateways and operating panels). This is based on 10.5 volts being
supplied by the control unit battery with all sensors in alarm, and is calculated based on voltage
drops on the RS-485 bus. The 8.5 volts cannot be measured; however, when the power transformer
is plugged in, the ACIU should be receiving 12.5 volts from the RS-485 bus in order to recharge the
on-board battery. This voltage can be measured.
11-4
Note: The current for operating the door strike is furnished by the battery in the ACIU or by an
external power supply, and does not enter into these calculations.
• Where an operating panel is being used with an ACIU for access control, it must be assigned
communication Group # 0 on the RS-485 bus. All other operating panels that are not being used for
access control must be assigned to communication Group # 1. The purpose is to prevent access
control operating panels from being locked out if someone else is using a non-access control panel
for a period of time, and visa versa.
RS-485 Buses
Each ACIU connects to a port in the control unit via a cable known as an RS-485 bus. The control unit
can accommodate two independent RS-485 buses of 4000 feet each permitting an end-to-end reach of up
to 8000 feet if using both buses. The maximum bus distance can be extended to 16,000 feet by using a
472430 RS-485 Repeater at the end of each bus. Current loading and voltage drop considerations may
limit the maximum allowable wire lengths on each RS-485 bus to less than 4000 feet. See the Power
Requirements section for additional information.
RS-485 Bus Cable Types

Two types of bus cable are used. Each is a 4-conductor multi-gauge cable, differing only in the type of
insulation.
• 494465 (B6445) Cable - used as general purpose.
• 494467 (B6467) Cable - used specifically in air-handling plenums.

operation of the FOCUS 200 PLUS System. Keep the following guidelines in mind when running the
cable:
• Bus cable(s) should be routed to take advantage of the shortest possible length of cable to minimize
voltage drop.
Junction boxes can also be used to sectionalize the bus to aid troubleshooting.
common connector).
Mounting the Access Control Interface Unit

To mount the ACIU, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Locate the ACIU close to the door that it will be used with. Choose a spot inside the
protected area, where it will not be susceptible to tampering or to damage due to the
moving of office furniture, machinery, etc.
2 Mount the 472352 Housing Unit (standard white PID box).
3 Set the Jumpers E2 through E9 for the appropriate address on the RS-485 bus (all ACIUs
use communication Group number 4).
4 Set Jumpers E1, E10, and E11 as required.
5 Install the battery on the ACIU circuit board and fasten it with tie wraps. Mark the
battery with the date of installation.
6 If you are using a 248116 Tamper Kit, install it on the ACIU circuit board at this time.
7 Install the ACIU circuit hoard in the housing unit.
8 Mark the housing with the number that will be transmitted to the CCC for an ACIU
trouble, tamper, or restore condition. This number is related to the communication unit
number of the ACIU. Also, be sure to record this number on the installation layout
diagram so that the ACIU can be readily located, if necessary.
11-5
Wiring the Access Control Interface Unit
To wire the ACIU, perform the following steps:
Step Action
3 Cut the trunk cable and remove enough sheathing and insulation from each wire to allow
fastening under the pressure plate of a terminal strip screw.
5 Connect the RS-485 cable to TB1 of the ACIU. Identify terminal wires so that the proper
wires can be connected to each terminal (see Figure 11-1).
6 Connect the battery leads to the connector on the circuit board.

Terminal Terminal
#19 AWG Blue RS-485 17 21
8 Power up the control unit to allow the ACIU battery to charge.
Using Readers, Keyloks, and Operating Panels

The cards and keys that are employed for ADT applications are listed in the Summary of Access
Card/Key Readers Table, shown later in this section. They all come pre-coded and ready to use as soon
as the code has been enrolled into the database of the control unit. The control unit stores the entire
code number, (site code plus individual person's code), so there is no need for the use of special site
codes for the cards or keys. Existing customer cards for a given type of reader may be utilized for
FOCUS 200 PLUS system.
The FOCUS operating panel can control access not only through card/keyreaders, but also through
keypad entry of a valid 6-digit code.
Card Readers
The card readers:
• Are installed near the frame of the door.
• Read a coded card to determine whether a person will be permitted access.
• Are used with a separate electric door strike or other electrically controlled door- releasing device.
• Are categorized by the type of card that they read. Three basic types of cards are:
1. Magnetic stripe (mag stripe)
2. Wiegand
3. Proximity (prox)
Card readers are therefore generally known as mag stripe, Wiegand, or prox readers.
11-6
• Are also categorized by the way the card must be presented for reading:
1. Card Swipe − The card is "swiped" across a slot in the reader.
2. Insert − The card is inserted fully into a narrow slot, and is read as it is withdrawn
3. Proximity − The card is passed in close proximity to the reader, which uses energy to
determine the code on the card.
• May come with a keypad for added security, so that a PIN number can be entered in addition to the
card code. For these applications, the ACIU can accommodate any PIN number of 1-8 digits along
with the associated card code.
• May feature an LED display to inform the user of the card-reading and access-control process.
Typically, a red-green LED lighting arrangement is used. Some readers use a bi-color LED and
others use two LED's. On most readers, the red LED is normally lit to indicate that the reader is
receiving power. When a card/key is being read, the red LED blinks off and, if access is granted, it
turns green.
Key Readers
The key readers:
• Read the code embedded in the shaft of a metal key.
• Utilize a reader that has been integrated into a lock cylinder.
• Are installed near the door frame.
• Are used with a separate electric door strike or other electrically controlled door-releasing device.
Keyloks
The keyloks:
• Are installed in the handle of a key-operated doorknob or other door-locking mechanism.
• Cylinder, which replaces the key cylinder of the lock, has both a key reader and a built-in electrical
releasing mechanism.
When a key with valid code is inserted, the ACIU provides the releasing voltage allowing the key to be
turned to unlock the door. When the key is turned, it operates a cam that can be linked to various types
of unlatching mechanisms.
Note: Because the Keylok is installed on the door rather than near the frame, wiring must be run from
the Keylok, through the door, to a flexible cord. The flexible cord carries the wires from the edge of the
door onto the door frame, so that a connection can be made to the ACIU.
11-7
Summary of Access Control Card/Key Readers
Access Model Card/Key Application User Operation Card/Key Reader DIP ACIU
Control Type ∗∗ Programming Switch Strike
Device Settings Voltage
Settings
Sensor 3152540 Epic Three Wiegand Card Indoor/Outdoor Card swipe None—card comes None required 12-volt strike
Engineering LED pre-programmed
(E11 = IN on
Wiegand Card with site code and
ACIU)
Reader user code.
Motorola Slimline Proximity Proximity Indoor/Outdoor Card introduced within 4” of None—card comes None required 12-volt strike
Indala Card Reader 4” Card reader pre-programmed
(E11 = IN on
Proximity Card Range with site code and
or ACIU)
Reader user code.
WallSwitch
Proximity Key Key Tag introduced within
Proximity Card
Tag 2.5” of reader
Reader 4” Range
Dorado Pass- 3110-6440/6441 Magnetic Indoor Only with Any of the following: None—ADT- ABA card, 34 12-volt strike
Through Card Pass-Through Card stripe card Keypad ordered card comes bits Wiegand:
• Keypad PIN code only (1-8 (E11 = IN on
Reader ∗ Reader w/Keypad (high- pre-programmed Reader DIP
digits, then enter # key). ACIU)
coercivity with site code and switch
3110-7801 Pass-
Through Ruggedized
polyester) Indoor/Outdoor • Card swipe only. user code. settings.
with Keypad (Possibility of using
Card Reader • Card and keypad (enter credit cards and
A B C D
w/Keypad PIN of 1-8 digits, then driver’s license that on on on off
swipe card). is coded).
Dorado Pass- 3110-7401 Pass- Same as above Indoor/Outdoor Card swipe Same as above Same as above 12-volt strike
Through Card Through Ruggedized
(E11 = IN on
Reader ∗ Card Reader
ACIU)
w/Keypad
Dorado 3110-5849/5841 Same as above Indoor/Outdoor Any of the following: Same as above, but Same as above 12-volt strike
Insertion Card Insert Card Reader with Keypad cannot accept credit
• Keypad PIN code only (1-8 (E11 = IN on
Reader ∗ w/Keypad cards or driver’s
digits, then enter # key). ACIU)
license.
• Card insertion only
(extraction read).
• Card and keypad (insert
card, enter PIN of 1-8
digits, then remove card).
Marlok Keylok 072-101049/101051 Coded Key Indoor/Outdoor Coded key is inserted into None—key comes None required 5-volt solenoid
(cylinder w/key Keylok Mortise Marlok keyreader cylinder. If pre-coded. in Keylok
reader and key is OK, ACIU provides
072-101050 Rim (E11 = OUT on
integral voltage for integral solenoid,
Cylinder Keylok ACIU)
solenoid) permitting key to turn and
060-100997 Key In release mechanically-linked
Knob (D Knob) latch. (Keylok requires
running wires through door
and installation of a flexible
door cord between door and
its frame.)
Marlok 072-038110 Gang- Coded Key Indoor Only Coded key is inserted into None—key comes None required 12-volt strike
Keyreader Mount Keyreader Marlok keyreader cylinder. If pre-coded.
(E11 = IN on
key is OK, ACIU provides
072-038111 Mullion- ACIU and
voltage for operating a door
Mount Keyreader insert 330-ohm
strike.
dropping in
072-038112 Panel-
series with
Mount Keyreader
TB3-2)
Northern KP-11-8 BIT Numerical Indoor/Outdoor Keypad PIN code only (1-8 N.A. N.A. 12-volt strike
Computers Codes digits, then enter # key).
(E11 = IN on
Wiegand
ACIU)
Output
Weatherized
Keypad
FOCUS Indoor Only Enter 6-digit user ID code. N.A. N.A. 12-volt strike
Operating
(E11 = IN on
Panel
ACIU)
∗ Dorado and other mag stripe readers and cards may experience wear, necessitating periodic reader maintenance and eventual card replacement.
Consult vendor literature for details.
∗∗ Refer to vendor literature for environmental and other limitations.
11-8
Installing and Wiring the Electric Door Strike and Card/Key Reader (or Keylok)
Wiring Connections Between ACIU and Readers/Strike
Reader and Strike Wire Connections (1)
ACIU Terminal Marlok Marlok Sensor Dorado (5) Motorola
Keylok (2) Keyreader Engineering Indala
(2) (Epic)
TB2-1 (-) (4) Brown Brown Black Black Black
TB2-2 (+) Green Green Red Red Red
TB2-3 (data “0”) Orange Orange Green Green Green
TB2-4 (data “1”) Black Black White White White
TB2-5 (LED “A”) Violet Brown Brown
TB2-6 (LED “B”) Brown
NOT USED Blue Yellow Blue
Orange Orange
Yellow
TB3-1 Strike (-) Red (2a) Red (2b) (3) Strike (-) (3) Strike (-) (3) Strike (-) (3)
Strike (-)
TB3-2 Strike (+) Yellow (2a) 330-ohm Strike (+) (3) Strike (+) (3) Strike (+) (3)
Yellow (2b) (3)
Strike (+)
(1) To extend reach of card/key readers for connection to ACIU, use manufacturer’s extension cable or use 494461 Cable as noted
below.
(2) For Marlok applications:
a. For a Marlok KEYLOK (comes with 5V internal solenoid), connect red and yellow keylok wires to TB3-1 and TB3-2,
respectively, and remove Jumper E11 in order to supply 5V to solenoid.
b. For Marlok KEYREADER (works with the 12V stand-alone strike):
1. Connect (+) and (-) terminals of strike to TB3-2 and TB3-1, respectively.
2. Insert a 330-ohm +/- 5%, 1-watt resistor in series with the yellow wire from Keyreader to TB3-2.
3. Connect red wire from Keyreader directly to TB3-1.
4. Insert Jumper E11 to supply 12V.
(3) Strike requires 12VDC (E11 = IN). If not using strike, connect a 3K resistor across TB3-1 and TB3-2.
(4) Connect TB2-1 to CWG so that wire from reader will be returned to CWG.
(5) Cut resistor R8 on the ACIU circuit board, if you are using Dorado 7401 or 7901 card readers. See Figure 11-4.
Using 494461 (6466-10) Cable for Extension

1 BLK 6—BRN
2 RED 7—RED/BLK = Violet
3 BLU 8—BLU/BLK = Green
4 ORG 9—YEL/BLK = White
5 YEL 10—ORG/BLK
To install the electric door strike and card/key reader or Keylok, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Install the electric door strike and the card/key reader or Keylok in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
2 Run the wiring in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, making sure that all
wiring to the ACIU does not exceed 150' (see Figures 11-2 and 11-3).
Where vendor extension cables are not available for the connections, use 494461 (6466-10)
Cable for the extension.
3 Set the DIP switch settings for the card reader, as required.
4 If not using a strike or a Keylok, install a standard 3K EOL resistor across TB3-1 and
TB3-2 on the ACIU to simulate the strike load for the strike supervisory circuit.
11-9
ACIU TB1
RS-485 BUS TB3

TB2
494470 CABLE
(2-WIRE, #18 AWG)
494461 CABLE (6466-10)
(10-WIRE, #22 AWG)
100 FEET MAX.
1
CARD READER
KEY READER
ELECTRIC STRIKE
Figure 11-2: Typical Installation Using Card Reader or Keyreader
ACIU TB1
RS-485 BUS
TB3
TB2
MARLOK 011-037502
EXTENSION (15 FEET)
(SEE NOTE)
788-16 FLEXIBLE
ARMORED DOOR
MARLOK 1 CORD (16")
KEYLOCK
PULL
NOTE: MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE CABLE DISTANCE BETWEEN KEYLOCK AND ACIU IS 150 FEET
Figure 11-3: Typical Installation Using a Keylok
11-10
TERMINAL STRIP TB1 JUMPER E1
FOR RS-485 BUS (REMOVE JUMPER TO
CONNECTIONS DISCONNECT RS-485
RS485
DS1 DS2
TXD RXD
BATTERY AREA
E2 12V, O.8AH
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9 TB1 D11 U1 U2
(BLK) 1
D1
GND TB2
C4
(RED) 2 R7 1
C3
+ 12V D4
E11 BATTERY R8 C6 2+
(YEL) 3 D5
E10 + COM D3 C7 3 "0"
(BLU) 4 D10 C5 4 "1" D6
1 D2
COM + 5 "A"
TB3 2+ D7
6 "B"
E1 D8
CUT R8
Figure 11-4: Modifying ACIU for Operation with Dorado 7401 or 7901 Card Reader
Using the Operating Panel for Access Control

Access can be controlled not only by card/key readers, but also by the FOCUS operating panel. The
person requesting access must enter a valid 6-digit code to gain entry. Either of three methods can be
used:
• Using an ACIU to control power to a 12-volt door strike.
The control unit commands the ACIU to have its on-board battery provide the 12V potential for
releasing the door strike when a valid code is entered at the operating panel. No connection is
required between the operating panel and the ACIU. The only ACIU connections that are needed
are to the RS-485 bus and to the door strike. The operating panel is linked to the ACIU through
programming.
• Sharing an ACIU with a card/key reader.
An operating panel is linked to the same ACIU as a card/key reader, so that either the card/key
reader or the operating panel can be used for access control. In this arrangement, a person who
forgot his card can use the operating panel to gain access. Note that the operating panel can only
be installed indoors.
• Using a BA Access output point to control the power to the strike.
The control unit commands the BA Access output point to turn on when a valid code is entered at
the operating panel. When turned on, the BA Access output point closes the circuit to a separate
power source, thereby applying power to the door strike.
Installing the Operating Panel for Use With Access Control

If an operating panel is being used for access control, it must be assigned to communication Group 0.
Install the operating panel in the usual manner.
Where an operating panel is being used for access control with an ACIU, its communication Unit number on
the RS-485 bus must coincide with the communication Unit number of the ACIU. An operating panel being
used for access control (Communication Group 0) becomes locked out during the period that any other
operating panel at communication Group 0 becomes activated, and vice versa.
11-11
Installing the RPX-264 Pushbutton
The RPX-264 Pushbutton may be used for manual buzz-in and egress (exit) applications (MAP/EXP
point types.
Where the RPX-264 Pushbutton is being used for manual buzz-in:
• Install it at the location specified by the customer.
• The associated SIM (Sensor Interface Module) connects to the trunk of any SIM (or PID) gateway
in the building. See Figure 11-5 for the wiring connections.
• Program the point as Manual Access Pushbutton Point.
Where an RPX-264 Pushbutton is being used for an egress (exit):
• Install it inside of the protected area close to the exit door along with its SIM (Sensor Interface
Module).
• The LED on the pushbutton serves to annunciate the status of the associated BA group(s).
Therefore, it must be visible from outside the door. If this is not possible, a separate series-
connected LED must be installed just outside of the exit door. See Figure 11-5 for the connections.
• Program the point as Exit Pushbutton Point.
For an explanation of these input point types, see Point Types Associated with Access Control later in
this section.
BLUE
X
YELLOW X
RED SIM QUAD TRUNK
X
BLACK
X
RED/WHT RED + 12V

X RED
BLK/WHT X BLK
BLU 472366 LED
YEL SIM
ORA
RED
BLK NORMALLY
OPEN ALARM CONTROL
33K
5% MOMENTARY CORP. RPX-264
1/4W PUSHBUTTON SWITCH AND LED
SWITCH ON MOUNTING PLATE
BLU/WHT
WHT
BLUE
X
YELLOW X
RED PID QUAD TRUNK
X
BLACK
X
471997 RED + 12V

BLK RED
KEY SWITCH MODULE LED
BLU
YEL
RED NORMALLY
BLK OPEN ALARM CONTROL
MOMENTARY CORP. RPX-264
PUSHBUTTON SWITCH AND LED
SWITCH ON MOUNTING PLATE
4 1 6 1
J1 J2
Figure 11-5: Wiring Connections for a Manual Access Pushbutton or Exit Pushbutton
11-12
Access Control Options

The following table describes the options available for access control operation:
Option Function
Unlock Time This is the number of seconds (1-255) that an access-controlled door is to
become unlocked (strike activated) when a valid code is read by a card/key
reader or entered at an operating panel.
Log Event When this option is selected, all successful attempts at access are logged. The
control unit will always log an unsuccessful attempt at entry, an opening, a
closing, or an irregular access. This includes the detection of a code that:
• Is not in the control unit data base.
• Has been enrolled in the data base, but has not been authorized to access
the BA group(s) associated with that ACIU.
• Involves an irregular opening by someone who is not privileged to do so.
All logged access data can be viewed at an operating panel or printed out on a
printer, and includes the time and date, reader number, and the name of the
person.
Keypad BA This option allows for the automatic turn-off of selected BA groups when a
Group Control valid code is entered at a specified operating panel. The automatic turn-off
function eliminates the need to step through the various operating panel
screens for doing the turn-off. The user must have the privilege of turning off
the selected BA groups.
XMIT Denied This option is selectable for each ACIU. It enables transmission of a signal to
the CCC any time that a person attempts to gain access but is denied entry.
Reasons for denial include:
• Person does not have authority to enter the area(s) involved.
• Person is attempting access at time of day outside of scheduled open
period.
• BA group is on and person does not have authority to enter unless the BA
group is off.
The signal transmitted to the CCC is DK, and includes the time and date, the
person's PC number, and the communication unit number of the ACIU. This
information is also stored in the history log, but the name of the person is
substituted for the PC number.
The customer can determine the area(s) to which access has been denied by
using an operating panel to see the number and name of the BA group(s)
associated with the ACIU.
XMIT Invalid This option is selectable for each ACIU. It is used to alert the CCC when
someone attempts gain access with a card/key that has not been registered in
the system. The signal transmitted is DD, and includes the time, date, and
communication number of the ACIU. This information is also stored in the
history log.
CDR SCH This option is employed to keep a strike activated (door unlatched) for a
period of time that is equal to the scheduled open period of any single
specified BA group. The BA group that is specified may be different than the
BA group(s) associated with the ACIU. In order for the strike to become
activated, the time of day must be within the scheduled open period for the
BA group that is specified, and the BA group(s) associated with the ACIU
must be off. If any of the ACIU-associated BA group(s) are turned on, the
strike will deactivate to lock the door, and normal access control will resume.
If you are using a 120VAC strike, then you must connect an appropriate 12-
volt relay to Terminals TB3-1 and TB3-2 of the ACIU, and use the relay
contacts to close the 120-volt circuit to the strike. In this case, the relay must
be capable of being energized continuously and its contact rating must be
sufficient for handling the power that is involved.
11-13
The strike being used for the CDR SCH option must be capable of continuous activation; otherwise it may
burn out. Also, the strike must be powered from a separate power supply in place of the ACIU battery.
Therefore:
• The battery must be removed from the ACIU.
• The red (12V) bus wire must be disconnected from TB1-2 of the ACIU.
• The 12 VDC power from the power supply must be connected to terminals TB 1-1 and TB1-2 (12V) of
the ACIU.
• Jumper E10 must be inserted on the ACIU board because the battery is not being used.
Where a Marlok Keylok is involved, DO NOT use the CDR SCH option because the Keylok will burn out if
its solenoid is continuously powered. Instead, the Keylok must be opened with the key and must not be
locked until the open period is terminated, typically by the last person leaving for the day.
Point Types Associated with Access Control

Entry
Number
59 (ACD) Access This output point can be used to trigger a camera or activate an
Denied annunciation device in the event that someone uses a card/key
having a code that either:
• Does not have Irregular Open, Open, or Close access to all BA
groups associated with that ACIU.
• Does not have the Irregular Open or Open option for any of the
associated BA groups that may be On.
• Has a Close option and the person attempts to enter outside of
the scheduled open period even though the associated protection
is Off.
When the point is triggered, the output stays on for 10 seconds and
then goes off.
60 (MAP) Manual This point type is employed when a receptionist (or security guard)
Access uses a RPX-264 Pushbutton to buzz someone through an access-
Pushbutton controlled door. The buzz-in duration is determined by the unlock
time that was programmed for the door strike.
You can install the pushbutton in a remote location or alongside the
desk of the receptionist (or security guard) so they can view the door
being controlled. Where the buzz-in will be done from a remote
location, a telephone or intercom can be used for conversation with
the person who wants to enter.
Pressing the pushbutton causes a buzz signal to be sent to the control
unit, which signals the ACIU to activate the door strike.
Multiple MAP points, in different areas, can each be used for the
buzz-in capability so that people in different parts of a building can
buzz someone through a common door.
11-14
Entry
Number
64 (EXP) Exit This point type uses a RPX-264 Pushbutton, installed inside of the
Pushbutton access-controlled area, to establish a 1-minute exiting-time window
for the last person leaving. This allows the person time to open the
door, exit, and use a coded key at a Keylok to lock the door, thereby
automatically tuning on the BA groups.
The pushbutton is ordinarily connected to a SIM. However, for
retrofit purposes, the pushbutton can also be connected to a 471999
Switch Interface Module.
When someone with a Janitor privilege uses the pushbutton for
exiting, then closes the door and uses the coded key to lock the
Keylok, the shunt is removed from all Janitor points that were alarm
shunted. Also, a Janitor Off Premises signal is sent to the CCC.
The LED option serves to annunciate the exit delay. See the tables
below for the status indications for a person with and without Janitor
privilege during entry and exit.
Person Without Janitor Privilege

User Action BA Groups LED Status Result
Status
Off Off Indicates BA groups are Off.
Person leaving presses Normal Begins flashing (1-sec 1-minute window starts.
pushbutton. On/1-sec Off).
Not Ready Off 1-minute window does not start.
Person exits, closes the Normal On Steady. Indicates BA group(s) are On and door can
door, and uses the coded now be locked.
key/card.
Not Ready Off BA group(s) will not turn On. (Where
Keylok is involved, person will not be able
to turn key to lock the door.)
Person exits, closes the Normal Goes Off at the end of Indicates BA groups are Off.
door, but forgets to use 1-minute time window.
the coded key/card.
Person With Janitor Privilege

Status
On On Indicates BA groups are On.
Entry
Janitor uses the coded Normal Slow flashing (1-sec Indicates janitor points in all BA groups
key/card and unlocks the On/2-sec Off). have become alarm shunted.
door
Exit
Janitor exits and presses Normal Changes from slow to 1-minute window starts.
the pushbutton. fast flashing (1-sec
On/1-sec Off).
Not Ready Remains slow flashing. Indicates BA groups are not normal.
Janitor exits and presses Normal Changes to On steady. Indicates alarm shunt has been removed
the pushbutton, closes from each janitor point in system and BA
the door, uses the coded groups are On. Door can now be locked.
key/card (or Janitor
Keyswitch).
Janitor closes the door, Normal At end of 1-minute Indicates BA groups are On, but Janitor
but forgets to use the window, slowly flashes. points in each group are still alarm
coded key/card (or shunted.
Janitor Keyswitch.
11-15
Entering Point Data Via the Operating Panel
See the Types of Input and Output Points section for information about for point data options. See the
Programming section for instructions on entering the point data via the operating panel.
Assignment of Person Data

There can be up to 999 persons assigned to the system. The system and the CCC uniquely identify each
person by a user number. The user number serves as the basis for assigning the operating panel code,
the card/key code, the person's name and privileges, as well as the BA groups that the person will be
capable of entering or controlling. The following table explains these options:
Option Function
Operating Panel An operating panel code is formed by adding four digits to the user number to
Code make up a 6-digit code. This 6-digit code is used at an operating panel for
controlling the system. Where an operating panel is used for access control,
the operating panel code also serves the same function as a coded card or
coded key.
An operating panel code can be established only for user numbers 1 through
255. Users 256 through 999 can be assigned only to the access control
function, and will not be able to use an operating panel to turn any of the BA
groups On or Off, or to perform any other function associated with the
operating panel. Persons with an operating panel code can use any operating
panel, and can also be assigned a card/key for access control areas.
Card/Key Code When a card/key is assigned to someone, its code is entered into the control
unit database for the appropriate user number. This can be done at any
operating panel when a person's privileges and other data are assigned. The
card/key code is entered automatically when the card or key is read by
swiping or inserting it at any card/key reader in the system. The card/key code
that is stored in the control unit database is an 8-digit Hex code that has been
read from the card or key.
Holder (person's Up to 16 characters can be used for assigning a name to the person's user
name) number.
BA Group Level For security reasons, it is often necessary to confine a person's access to the
areas the person normally conducts business. Each of the protected areas
must be identified by assigning it to a BA group. A person can be assigned
access to any combination of BA groups. There are four access levels for
controlling a person's access to the BA groups. The four levels are explained
below, based on an irregular opening privilege of NO. See the Table of Access
Capabilities for further details.
A. "-" Access denied. Person cannot enter area of BA group under any
circumstances.
B. "C" Close only. Access granted, but only if the associated BA group(s) are
Off. (Person will be able to turn protection On.)
C. "O" Open:
• Inside of scheduled open time - Access granted and associated BA
group(s) turned off automatically (Automatic turn-off can be
disabled for the associated BA group(s).)
• Outside of scheduled opening time - Access is denied and associated
BA groups remain On. (Person will also be able to turn protection
On.)
D. "I" Irregular open. Differs from the "O" level in that it includes the
capability for gaining access outside of scheduled opening time.
Access Level The access level is determined by assigning individual privileges to a given
(Privileges) user number from a choice of nine privileges. See the Table of Privileges.
11-16
Option Function
Cancel Date A date can be assigned for temporary users of the system, after which their
card/key or operating panel code will become invalid.
Note: If an RF button is linked to a user code, when the user code cancel date
expires the link is severed. Entering a new cancel date does not re-establish
the link to the RF button.
BA Group This serves to identify the number of each BA group within the access-
Control controlled area, and it is used in conjunction with the BA Group Level
(described above) that is assigned to each person who will have a coded
card/key. In this way, the control unit can determine whether a person's
card/key can be used to gain access to the BA group(s) associated with a given
card/key reader:
• If the associated BA groups are Off, any persons having a "C," "O," or "I"
level of access to these groups will be allowed to enter. All other persons
("-" level) will be locked out.
• If the associated BA groups are On, only persons with an "I" or "O" level
of access to these groups will be allowed to enter; persons with a "C" or "-"
level will be locked out.
Table of Access Capability

Access Capability Time Condition of Access Action CCC Signal Log and Print Programming Required
BA Group(s)
Person can open and Inside or On Open and Access Opening Opening BA Group Level = I
access any time. Outside plus
Off Access No Signal Access (1)
Schedule Access Level 0 = Y (3)
Same as above, but an Inside On Open and Access Opening Opening BA Group Level = I
irregular event is Schedule Off Access No Signal Access (1) plus
flagged for access Access Level 0 = N (3)
outside of schedule Outside On Open and Access Irregular Opening Irregular plus
(PVF). Schedule (PVF) Opening PVF = Y
Off Access No Signal Irregular Access
Person can open and Inside On Open and Access Opening Open and Access BA Group Level = O
access, but only within Schedule Off Access No Signal Access (1) plus
schedule. Access Level 0 = N (3)
Outside On No Access No Signal No Access
Schedule (2)
Off No Access No Signal No Access
Person cannot open, but Inside On No Access No Signal No Access BA Group Level = C
can access within Schedule plus
Off Access No Signal Access (1)
schedule. Access Level 0 = N (3)
Outside On No Access No Signal No Access
Schedule (2)
Off No Access No Signal No Access
Person cannot gain Inside or On No Access No Signal No Access BA Group Level = —
access at any time. Outside Off No Access No Signal No Access
Schedule
1. Nothing will be logged or printed if the Log Option = N. Selectable at each reader.
2. Access can be granted by establishing a temporary schedule.
3. An access Level of "0" allows users to open and access all BA groups outside of the scheduled opening time without initiating an irregular opening
(normal opening signal to CCC) or irregular access (no signal to CCC).
Table of Privileges
The following table explains the 9 privilege levels available for each user. Privilege levels 1 through 5
apply to users with an operating panel code only.
Level Privilege
0 Ability to open and access all BA groups outside of the scheduled opening time without
initiating an irregular opening (open signal to CCC) or irregular access (no signal to CCC).
1 Ability to bypass and unbypass BA points, and ability to bypass VVS sensors.
2 Ability to change temporary schedules and change closing times, and ability to change real
time by up to 5 minutes per day.
3 Ability to change permanent schedules, make unlimited changes in real time, and to
conduct FA sensor test.
11-17
Level Privilege
4 Ability to change person/point/BA group descriptions, and privilege level. Ability to change
ID code accessibility to BA group.
5 Ability to bypass fire, holdup, or supervisory points, and to conduct FA sensor test.
6 Service − ADT on-premises signal is transmitted to CCC when the ID code is entered and
will lock out all other ID codes. This privilege must be assigned to all Service ID codes, and
is not to be made available to the customer.
7 Operating panel code and/or card/key code is permitted to be changed by person having a
code with Level 4 privilege.
8 Janitor − Use of valid card/key will cause the alarm shunting of any Janitor BA points in
the associated BA group(s).
Note: Basic privilege assigned to each code allows user to turn BA protection On and Off for assigned
BA group(s), and to perform tests.
Assigning Access and Privileges for Users

Perform the following steps to enter the card/key access data for a user via the operating panel. See the
ID Codes section for the procedure on entering access capabilities of users using ID Codes.
Enter the Service Code at an operating panel.
<? Enter choice: Action Menu #1 is displayed.

< Lesson Turn on > Select More three times to display the last action menu.
< See alarms Reset >
< Quit More >

< Sys info ID codes > Select ID codes.
< Name pnt/gps Load >
< Previous First >
< PERSON #1 Person Data Entry Screen is displayed.

USER 001 Delete > Pressing the [#] key at this screen will bring you to the Enrolling
< Previous Change > Key or Card Screen. Also pressing Continue at the last access
screen "ID code may (not) be changed" for BA Group 8 will bring
< Quit Next >
you to that screen.
< Insert or swipe The Enrolling Key or Card Screen is displayed.

key or card Insert the key or swipe the card in the reader. An 8-digit number
< 1A773963 will be displayed.
< Quit Continue > Select Continue to move to the next screen.
<? Code and card The Person’s Deletion Date Screen is displayed.
will be deleted Enter the digits for the month and day after which the person will
< on 08/21 be prevented from using the system.
< Quit Enter > Select Enter to register the date in the system.
<? Code and card After you press Enter, that button changes to None.
will be deleted Select None to delete the date and/or change it.
< on 08/21
< Quit None >
<? Code and card Select Quit to return to the Person Data Entry Screen.
will be deleted
< on 08/21
< Quit None >
11-18
Construction Mode
The system is capable of operating in a Construction mode in which building contractors can be given a
special coded card or key for gaining access before the system is fully operational. This mode is in effect
if the ACIU is not communicating with the control unit.
Checking Operation and Using Construction Key/Card

The Construction key or card has a unique code that has been embedded in a special location in the
memory of the ACIU. The ACIU will look for the construction code only if it loses communication with
the control unit.
Once the ACIU battery has been charged, the Construction key/card can be used to check the operation
of the electric door strike or other releasing mechanism, enabling adjustments to be made where
necessary.
Remember, to use the Construction key/card, the control unit must be powered down or the ACIU
communication wires must be disconnected from the RS-485 bus.
After making all required adjustments and powering up the system, you can enroll the Construction
key/card into the system and give it to construction people for use until the system is turned over. Then
the Construction key/card can be deleted.
Where a Keylok is involved, a small terminal is provided just above the LED to enable emergency
operation in the event that AC power is out or the control unit is down for an extended period. Applying
a + 12-volt potential to this terminal from a battery will power the ACIU and allow a Construction key
to be used to unlock the door.
Maintenance of the Access Control System

Dorado and other mag-stripe readers and cards may experience wear, necessitating periodic reader
maintenance and eventual card replacement. Consult the manufacturer's/vendor's literature at the end
of this supplement for details. Make sure all readers are tested periodically for proper operation.
Supervision of ACIU
The ACIU is supervised for three conditions:
• A low-battery condition − If the battery voltage falls below 12.0 volts, a low-battery supervisory
signal will be generated. The voltage is checked every time the door strike is powered.
• An open in the wiring between the electric strike or Keylok mechanism and the ACIU.
• A tamper condition − If the tamper is used and the cover is removed.
In either case, the operating panel will display a trouble message (shown below), that indicates the RS-
485 Communication Unit number of the ACIU.
<? TROUBLE DV 003

Card Reader
< OPEN
< Quit Prev >
In the event that a low battery or an open is detected, a DT (device trouble) signal will be sent to the
CCC. If a tamper is detected, a tamper signal will be sent. Both signals will include the number that
identifies the address of the associated ACIU.
11-19
Identifying the ACIU in the CCC Transmission
The table below shows the information sent to the CCC for the various trouble conditions for each unit
number:
Unit Number CCC Transmission
0 DA32, DT32, or DR32
1 DA32, DT33, or DR33
2 DA34, DT34, or DR34
3 DASS, DT35, or DRSS
4 DA36, DT36, or DR36
5 DA37, DT37, or DR37
6 DA38, DT38, or DR33
7 DA39, DT39, or DR39
DA = Tamper, DT = Trouble (battery or strike wiring), DR = Restore
Super-Degraded Mode
If the control unit fails or the ACIU loses communication with the control unit, the ACIU goes into the
Super-Degraded mode, operating on its battery power. In this mode, the reader will recognize only the
last 63 different card/key codes that were granted access. This allows these people to continue to gain
access in the interim until normal operation is restored.
Attempts at access during the Super-Degraded mode, whether they are successful or not, will not be
logged in the History Log.
Troubleshooting
The following table describes access control troubleshooting procedures:
Symptom Probable Cause Corrective Action
Red LED on reader or 1 Battery is not fully charged 1 Make sure that battery is fully charged and is properly
keylok does not go on. or is not properly connected connected to ACIU.
to ACIU.
2 Insufficient power to 2 Check for 5VDC between TB2-1 (-) and TB2-2 (+). If
reader. you are using a Marlok Keylok or Keyreader, key must
be fully inserted in keyway for this measurement.
A. If reading is too low, either RS-485 bus voltage to
ACIU is too low or ACIU is defective.
B. If reading is OK, problem is in reader or wiring to
reader.
3 Insufficient voltage to 3 Check for at least 12.5VDC across TB1-1 (-) and TB1-2
ACIU. (+).
A. If reading is too low, add a local power supply.
B. If reading is zero or if polarity is reversed, check
wiring to TB1.
4 Defective ACIU. 4 Disconnect all wires from TB2. If voltage between TB2-
1 (-) and TB2-2 (+) is not 5VDC, replace ACIU.
5 Wrong reader. 5 Replace reader with one that is rated to operate
between 4.75 and 5.25VDC.
6 Defective reader. 6 Disconnect all reader wires on TB2, except wires TB2-1
(-) and TB2-2 (+). If reader had connection to TB2-6,
momentarily connect this wire to TB2-1. If red LED
does not light, replace reader.
11-20

Red LED on Marlok 1 Dirt in reader keyway. 1 Clean using cleaning swab. Refer to vendor literature
Keylok or Keyreader stays for details.
bright red with key
2 Broken data line (“1” or 2 Check wiring connections and correct or make repairs,
removed.
“0”). as required.
3 Top surface of reader is 3 Check and insulate top surface of lock, if shorted.
shorted to metal portion of
lock.
4 Bad or damaged reader. 4 Replace Keylok or Keyreader.
Construction card 1 ACIU is communicating 1 Construction card only works when ACIU is NOT
(Wiegand mag stripe or with control unit. communicating with control unit. Either turn of control
proximity) does not work unit or disconnect yellow and blue RS-485 bus wires
(green LED does not light). from TB1-3 and TB1-4.
2 Incorrect wiring between 2 Check wiring to TB2-5 for opens, shorts, and grounds.
ACIU and reader. Insulate all unused wires.
3 Improper card orientation 3 When swiping, card must be properly seated in slot,
or card swiping. and swiped straight through in the direction of the
arrows without lifting or twisting. The ADT logo should
face you, and the edge marked “This edge up” should be
up.
4 Bad or defective 4 Card should not be cracked. A mag stripe card can be
construction card. damaged internally if it is subjected to a strong
magnetic field. Try a known good construction card.
5 Bad or damaged reader. 5 Disconnect wire from TB2-5 and momentarily connect
it to TB2-1. If green LED does not light, replace reader.
Marlok construction key 1 ACIU is communicating 1 Construction key works only when ACIU is NOT
does not cause green LED with control unit. communicating with control unit. Either turn off
to light. control unit or disconnect yellow and blue RS-485 bus
wires from TB1-3 and TB1-4.
2 Incorrect wiring between 2 Disconnect wire from TB2-5 and momentarily connect
ACIU and Keylok or it to TB2-1. If green LED does not light, replace reader.
Keyreader.
3 Improper key insertion. 3 Marlok keys are read from the key tip to shank, but
only on insertion. Key must be inserted in a continuous
“fluid” motion without stopping, hesitating, or
reversing direction. If key is not read, remove and
reinsert. (The key may be inserted upside down with no
difference in reading.)
4 Bad or defective 4 Key should not be cracked, bent, scratched, or dirty.
construction key. Try a known good construction key.
5 Dirt in reader is partially 5 Clean reader keyhole using Marlok cleaning swab.
blocking light path.
6 ACIU battery missing or 6 Install a fully charged battery. Make sure Jumper E11
low. is out.
7 Bad or defective ACIU. 7 With all wires disconnected from TB3, check for 12VDC
across TB3-2 (+) and TB3-1 (-) for 10 seconds after
inserting construction key. If voltage is incorrect,
replace ACIU.
8 Bad or defective Keylok or 8 Momentarily connect yellow wire to TB2-2 (5V). If LED
Keyreader. does not turn green, replace Keylok or Keyreader.
Marlok Construction key 1 Green LED is receiving too 1 Remove Jumper E11.
causes LED on Keylok to much current because
turn yellow. Jumper E11 on ACIU is
IN.
2 Green LED is receiving too 2 Install 330-ohm, +/- 5%, 1-watt resistor in series with
much current because 330- yellow wire to TB3-2.
ohm resistor is not
installed.
11-21

Marlok Construction key 1 Set screws on Keylok are 1 Using a 1/16” allen wrench, unscrew (in
causes green LED on preventing key from counterclockwise direction) the left and/or right (not
Keylok to light, but key turning. center) set screw(s) on top of the Keylok cylinder until
does not turn. lock core turns freely in the desired direction(s).
2 Keylok is defective. 2 Replace Keylok.
Construction card causes 1 ACIU battery missing or is 1 Install a fully charged battery. Make sure Jumper E11
green LED on reader to low. is out.
light, but strike does not
2 Incorrect wiring from 2 Check strike wiring to TB3-1 (-) and TB3-2 (+). Check
activate.
ACIU to strike. wiring for opens, shorts, and grounds.
3 Jumper E11 is OUT. 3 Insert Jumper E11.
4 Wrong strike. 4 Replace strike with one rated for 12VDC @ 550mA.
5 Excessive voltage drop on 5 Check strike wire guage and length. Strike wire should
strike wires. be 18 AWG minimum and length should not exceed
150'.
6 Bad strike. 6 Connect strike directly to 12VDC battery. If strike does
not operate, replace strike.
7 Bad ACIU. 7 Disconnect all wires from TB3-1 (-) and TB3-2 (+) of
ACIU. If 12VDC is not read across these terminals for
10 seconds after card is swiped, replace ACIU.
Red LED on reader does 1 Improper or defective card. 1 Card must be compatible with reader. Card should not
not “wink” off when user be cracked. Mag stripe cards should not be subjected to
card/key is strong magnetic fields. Try using a known good card.
swiped/inserted.
2 DIP switch in reader not 2 Refer to Summary of Access Control Card/Key Readers
set for operation with chart for proper DIP switch settings.
FOCUS control panel.
Yellow LED on ACIU does ACIU tamper is installed and Release tamper.
not flash. is normal.
Cardreader (ACIU) Comm 1 ACIU is addressed 1 Make sure ACIU is addressed for Communication
Fail. incorrectly. Group 4 and with a unique Unit Number (0-7).
2 RS-485 terminating 2 Remove Jumper E1 from all devices on the RS-485 bus
Jumper E1 is not being except the two end devices.
used properly.
3 Incorrect wiring from 3 Check wiring to TB1-3 (yellow wire) and TB1-4 (blue
ACIU to control unit. wire).
4 Bad ACIU 4 Connect ACIU directly to control unit. If Comm Fail
persists, replace ACIU.
Cardreader (ACIU) 1 Incorrect wiring from 1 Check wiring from TB3-1 (-) and TB3-2 (+) to strike
trouble. ACIU to strike. and correct, if necessary.
2 No strike installed. 2 ACIU supervises the strike. If you are using some door-
releasing device other than a strike, connect a standard
3K EOLR across TB3-1 and TB3-2.
3 Battery in ACIU is weak. 3 Check if battery is connected and check voltage. If
voltage is low, check that input voltage from RS-485 is
greater than 12.5VDC. If bus voltage is not OK, add a
power supply. If bus voltage is OK, let battery charge
for several minutes. If voltage does not increase, check
for 12VDC minimum at battery terminals on ACIU
with battery disconnected. If voltage is not OK, replace
ACIU.
11-22

Card/keys cannot be Not using proper screen at Make sure that the following screen is displayed when
enrolled at any reader. operating panel when swiping/inserting a card/key:
enrolling card/keys.
Insert or swipe
Key or card
< ------------------
< Quit Continue >
Successfully enrolled 1 Person does not have 1 Program person with access to ALL BA Groups
card/key does not activate access to all BA Groups associated with this reader.
green LED and strike or associated with this reader.
Keylok. Control unit
2 Time is outside of 2 Wait until time is inside of scheduled open period or
history and/or printer show
scheduled open period and reprogram person with irregular privilege.
“User XXX DENIED NA.”
person does not have
irregular privilege.
3 Time of day or date is 3 Correct time of day and/or date.
incorrectly set in control
unit.
4 “BA Off Disable” option has 4 Only person with an operating panel code (1-255) can
been selected for one of the turn off the BA Group. Change the “BA Off Disable “
BA Groups associated with option or assign an operating panel code to this person.
this reader.
5 BA Group associated with 5 Corrective actions are:
this reader is ON and
cannot be turned of
because:
a. Person has not been a. Re-program person with turn-off capability (“I” or
programmed with “O” level).
capability to turn off
the BA Group.
b. Schedule is locked. b. Wait until inside of schedule.
c. ATM interlock option c. Turn on other interlocked BA Group.
has been selected.
d. BA Group has 2-man d. BA Group must be turned off from operating panel.
rule.
Card code changes with 1 Card is not 100% 1 Use cards that are specified for the particular reader
each swipe when enrolling. compatible with reader. being used.
2 Incorrect reader 2 Use readers specified earlier in this section.
“I” level person does not 1 Control unit PVF is not 1 Program “PVF From Control” as (Y) Yes.
generate an Irregular selected.
Opening (PVF).
2 Time is inside of schedule. 2 Correct time, date, and/or schedule (Permanent or
temporary).
11-23
11-24
S E C T I O N 1 2
History Log
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ About the History Log ♦ Displaying and Printing the History Log
♦ Installing the Printer Interface Unit
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About the History Log

The history log:
• Is used to log each event that is detected by the FOCUS 200 PLUS system.
• Stores up to 1024 events, including the time and date of occurrence.
• Serves as a means of verifying events occurring in the system such as openings and closings,
alarms, troubles, etc.
• May be displayed at an operating panel or printed on a local printer.
You must install a printer interface unit if you want to use a local printer.
Types of History Log Entries

The types of events the FOCUS 200 PLUS system will enter into the history log include:
• Openings and closings of BA group(s), name and number of the group(s), and name of the person(s)
involved.
• Changes to any schedule along with the name of the person(s) involved.
• Alarms and troubles, name of the point and point number, and restoral of the point.
• Bypass and unbypass of points, name of the point and point number, and name of the person(s)
doing the bypass and unbypass.
• The name of the person commanding the printout of data.
• The results of BA sensor walk tests and other tests.
Installing the Printer Interface Unit

A 471715 (7187-119) Printer Interface Unit is required for interfacing a printer with the control unit.
Up to 8 units can be used, 1 (master) and 7 (slaves); however, only the master unit will be supervised.
It comes with fixed baud rates for operation on the RS-485 bus (9600 baud) and for operation with the
printer (1200 baud). If you are using one printer, no further conditioning is required.
The printer required for this system are either the ADEMCO 472524 printer, or part of the
471958(7187-058) Printer Kit. An 18' cable is supplied.
Supervision of the Printer Interface Units

Only the first printer (unit No. 0, master) is supervised. Additional printers are slave units and are not
supervised, so make sure they have sufficient paper to operate until they are either stopped by the
operator or stopped automatically upon stoppage of the first printer.
12-1
Physical Description of the Printer Interface Unit

The printer interface unit consists of a printed wiring board that is installed in a separately ordered
housing unit. The following are important items on the board (see Figure 12-1):
Part Purpose
Terminal Strip TB1 Used for making connections to the separately ordered 12VAC
transformer (443241).
Terminal Strip TB2 Used for connecting to the RS-485 bus.
Printer Header J2 Used for connecting the printer to the printer interface unit.
(RS232 Port)
RS232 Printer LEDs Indicates the unit’s communication status to the printer as follows:
• TXD LED - on steady when data is being transmitted to the printer.
• BUSY LED - on steady when the printer is busy.
Jumpers E2 through E9 Used for setting the communication address on the RS-485 bus.
Terminating jumper E1 Insert only if the printer interface unit is located at one end of the RS-485
bus.
RS-485 bus LEDs Indicates the unit’s communication status to the control unit as follows:
• TXD LED - flashing when the printer interface unit is transmitting.
• RXD LED - flashing when the printer interface unit is receiving.
RS-485 USER BUS LEDs RS-485 USER RS-232 PRINTER LEDs

TXD (YEL) RXD (RED) BUS LEDs BUSY (RED) TXD (YEL)
CONNECTIONS
(TB2)
TXD RXD BUSY TXD

RS485 RS232
TB2
E2 GND 1
E3
USER BUS E4 + 12V 2
ADDRESS E5 SHIELD SHIELD
JUMPERS E6 COM 3 E1
(SEE DETAIL A) E7
E8 COM + 4
E9
RS485 IN
TB1 (See Note 4) J2

1
12VAC INPUT +12VAC 2
2
(TB1)
1 3
4
RS232 OUT
PRINTER HEADER
RS232 (J2)
JUMPER E1
(REMOVE JUMPER TO DISCONNECT
NOTES:
USER BUS ADDRESS 1. RS-485 USER BUS LEDs:

JUMPERS (A) TXD (YEL) FLASHES WHEN PRINTER
E2 LSB INTERFACE IS TRANSMITTING.
UNIT NO. E3 (LEAST SIGNIFICANT BIT) (B) RXD (RED) FLASHES WHEN PRINTER
E4 INTERFACE IS RECEIVING.
E5 LSB
E6 (LEAST SIGNIFICANT BIT)
COMMUNICATION E7
GROUP NO. 3 2. RS232 PRINTER LEDS:
E8
E9 (A) RXD (RED) GOES ON WHEN PRINTER IS BUSY.
(B) TXD (YEL) GOES ON WHEN DATA BEING
SHOWN PROGRAMMED FOR TRANSMITTED TO PRINTER.
COMMUNICATION GROUP '2', UNIT '0'
(E6 REMOVED)
3. USER BUS JUMPERS SHOWN ADDRESSED FOR
ON EACH ADDITIONAL PRINTER COMMUNICATION GROUP '2', UNIT '0'.
INTERFACE BEING USED, REMOVE E2,
E3, E4 AND E6 (GROUP '2', UNIT '7') 4. A 248116 TAMPER KIT MAY BE ORDERED
SEPARATELY; CONSISTS OF TAMPER SWITCH
PLUS MOUNTING HARDWARE.
piubd-001-V1
Figure 12-1: Printer Interface Unit
12-2
Section 12 – History Log
Mounting and Wiring the Printer Interface Unit

The printer interface unit must be installed in a separately ordered PID box. It is powered locally by a
separately ordered plug-in transformer rather than by the RS-485 bus.
Step Action
1 Mount the printer interface unit in the separately ordered PID box.
2 Connect the printer to the interface unit using the 18’ cable supplied.
3 Connect the AC wires from the 12VAC transformer. You may plug the transformer into
the 120VAC outlet, but do not plug in the transformer for the printer at this time. Plug
that transformer in when the installation of the system is complete.
Addressing the Printer Interface Unit

The printer interface unit(s) use communication group number 02 on the RS-485 bus, and unit
numbers 0 (master printer) and 7 (slave printers). The printer interface unit comes pre-addressed for
communication group number 2 and unit number 0, so no adjustment to the addressing is required if
only one printer interface is being used.
If additional printer interfaces are being used, set jumpers E2 through E4 for unit number 7. See
Figure 12-1.
Displaying and Printing the History Log

The FOCUS 200 PLUS system can display the history log on the screen of an operating panel or
produce a hard-copy printout of events. The operating panel will display the last event that occurred,
and, by means of selector buttons, you can scroll through the history log.
The printer can be operated on-line or off-line. When the printer is operated on-line, events will be
printed out as they occur. When operated off-line, printouts are made on command from an operating
panel. A printout can be made of the most recent 60 events or the most recent 1000 events, and will
begin with the oldest event. The printout can be terminated at any time by selecting Stop Print.
To display or print the history log, proceed through the following prompts:
<? Enter choice: Enter the Service Code. Action Menu #1 is displayed.
< Lesson Turn on > Select More twice.
< Quit More >

< Bypass History > Select History to display the next screen.
< Status Time >
< Previous More >
<? See history: This is the See History Screen.

On this screen > Select On this screen to display the history on the operating
On Printer > panel’s screen.
< Quit Select On Printer to print the history.
Select Quit to move back to Action Menu #3.
09/28/98 11:06 AM If On this screen was selected, this screen is displayed.
PNT245 OUTPUT RST The first line shows the date and time of the event. The second
< Previous Pgdn > line shows a description of the event.
< Quit Next > Select Previous to display the previous event.
Select Next to display the next event.
Select Pgdn to display more detail of this event.
Select Quit to move back to the See History Screen.
12-3
Print history If the On Printer was selected, this screen is displayed.

Last 60 events > Select either 60 or 1000 events to print.
Last 1000 events > Select Stop Print to stop the printing.
< Quit Stop Print >
Select Quit to move back to the See History Screen.
Typical Printout of FOCUS 200 PLUS History Log

0042 JUL 12 93 12:21:47 PERSON #88 SER OFF DV7 GROUP 1 KEYPAD
0042 JUL 12 93 12:22:33 FIRE ALARM PT 2 POINT #2 FIRE CROSS
0042 JUL 12 93 12:22:48 HOLDUP ALM PT 3 POINT #3 HOLDUP CROSS
0042 JUL 12 93 12:22:53 CRIT ALARM PT254 POINT #254 SUPV CROSS
0042 JUL 12 93 12:23:50 FA SILENCE DV7 GROUP 1 KEYPAD
0042 JUL 12 93 12:25:39 PERSON #1 ACCESS DV7 GROUP 1 KEYPAD
0042 JUL 12 93 12:27:50 PERSON #1 ACCESS 2ND DV7 GROUP 1 KEYPAD
0042 JUL 12 93 12:27:50 PERSON #88 SERVICE ON DV7 GROUP 1 KEYPAD
0042 JUL 12 93 12:46:01 AC RESTORE
0042 JUL 12 93 12:46:15 PERSON #1 HHHHHHHHHH DV7 GROUP 1 KEYPAD
0042 JUL 12 93 12:47:21 FA SILENCE DV0 GROUP 0 KEYPAD
0042 JUL 12 93 12:56:04 PERSON #88 SERVICE ON DV0 GROUP 0 KEYPAD
0042 JUL 12 93 13:53:28 PERSON #88 RESET DV0 GROUP 0 KEYPAD
0042 JUL 12 93 13:53:48 HOLDUP RST PT 3 POINT #3 HOLDUP
0042 JUL 12 93 13:53:49 CRITL RST PT254 POINT #254 SUPV
0042 JUL 12 93 13:54:08 FIRE RST PT 2 POINT #2 FIRE
0042 JUL 12 93 13:55:03 BURGLAR TB PT 1 POINT #1 BA FIXD OPEN
0042 JUL 12 93 13:55:44 FIRE TBL PT255 POINT #255 FIRE OPEN
0042 JUL 12 93 13:56:15 BURGLAR RS PT 1 POINT #1 BA FIXD
0042 JUL 12 93 13:56:17 FIRE RST PT255 POINT #255 FIRE
0042 JUL 12 93 13:56:19 CRIT ALARM PT254 POINT #254 SUPV CROSS
0042 JUL 12 93 13:56:46 FIRE ALARM PT 2 POINT #2 FIRE CROSS
0042 JUL 12 93 13:57:04 FIRE ALARM PT255 POINT #255 FIRE CROSS
0042 JUL 12 93 13:57:22 FIRE RST PT 2 POINT #2 FIRE
0042 JUL 12 93 13:57:23 FIRE RST PT255 POINT #255 FIRE
0042 JUL 12 93 13:57:23 CRITL RST PT254 POINT #254 SUPV
0042 JUL 12 93 13:59:10 EXPAND TBL DV1 POINT EXPANDER COMM FAIL
0042 JUL 12 93 13:59:10 BURGLAR TB PT 1 POINT #1 BA FIXD COMM FAIL
0042 JUL 12 93 13:59:10 FIRE TBL PT 2 POINT #2 FIRE COMM FAIL
0042 JUL 12 93 13:59:10 HOLDUP TBL PT 3 POINT #3 HOLDUP COMM FAIL
12-4
History Log Alpha and Event Codes

Description Alpha
System Event
System Reset RESET
Reset Memory RESET MEM
AC Fail AC FAIL
AC Restore AC RESTORE
AC Fail 4-Hour AC FAIL 4H
AC Fail 4-Hour Restore AC 4H RST
Telco Line Trouble (built-in dialer) TEL T MCUT
Telco Line Restore (built-in dialer) TEL R MCUT
Telco Line Trouble (backup dialer) TEL T BCUT
Telco Line Restore (backup dialer) TEL R BCUT
Telco Line Trouble (AC module) TEL T ACOM
Telco Line Restore (AC module) TEL R ACOM
Low Battery System LOW BAT
Low Battery System Restore BATTERY RS
Battery Charger Fail CHARG FAIL
Battery Charger Restore CHARG RST
Change Date CH DATE
AC Module Communication Failure AC MOD AL
AC Module Communication Failure Restore AC MOD RST
Expansion Module
Interactive Keypad Tamper KEYPAD ALM
Interactive Keypad Trouble − supervision KEYPAD TBL
Interactive Keypad Trouble Restore KEYPAD RST
Cardreader Alarm READER ALM
Cardreader Trouble READER TBL
Cardreader Trouble Restore READER RST
Point Gateway Tamper Alarm GATEWAY AL
Point Gateway Trouble − supervision GATEWAY TB
Point Gateway Trouble Restore GATEWAY RS
Printer Tamper Alarm PRINTER AL
Printer Trouble – Supervision PRINT TBL
Printer Trouble Restore PRINT RST
RF Low Battery RF LOW BAT
Burglary
BA Burglary Alarm BURGLAR AL
BA Burglary Point Bypass BA BYPASS
BA Burglary Alarm Restore BURGLAR RS
BA Burglary Point Trouble BURGLAR TB
BA Burglary Point Unbypass BA UNBYP
Open/Close
BA Auto Close AUTO CLOSE
BA Auto Close with Bypass – within Group AUTO CL BY
BA Trouble Closing (closed with burglary alarm during exit) TBL CLOSE
BA Bypass Closing – within group BYP CLOSE
BA Closing CLOSING
12-5
Description Alpha
Open/Close (continued)
BA Auto Open AUTO OPEN
BA Irregular Opening IRR OPEN
BA Opening OPENING
BA No Close – scheduled close time expired NO CLOSE
BA Exit Fail – exit error (user) EXIT FAIL
BA Bypass Closing by User BYPASS USR
BA STAY (Local) Arming CLOSE STAY
Fire
Fire Alarm FIRE ALARM
Fire Trouble FIRE TBL
Fire Alarm Restore FIRE RST
Fire Alarm Silence FA SILENCE
Fire Point Bypass FA BYPASS
Fire Alarm Point Unbypass FA UNBYP
Supervisory Alarm CRIT ALARM
Supervisory Trouble CRIT TBL
Supervisory Restore CRITL RST
Supervisory Point Bypass CRIT BYP
Supervisory Point Unbypass CRIT UNBYP
Waterflow Alarm WF ALARM
Waterflow Bypass WF BYPASS
Waterflow Restore WF RST
Waterflow Trouble WF TBL
Waterflow Unbypass WF UNBYP
Panic
Holdup Alarm HOLDUP ALM
Holdup Point Trouble – sensor trouble HOLDUP TBL
Holdup Restore HOLDUP RST
Holdup Point Bypass HU BYPASS
Holdup Point Unbypass HU UNBYP
Hostage Alarm – Duress HHHHHHHHHH
Medical Alarm MED ALARM
Medical Alarm Restore MED RST
Medical Trouble MED TBL
Medical Bypass UT BYPASS
Medical Unbypass U UNBYPASS
Downloading
DLL Aborted DLL ABORT
Start DLL START DLL
DLL Interrupted DLL INTER
End DLL Altered END DLL AL
DLL Comm Fail DLL COMM F
End DLL Not Altered END DLL NA
Scheduling
BA Change Close Time (extend closing) CH CLOSE T
BA Change Open Time CH OPEN TM
12-6
Description Alpha
Scheduling (continued)
Change Close Time CH CLOSE T
Change Auto-On Level CH AUTO ON
Change Latest Close – sent only if closing schedule is altered CH LT CLOS
Change Open Time – schedule change CH OPEN TM
Change Time – time/date reset CH TIME
Other
Supervised Bell Alarm (remote bell) BELL ALARM
Supervised Bell Trouble (remote bell) BELL TBL
Supervised Bell Trouble Restore (remote bell) BELL RST
Remote Power Supply Alarm POWER ALM
Remote Power Supply Trouble POWER TBL
Remote Power Supply Trouble Restore POWER RST
Keyswitch Alarm KEY ALARM
Keyswitch Trouble KEY TBL
Keyswitch Restore KEY RST
Janitor Keyswitch Alarm JANITOR AL
Janitor Keyswitch Trouble JAN TBL
Janitor Keyswitch Alarm Restore JAN RST
Janitor On Premises – user on premises JANITOR ON
Janitor Off Premises – user on premises restore JAN OFF
ADT On-Premises SERVICE ON
ADT Off-Premises SER OFF
Tamper Alarm TAMPER ALM
Tamper Restore TAMPER RST
Tamper Bypass TMP BYPASS
Tamper Unbypass TMP UNBYP
VVS Bypass VVS BYPASS
VVS Unbypass (after 12 AM auto-off) VVS UNBYP
Bypass by User BYP USER
Keypad Active ACCESS
Audible Walk-Test AUDIBLE TS
Change Code CH CODE
Change Early Open CH ER OPEN
Change Holiday CH HOLIDAY
Carbon Monoxide Alarm CO ALARM
Carbon Monoxide Bypass CO BYPASS
Carbon Monoxide Restore CO RST
Carbon Monoxide Trouble CO TBL
Carbon Monoxide Unbypass CO UNBYP
Long Range Radio
DC Fault LR DC FLT
DC Fault Restore LR DC RST
Tamper Fault LR TMP FLT
Tamper Fault Restore LR TMP RST
Low Battery LR BAT FLT
Low Battery Restore LR BAT RST
VSR Fault (antenna) LR VSR FLT
12-7
Description Alpha
Long Range Radio (continued)
VSR Fault Restore (antenna) LR VSR RST
ECP Fault LR ECP FLT
ECP Fault Restore LR ECP RST
Communication Fault LR COM FLT
Communication Fault Restore LR COM RST
System Test
Walk-Test WALK TEST
Bell Test BELL TEST
Holdup Test Alarm HU TEST AL
Holdup Test Restore HU TEST RS
Start Fire Alarm Test SRT FA TST
End Fire Alarm Test END FA TST
Start Burglary Alarm Test SRT BA TST
End Burglary Alarm Test END BA TST
Start Supervisory Test SRT SV TST
End Supervisory Test END SV TST
Start Holdup Alarm Test SRT HU TEST
End Holdup Alarm Test END HU TST
Long Print LONG PRINT
Short Print SHT PRINT
Supervisory Test Print – manual trigger test report CRIT TST A
Supervisory Test Restore CRIT TST R
Fire Alarm Test Print FIRE TST A
Fire Alarm Test Print Restore FIRE TST R
Burglary Alarm Test Print BA TST AL
Burglary Alarm Test Print Restore BA TST RST
Holdup Suspicion Print SUSPICION
Keypad No Access NO ACCESS
Untyped Bypass UT BYPASS
Untyped Unbypass U UNBYPASS
Burglary Alarm Diagnostics BA WAN
Fire Alarm Diagnostics FA WAN
Output Trouble OUTPUT TBL
Output Trouble Restore OUTPUT RST
Point Trouble POINT TBL
Point Alarm – general alarm POINT ALM
Point Alarm Restore – general alarm restore POINT RST
Untyped Diagnostics UA WAN
Burglary Alarm Weak Battery B WEAK BAT
Fire Alarm Weak Battery F WEAK BAT
Holdup Alarm Weak Battery H WEAK BAT
Supervisory Alarm Weak Battery S WEAK BAT
Untyped Alarm Weak Battery U WEAK BAT
Weak Battery Restore BAT RESTOR
Access
ND
2-Man 2 Person ACCESS 2ND
Keypad Lockout KEYPD LOCK
12-8
Description Alpha
Access (continued)
Cardreader Irregular Access IRR ACCESS
Manual Pushbutton Access – remote arm/disarm opening MAP ACCESS
Access Denied Code Known – access denied DENIED NA
Access Denied Code Unknown – access denied INVALID NA
Dialer Test
Dialer Test Report DLR TEST
Dialer Test Report with System Trouble Present TBL TEST
12-9
12-10
S E C T I O N 1 3
Power Requirements
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ About Powering the FOCUS 200 PLUS ♦ Installing a Power Supply
♦ Providing Adequate Voltage for Each Gateway, ♦ Connecting AC Power and Earth Ground to the
SIM Loop, and Operating Panel Control Unit
♦ Determining Maximum Length of Gateway ♦ Installing the Standby Battery
Trunk Cable ♦ Powering Up the Control Unit
♦ Determining the Control Unit Power Supply
Load
♦ Determining the Size of the Standby Battery
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About Powering the FOCUS 200 PLUS

The FOCUS 200 PLUS security system uses either an 18VAC, 50VA plug-in transformer (443216 or
N8167) or an 18VAC, 72VA wired-in transformer (472404), which is hardwired into the premises’
electrical system. The 50VA transformer may be used in any installation except commercial fire
installations. The 72VA transformer may be used in all installations, including commercial fire
installations. For installations in Canada use the 18VAC, 75VA plug-in transformer (FTA7518ULC).
AC Transformer Alarm Current and Battery Size Limits

The total alarm current available and the largest size battery that can be supported depends on which
transformer is used, as specified in the table below.
Transformer Total Alarm Current (*) Largest Battery (**)
50VA 1.5A 24AH
72VA 2.3A 34.4AH
75VA 2.3A 34.4AH
* Total current drawn from aux power 2, aux power 3, aux relay terminal 10 (when wet), bell 1 and bell 2
** Largest battery that can be recharged within 48 hours
While wiring connections are being made or removed, make sure the POWER switch (on control unit circuit
board) is in the OFF position.
We recommend wiring all points and expansion modules according to each section's instructions before
powering up the system for programming and testing.
Providing Adequate Voltage for Each Gateway, SIM Loop, and Operating Panel
To determine that each gateway and each operating panel will have adequate voltage, the voltage drops
along the RS-485 bus must be calculated. Use the procedure below along with the tables and forms that
follow to determine whether an additional power supply is needed.
13-1
Calculating the Current Loads for Each Gateway

Table 1: PID Gateway Standby and Alarm Loads
Gateway Unit No. __________ (Maximum 62 Points)
A B AxB C AxC
Total Alarm Total Alarm

Standby
Device Quantity Standby Current Current
Current (mA)
Current (mA) (mA) (mA)
Non-Powered
10 24
Sensors/COPIDS
System-Powered Sensors with PID
Motion Detector
45 54
Smoke Detectors
50 100
VVS
35 35
VAS
15 34
Teleproach Interface
15 39
Other Gateway Trunk Devices

Switch Interface
45 55
Daytime Annunciator
100 100
Quad-Powered
20 20
Sounder PID Module
BA Supervised Bell
50 40
Control ∗
Sounder
45 45
Total Standby and Alarm Loads

Standby Alarm
on Gateway Trunk
PID Gateway 1 50 50 50 50
Total Gateway Standby and

Standby Alarm
Alarm Current
∗ Bell powered locally
13-2
Section 13 – Power Requirements
Table 2: SIM Gateway Standby and Alarm Loads

Gateway Unit No. __________ (Maximum 72 Points)
A B AxB C AxC
Standby
Current (mA)
SIM Door Contact
1 1
SIM PIR Motion

1 5
SIM Dual Motion

5 5
SIM Smoke Detector

3 5
SIM Holdup Button

1 1
SIM FA Pull Station

1 1
SIM ∗
1 1
Total Loads of SIM Sensors

Standby Alarm
(Total alarm load must not exceed 128mA)
Horn/Strobe
∗∗ ∗∗
Sounder 472307
10 10
Powered Sensors
Relay

Standby Alarm
on Gateway Trunk
SIM Gateway 1 50 50 50 50
Total Gateway Standby and

Standby Alarm
Alarm Current
∗ SIM connected to external contact, powered sensor, self-powered sensor, output SIM, or horn/strobe
∗∗ 190mA for bell mode with strobe, 260mA for horn/strobe
13-3
Table 3: RF Gateway & RF Receiver Standby and Alarm Loads

Gateway Unit No. 7 (Max. 72 Points)
A B AxB C AxC
Standby
Current (mA)
RF Gateway 1 50 50 50 50
RF Receiver
60 60
(maximum 2)
LRR Gateway 1 50 50 50 50
Total Gateway & Receiver

Standby Alarm
Standby and Alarm Current
Table 4: SIM Loop Standby and Alarm Loads (Maximum 64 Points)

A B AxB C AxC
Standby
Current (mA)
SIM Door Contact 1 1
SIM PIR Motion 1 5
SIM Dual Motion 5 5
SIM Smoke Detector 3 5
SIM Holdup Button 1 1
SIM FA Pull Station 1 1
SIM ∗ 1 1
4208U
4209U
4208SNF
Total Loads of SIM Sensors

Standby Alarm
(Total alarm load must not exceed 128mA)
Horn/Strobe∗∗
Sounder PA400W
10 10
Powered Sensors
Relay

Standby Alarm
on SIM Loop
∗ SIM connected to external contact, powered sensor, self-powered sensor, output SIM, or horn/strobe
∗∗ 190mA for bell mode with strobe, 260mA for horn/strobe
13-4
To calculate the standby and alarm loads for each gateway, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Make a copy of each table for each gateway on the system.
2 Fill in Tables 1, 2, 3, and 4 to calculate the standby and alarm current loads for each
gateway. Use Table 1 for PID Gateways, Table 2 for SIM Gateways, Table 3 for RF
Gateways and Table 4 for the SIM Loop. These totals will be used to determine the
gateway trunk cable lengths and the size of the system’s backup battery.
Drawing Load Diagrams for the RS-485 Buses

Step Action
1 Using the Load Diagrams shown in Figures 13-1 and 13-2 as an example, make a similar
diagram showing each device (gateway, operating panel, etc.) along each RS-485 bus.
2 Estimate the cable distance in feet from the control unit to the first device on the bus, and
also the distance between devices. Then, mark the distances on the Load Diagram.
3 Enter the total alarm load that each operating panel and gateway present to the RS-485
bus. Enter this data in the appropriate boxes that represent the operating panels (use
65mA for each) and gateways (total from the previous tables).
4 Record, on the Load Diagram, the current that will flow through each section of the RS-485
bus using the following information:
a. The current through the first section of the bus is the sum of all loads presented by the
operating panels and gateways.
b. The current through the second section is the sum of all loads (obtained in item (a)
above) minus the load for the first gateway, operating panel, or other device on the bus.
c. The current through the third section will be the sum of all loads minus the loads for
the first and second devices on the bus.
13-5
13-6

CONTROL V= (8.5V min.) V= (8.5V min.)
V= (8.5V min.)
UNIT GATEWAY 2
l1 = GATEWAY 1 l2 = OPERATING
mA mA l3 = mA
PANEL 1
10.2V
Figure 13-1: Load Diagram for RS-485 Bus
FT. FT. BUS LOAD = 65mA FT.

BUS LOAD = mA BUS LOAD = mA
GATEWAY TRUNK ALARM LOAD = mA GATEWAY TRUNK ALARM LOAD = mA

(TABLE 1, 2 OR 3) (TABLE 1, 2 OR 3)
NOTES:
1. TOTAL GATEWAY BUS LOAD = TABLE 1, 2 OR 3
2. l1 = GATEWAY 1 BUS LOAD + OPERATING PANEL 1 BUS LOAD + GATEWAY 2 BUS LOAD
l2 = OPERATING PANEL 1 BUS LOAD + GATEWAY 2 BUS LOAD
l3 = GATEWAY 2 BUS LOAD
POWER SUPPLY
COMMUNICATION ONLY 10.2V
CONTROL V= (8.5V min.) V= (8.5V min.)

Figure 13-2: Load Diagram for RS-485 Bus with Power Supply
V= (8.5V min.)
UNIT GATEWAY 2
l1 = GATEWAY 1 l2 = OPERATING
mA mA
PANEL 1
10.2V
FT. FT. BUS LOAD = 65mA
BUS LOAD = mA BUS LOAD = mA
GATEWAY TRUNK ALARM LOAD = mA GATEWAY TRUNK ALARM LOAD = mA

(TABLE 1, 2 OR 3) (TABLE 1, 2 OR 3)
V= (8.5V min.)
V= (8.5V min.)
GATEWAY 3
OPERATING l4 = 65mA l3 = mA
PANEL 2
BUS LOAD = 65mA FT. FT.

BUS LOAD = mA

NOTES:
1. TOTAL GATEWAY BUS LOAD = TABLE 1, 2 OR 3
2. l1 = GATEWAY 1 BUS LOAD + OPERATING PANEL 1 BUS LOAD
l2 = OPERATING PANEL 1 BUS LOAD
l3 = GATEWAY 3 BUS LOAD + OPERATING PANEL 2 BUS LOAD
GATEWAY TRUNK ALARM LOAD = mA
l4 = OPERATING PANEL 2 BUS LOAD (TABLE 1, 2 OR 3)
13-7
Determining the Voltage Drops along the RS-485 Buses

The input voltage to any gateway or operating panel must be at least 8.5VDC or 9.7VDC if a gateway
has horn/strobes. If the voltage is too low, either position the gateway or operating panel closer to the
control unit or add a supplementary power supply. To determine the voltage drops along the RS-485
buses, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Use the graph in Figure 13-3 to determine the input voltage available to each gateway and
operating panel. This graph shows distance in feet along the horizontal axis, and voltage
drop across the bus along the vertical axis.
Referring to the Load Diagram you prepared, find the cable length of the first section of the
RS-485 bus (distance in feet between the control unit and the electrically first device on the
RS-485 bus).
2 Locate this distance on the horizontal axis of Figure 13-3. Then, use a straight edge to
project a line straight upward until it hits the diagonal current line that is equal to, or
greater than, the total alarm current load obtained in Step 4 previously.
3 Use the straight edge to project a horizontal line to the left until it hits the vertical Voltage
Drop axis. Record the voltage that is indicated, rounding it off to the next higher number if
necessary. This is the voltage drop across the first section of the bus.
4 Calculate the input voltage to the first device on the RS-485 bus by subtracting the voltage
drop determined in the previous step from the supply voltage of 10.2 volts. For example, if
the voltage drop is 0.3 volts, then the input voltage to the first device is 9.9 volts (10.2 volts
minus 0.3 volts).
5 Repeat for each device on the bus. Use the input voltage to the previous device on the bus
as the supply voltage in determining each subsequent voltage drop.
6 If you are using additional bus runs, repeat all the above steps for each bus run.
1.0A .75A .50A .40A .30A .20A

1.8
1.7 .15A
1.6
1.5
1.4
Voltage Drop (volts)
1.3
1.2
1.1 .10A
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6 .05A
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400
Length of RS-485 Bus Section (feet)
Figure 13-3: Determining the Voltage Drop on the RS-485 Bus
13-8
Determining Maximum Length of Gateway Trunk Cable

After making sure that the input voltage to each device on the bus is sufficient, determine the
maximum length of each gateway trunk cable for a normal sensor load and also for a load that includes
horns/strobes, if used.
A Normal Sensor Load

A normal sensor load is one that does not include horn/strobes.
For a SIM Gateway
For a SIM gateway, there is no limitation to the maximum 1000-foot gateway trunk length as long as
the SIM gateway has at least 8.5 volts applied to it.
For a PID Gateway
To determine the maximum length of the trunk cable for a normal sensor load for PID gateway,
perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Get the PID gateway Total Alarm Load in mA from Table 1.
2 Locate this value of current on the vertical axis of the curves shown in Figure 13-4.
3 Using a straight edge, go across to the right until you hit the curve that represents the
voltage applied to the gateway. Use the value of voltage obtained from the load diagram.
4 Using the straight edge, go straight downward to the horizontal axis. The distance that is
indicated is the maximum distance that can be used for the PID gateway trunk cable.
5 Repeat the steps for each gateway.
1000
900
800
Gateway Load Current (ma)
700
600
500
10.2V
400 8.6V 8.8V 9.0V 9.2V 9.4V 9.6V 9.8V 10V
300
200
100
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
Maximum Length of PID Gateway Trunk (feet)
Figure 13-4: Determining Maximum Length of Quad Trunk for PID Gateway (no
horn/strobes)
13-9
A Sensor Load for a SIM or PID Gateway that Includes Horn/Strobes

To determine the maximum length of the trunk cable for a sensor load that includes horn/strobes,
Step Action
1 Make sure that gateway will have at least 9.7 volts from the RS-485 bus.
2 Get the gateway trunk load in mA from Table 1 for a PID gateway, or Table 2 for a SIM
gateway.
3 Locate this value of current on the vertical axis of the curves shown in Figure 13-5.
4 Using a straight edge, project across to the right until you meet the curve that represents
the voltage being applied to the gateway. Use the value of voltage obtained from the load
diagram.
5 Using the straight edge again, project a line straight downward to the horizontal axis. The
length that is indicated is the maximum length that can be used for the trunk cable for
either a PID gateway or a SIM gateway.
6 Repeat the steps for each gateway.
1000
900
800
Horn/Strobe Load (ma)
700
600
10.2V
500
10.1V
400
10.0V
300
9.9V
200
9.8V
100
9.7V
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Maximum Length of Gateway Trunk (feet)
Figure 13-5: Determining the Maximum Length of Quad Trunk for SIM/PID Gateway with
Horn/Strobes
Determining the Control Unit Power Supply Load

Use the tables below to calculate the total current for the RS-485 Bus #1, RS-485 Bus #2, Aux Relay
(terminal 10 when wet), Bell 1, and Bell 2 outputs. In each worksheet, multiply each device's standby
and/or alarm current by the number of units used.
13-10
1. In table 5, enter devices used on the RS-485 Bus #1. Calculate standby and alarm currents, then
add to get RS-485 Bus #1 current subtotal.
Table 5: RS-485 BUS #1 CURRENT LOAD
Total Current
Device Model # Device Current X # of Units = Standby Alarm
RS-485 Bus #1 Subtotal
(terminals 19 & 20 - 1.0A max.)
2. In table 6, enter devices used on the RS-485 Bus #2. Calculate standby and alarm currents, then
add to get RS-485 Bus #2 current subtotal.
Table 6: RS-485 BUS #2 CURRENT LOAD
Total Current
RS-485 Bus #2 Subtotal
(terminals 23 & 24 - 1.0A max.)
13-11
3. In table 7, enter devices connected to Auxiliary Relay (if used for wet operation). Calculate standby
and alarm currents, then add to get Auxiliary Relay current subtotal.
Table 7: AUXILIARY RELAY CURRENT LOAD
Total Current
Auxiliary Relay Subtotal

(terminal 10)1.7 amp max
(If setup for wet operation)
4. In table 8, enter devices connected to Bell 1 output. Calculate alarm currents, then add to get Bell
1 output current subtotal.
Table 8: BELL 1 OUTPUT CURRENT LOAD
Total Current
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
Bell 1 Output Subtotal

(terminals 5 & 6) 1.7 amp max
13-12
5. In table 9, enter devices connected to Bell 2 output. Calculate alarm currents, then add to get Bell
2 output current subtotal.
Table 9: BELL 2 OUTPUT CURRENT LOAD
Total Current
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
Bell 2 Output Subtotal

(terminals 7 & 8) 1.7 amp max
6. In table 10, enter the total calculated subtotals of all listed outputs from Tables 5 through 9, then
add to get the combined current.
Table 10: TOTAL PERIPHERAL CURRENT LOAD
Total Peripheral Standby and Alarm Current Total Current
Standby Alarm
SIM Loop Subtotal (see Table 4)
RS-485 Bus #1 Subtotal (see Table 5)
RS-485 Bus #2 Subtotal (see Table 6)
Aux. Relay Terminal 10, if wet (see Table 7)
Bell 1 Output Subtotal (see Table 8)
Bell 2 Output Subtotal (see Table 9)
Add all subtotals

(Refer to step 7 for current limits)
7. Compare the values calculated above with the values from the table in AC Transformer Alarm
Current and Battery Size Limits and Table 11. If the 50VA transformer limits are exceeded, then
use a 72VA transformer. If the 72VA transformer limits are exceeded, then use a supplementary
power supply to carry some of the current load.
13-13
Total 11: STANDBY CURRENT LIMITS
Total Standby Current Total Standby Current

Standby Time/Alarm Time
50VA with 24AH Battery 72VA with 34.4AH Battery
Residential BA:
1.0A 1.0A
4 hours standby + 4 minutes alarm
Mercantile BA:
1.0A 1.0A
Residential FA:
605mA 1.0A
Local or Central Station Commercial FA:
Not Applicable 1.0A
Remote Station FA:
Not Applicable 218mA
Bank Safe and Vault BA:
Not Applicable 132mA
8. After deciding which devices will be carried by the supplementary power supply, if used, revise the
Tables 5 through 10 in steps 1-6 to reflect the total control unit peripheral standby and alarm
currents.
Determining the Size of the Standby Battery

The standby battery must be capable of powering the various sensors and sounding devices, as well as
the control unit and its internal accessories, (communicator module, relays, etc.), for predetermined
periods of time. Use the following worksheets to calculate the required size of the standby battery.
Battery Current Calculation Worksheet
The values shown in Table 12 are fixed. Use these values in Table 13 to calculate the total battery
currents.
Table 12: FOCUS 200 PLUS PCB CURRENT
CIRCUIT BOARD CURRENT Total Current
Standby Alarm
Includes 2-wire smoke detector loading on points 1 & 2 300mA 440mA
5mA 15mA
*472402A Backup Dialer Module
(inactive) (active)
*472402A actually draws 55mA when active. However, because FOCUS 200 PLUS PCB current
includes the built-in main dialer, and because the main dialer is inactive when 472402A is active,
472402A imposes only 15mA added current on the FOCUS 200 PLUS power supply.
Enter the calculated combined current, then add to calculate total battery current.
Table 13: BATTERY CURRENT
Total Battery Current Total Current
Standby Alarm
Combined peripheral totals (see Table 10)
Total PCB current (see Table 12)
Total battery current
(add peripheral totals and PCB totals)
13-14
Battery Capacity Calculation Worksheet

Using the total calculated from Table 13, calculate the battery capacity required for the installation.
Calculated
Capacity Formula
Value
Standby Capacity For 4-hour standby time:
Total standby current X 4 hours X 1.4 contingency factor.
For 24-, 60-, or 72-hour standby time:
Total standby current X (24 hours) X 1.1 contingency factor.
(60 hours)
(72 hours)
Alarm Capacity For 4-, 5-, or 15-minute alarm time
Total alarm current X 0.067 (4 minutes)
0.083 hours (5 minutes)
0.250 hours (15 minutes)
Total Capacity Add standby and alarm capacities
Battery Selection Table

Select one of the following standard-size batteries with a capacity greater than or equal to the capacity
calculated in the previous worksheet. These batteries fit inside the FOCUS 200 PLUS enclosure.
7AH Yuasa NP12-7
12AH YuasaNP12-12
14AH Yuasa NP7-12 (connect 2 in parallel)
17.2AH Yuasa NPG18-12
34.4AH Yuasa NPG18-12 (connect 2 in parallel)
Determining the AC Fail Setting

The AC Fail setting is the delay time the system waits before transmitting the AC Fail message to the
CCC. The setting is based on the total standby current load on the system and the size of the battery
connected to the system. The AC Fail setting is required for Commercial Fire applications.
To calculate the AC Fail setting, use the following formula:
The size of the battery connected to the system (Ampere Hours) divided by the total standby
current (in Amps from Table 13) X 0.65 contingency factor. Round the result to the nearest whole
number.
For example, if the size of the battery is 12AH and the total standby current is 0.615 Amps, (12 / 0.615)
X 0.65 = 12.68. Rounded off to the nearest whole number is 13 hours. Program the result in AC Loss
Xmit Delay via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader.
Installing a Power Supply

If you have determined that the control unit's power supply cannot handle the current draw or the
voltage drops on the RS-485 bus are too large, then add 472372 Power Supply Module. The 472372 can
be added to any section of the bus by connecting it directly to the bus or connecting it via a gateway.
The power supply and standby batteries are housed in a 472381 Power Unit Housing along with a
supervisory SIM or PID.
The power supply receives 16VAC from an input transformer. Leave the communication wires (yellow
and blue) and the power common ground wire (black) connected to the bus terminals of the gateway
and continue on to the next device on the cable run (if necessary).
13-15
To install the power supply, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Cut the + 12V (red) wire of the incoming RS-485 bus, and insulate the end of this wire so it
will not short to any other component in the system.
2 Connect the + 12V output of the power supply to Terminals 1 (common ground) and 2 (+
12V) of the gateway and continue to the next device on the RS-485 bus (if necessary).
Note: Use terminal 1 to connect the two incoming common ground wires (one from
incoming bus and one from power supply) and to connect an outgoing common ground wire.
3 Connect the supervisory contacts of the power supply to the monitoring terminals of a SIM
(or PID) to provide supervision of the + 12V power.
Note: The power supply will provide power to the remaining section of the quad trunk and
also float-charge its standby battery.
4 Assemble the power supply according to the instructions accompanying the power supply.
Connecting AC Power and Earth Ground to the Control Unit

• Make sure POWER switch (on control unit circuit board) is in the OFF position before connecting AC
power to terminals 1 and 2.
• Make sure the circuit breaker that controls the circuit providing power to the control unit is in the OFF
position.
• Any inadvertent shorting of the secondary leads of the 50VA transformer will cause a fusible link in the
secondary winding to open, and render the transformer useless.
The 120VAC circuit that the transformer is connected to should be dedicated to powering the control
unit, should provide power continuously for 24 hours, and should not be controlled by a wall switch.
Connecting the Transformer
To connect the transformer to the control unit, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Make sure the power switch on the control unit is in the OFF position.
2 Identify the circuit breaker or fuse controling the circuit furnishing power to the control
unit. Make sure it is in the OFF position. Use a 326670(2667) AC Power Switch Shielding
Kit to protect the circuit breaker from inadvertent operation. Where fuses are used, mark
the fuse label to indicate that it must not be removed except for replacement purposes.
3 If you are using the wired-in transformer, mount its enclosure to the wall near the
control unit, using the 4 mounting holes on the enclosure's rear surface.
4 Run 120VAC wire from the circuit breaker or fuse to the enclosure in conduit. Use wire
having insulation rated for at least 90°C operation. Use wire nuts to splice the 120VAC
wires to the transformer's white and black primary leads.
5 Run 16 AWG wire from the transformer's to the control unit. Use wire that has insulation
rated for at least 90°C operation and is suitable for non-power limited applications.
6 Route the wire through a knockout on the left-hand side of the control unit's enclosure. Tie-
wrap it to a tie-wrap loop near the knockout to separate it from other power-limited wiring.
7 Connect the wires to the transformer's blue secondary leads, using wire nuts. Connect the
other end of the wire run to the control unit's AC terminals 1 and 2.
8 If you are using the plug-in transformer, run 16 AWG wire from the transformer's
location to the control unit.
9 Connect the wire to the transformer and to the control unit's AC terminals 1 and 2.
13-16
Connecting the Control Unit to Earth Ground

To connect the system to earth ground, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 If you are using the wired- in transformer, connect the earth ground post inside the
transformer enclosure to a good earth ground (use grounding methods specified in the
National Electric Code).
2 Use a green nut (supplied) to secure the wire to the ground post. The earth ground wire
should be the only wire under this nut.
3 Run 16AWG wire from this post to the control unit’s earth ground terminal (3 or 4). Use a
second green nut (supplied) to secure this wire to the ground post. This method of
connection avoids ground loops that may occur when the 472404 Transformer and panel
are connected to different earth ground systems.
4 If you are using the plug-in transformer, run 16AWG wire from the control unit’s
earth ground terminal (3 or 4) to a good earth ground (use grounding methods specified in
the National Electric Code).
The control unit requires the earth ground connection in order for its lightning transient protection devices
and earth ground supervision to function properly.
Programming for Earth Ground Fault

For information about programming for earth ground fault, refer to Programming the Point Data in the
Programming section. Earth ground is point 245. If you desire to supervise the earth ground
connection, program point 245 with the following values:
Point Description Input Point Type Gateway # Hard ID
245 EARTH GND SPV 8 123
Installing the Standby Battery

The FOCUS 200 PLUS is shipped with a dual-battery harness that allows one or two batteries to be
connected to the control unit. The control unit cabinet can house up to 34.4AH batteries. The optional
471961 (7187-202) Battery Enclosure may be used to house the batteries, if desired. Be sure to mark all
batteries with the date of installation.
When connecting batteries in parallel, observe the following guidelines:

• Use batteries from the same manufacturer and with the same voltage and capacity rating.
• Use batteries with approximately the same age and state of charge.
• Use the cables provided and observe polarity.
• Replace all batteries at the same time, even if only one battery has become weak.
Installing the Batteries in the Control Unit Cabinet

If you are installing one or two batteries, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Make sure that the power is off.
2 Mark batteries with the date of installation.
3 Make connections as shown in the Summary of Connections diagram.
13-17
Installing the Batteries in the Battery Enclosure

If you are installing the batteries in the 471961 Battery Enclosure, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Make sure that the power is off.
2 Connect the knockouts between the control unit and the battery enclosure using the
furnished nipple.
3 Remove the 4A fuse from the in-line fuse holder in the battery enclosure.
4 Mark the batteries with the date of installation.
5 Install the batteries, connect to the battery enclosure, and make all wiring connections.
6 Replace the 4A fuse in the in-line holder.
Battery Supervision
The FOCUS 200 PLUS System provides three supervisory functions associated with the control unit
battery:
• Process alarms with low battery option.
• Integral battery cutoff relay.
• Supervision of the battery leads.
Process Alarms with Low Battery Option is a battery check made under load in each of three instances:
• Every 24 hours.
• When any BA group is turned off.
• Any time that an AC Fail condition occurs.
The check consists of reducing the battery float charging voltage to cause the battery to power the load
for 1 minute. If, during this time, the battery drops below approximately 12.0 volts:
• A low-battery signal is sent to the CCC and a low-battery message is shown at the operating
panels.
• Ordinarily, system operation ceases at this time and there is no further signaling to the CCC.
However, if this option is selected, it allows the control unit to continue processing and sending
signals until the battery voltage drops to the point where the battery cut-off relay operates (next
item), thereby extending normal operation for several hours, depending on the size of the battery.
The low battery condition is stored in control unit memory for subsequent printout along with the
time and date. When AC power is restored (battery voltage rises above approximately 12.3 volts), a
battery restore signal is transmitted to the CCC.
NOTE: Normally the system cannot be turned on if a Low Battery condition is present. There is an
option to enable turning on the system (arming) with a Low Battery condition present. This option
can only be programmed via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader. Also, be sure to enable the
system to process alarms with a low battery present, if desired, via the downloader.
• There is a built-in battery cut-off relay that serves to protect the battery against deep discharge. If
the voltage drops to approximately 9.8 volts, the relay disconnects the battery from its load to
prevent deep discharge of the battery. At this point, all processing and transmission of signals
cease.
• There is an automatic check for the connection of the battery leads, which is required by FM and
with the latest revision of NFPA 72. The check involves momentarily turning off the battery charge
voltage and measuring the voltage where the leads are connected to the circuit board. If the check
shows that the battery is missing for 45 seconds, the operating panel will display:
<? NOTE: System

has battery
trouble
Continue >
Also, a battery-lead-disconnect signal is transmitted to the CCC. A battery restore signal is transmitted
when the leads are reconnected.
13-18
Battery Charger Supervision

The system checks the battery charger every 200 seconds (Battery Charger Fail Test). If the system
detects a charger fault, a signal is sent the CCC and a trouble message is displayed at the operating
panels.
NOTES:
The system can be programmed to disable the Battery Charger Fail Test. This option can only be
programmed via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader.
The Battery Charger Fail Test must be enabled for FM installations.
Powering Up the Control Unit

After all the wiring procedures have been completed, and you are ready to power up the control unit,
Step Action
1 Turn the power switch on the control unit to the ON position.
2 Verify that the AC transformer is providing the correct voltage by measuring across
terminals 1 and 2 (17 - 19.5VAC when power line is 110 - 120VAC).
3 Verify that the battery float charging voltage is correct by measuring across the battery
terminals (13.5 - 13.8VDC with no battery or fully charged battery connected).
4 Verify that the operating panels are showing the correct display and can accept key
entries.
13-19
13-20
S E C T I O N 1 4
Input and Output Point Types

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ About the Input and Output Point Types ♦ Output Point Types
♦ Input Point Types
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About the Input and Output Point Types

A protection point can be assigned to either an input type or an output type (the eight built-in
hardwired points can only be assigned an input type). This assignment defines how the control unit will
process normal and off-normal conditions associated with a point. At the end of this section is a chart
that lists the input and output point types and their associated options.
Input Point Types

The table below assumes the use of a sensor with transfer contacts. If you are using a sensor with
normally-closed contacts, operation is essentially the same, except as explained later under the Input
Point Options heading. Moreover, a tamper condition or communication failure at a BA point is always
interpreted as a trouble during Day Set and as an alarm during Nite Set.
The built-in hardwire points (1-8) may only be programmed with an input point type.
The following table lists the program entry, explanation of the function of the input type points and the options
associated with each type. At the end of this list you will find an explanation of each of the options.
1 (FI) Fixed Assigned to points where alarms and troubles are to 24-Hour NC Self Test
Alarm Contact
(permanent) be monitored by the control unit at all times,
regardless of the Day/Nite-Set status of the system.
• During Day Set, a cross or open is processed as a
trouble condition.
• During Nite Set, any off-normal condition is
processed as an alarm.
The alarm or trouble condition is transmitted to the
CCC and causes local annunciation. Examples of
sensors employed are glassbreak detectors, foil, and
lacing (the latter two require a PID gateway).
2 (MI) Movable Assigned to points where alarms are processed only Janitor NC Self-Test
Contact
Instant during the Nite-Set period, such as door contacts and
infrared and photoelectric sensors.
• During Day Set, an open (if you are using transfer
contacts) is processed as a trouble condition and is
annunciated locally and transmitted to the CCC.
During Nite Set, a cross or open will result in an
alarm signal to the CCC.
14-1

3 (MD) Movable Assigned to points where sensors are installed in the Janitor NC Self-Test
Contact
Delayed entry/exit path to allow the customer time to enter or
exit the premises without creating an alarm.
A programmable entry/exit delay time is provided,
during which the control unit does not acknowledge
an alarm condition from a movable delayed sensor in
the entry/exit path.
The point does not produce an alarm if proper entry
and exit procedures are followed; only the operating
panel sounder does annunciate the delay.
UL Entry delay must not exceed 45 seconds for all UL certified installations.

4 (FL) Fixed Local This point assignment locally annunciates an alarm in  NC Self-Test
Contact
Day or Nite Set, but no CCC transmission of an alarm
condition is sent at any time. However, a trouble
condition initiates a trouble signal to the CCC during
Day Set, and an alarm transmission during Nite Set.
NOTE: With option 2 set, only alarm conditions are
produced (no troubles).
NOTE: Alarm messages are sent to the pager, if used.
5 (MID) Movable This point assignment causes local annunciation of an Janitor NC Self-Test
Contact
Instant alarm in Day Set (no CCC transmission).
Daytime During Nite Set, the instant daytime annunciation
Annunciation protection reacts the same as movable instant
protection. Example of application: local annunciation
of emergency exit door without initiation of a CCC
transmission during Day Set.
6 (VVS) Vault Points assigned to the vault vibration sensor category Janitor NC Self-Test
Contact
Vibration operate as BA movable instant protection points, but
Sensor follows the on/off status of BA1. When BA1 is off, the
VVS points in BA2 through BA8 are bypassed and
remain so until BA1 is closed.
If manually bypassed from an operating panel (bypass
option has been selected and Bypass, VVS has been
entered at operating panel), all VVS sensors in all BA
groups become bypassed. They remain in this
condition until:
1 The VVS bypass condition is manually restored to
normal at the operating panel.
2 Either the latest scheduled close time or midnight
is reached, whichever occurs sooner.
Turning the protection On or Off for a given BA group
will not remove the manual VVS bypass.
The purpose of this point designation is to avoid the
possibility of false alarms during the open period of a
bank due to vibration and noise created by nearby
construction, traffic conditions, etc.
14-2
Section 14 – Input and Output Point Types

6 (VVS) Vault The vault(s) involved are not completely unprotected
(continued) Vibration because the vault door contacts and other vault
Sensor protective devices are in-circuit as long as the
associated BA group is turned on.
Note: If this type of bypass control is unsatisfactory,
then points with vault vibration sensors should be
programmed as movable instant points, in which case
they follow the status of the assigned BA group rather
than the status of BA1.
7 (MIC) Movable This point type is the same as movable instant, except Janitor NC Self-Test
Contact
Instant that during Day Set an open causes a trouble
Chime condition (the sounder on the operating panel
annunciates continuously) and a short causes the
sounder on all operating panels to activate for 1
second. Bypassing the point disables the
annunciation. With option 2 set, an open or short
causes the chime.
A typical assignment is a premises’ front door that
annunciates each time the front door is opened.
8 (MDC) Movable This type is similar to the movable instant chime, but Janitor NC Self-Test
Contact
Delayed it is used for a point in the entrance/exit path.
Chime
9 (FA) Fire Alarm The point type is monitored for an alarm and trouble Smoke Self-Test
Detector
at all times. An alarm or trouble condition is Reset
annunciated locally and a signal is sent to the CCC.
Note: Where a Style D (Class-A) loop is required use
points 3 and 4, or the 471881(7187-011) Retrofit Fire
Alarm PID Module.
The system can be programmed for fire with verification. An initial short on the point causes an 8-second
smoke detector power reset. A subsequent short on the point within 30 seconds of the reset causes a fire
alarm. When this option is enabled ALL fire points in the system will perform the verification. This option
can only be enabled via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader.

10 (HUS) Holdup The point type functions the same as a basic holdup, Suspicion NC Latch
Contact
Special except that a trouble signal is generated instead of an
alarm if a holdup device is operated while all BA
groups, other than BA1, are in Nite Set. The status of
BA1 has no effect on this point type.
This type is used to inhibit an alarm caused by the
accidental operation of a holdup device by personnel,
such as a cleaning crew, during the closed period.
11 (HU) Holdup The point type is monitored for cross at all times, Suspicion NC Latch
Contact
permitting the use of devices with normally open
contacts. If the option for normally closed contacts is
selected, then break-only contacts may be used.
Operation of the holdup device results in a Holdup
Alarm, except upon the occurrence of an open when
the holdup suspicion option is selected.
12 (MED) Medical This point type is used for devices that trigger medical  NC Self-Test
Contact
emergency situations. The point is monitored on a 24-
hour basis for an alarm or trouble condition.
14-3

13 (SPV) Supervisory This point type is used for critical condition  NC Self-Test
Contact
monitoring (to supervise sprinkler system valve
switches, air temperature in a laboratory-controlled
environment, etc.). The point is monitored on a 24-
hour basis for an alarm or trouble condition.
28 (JAN) Janitor This point type is used for controlling the bypassing of  LED Buzzer
(Y/N) (Y/N)
Keyswitch those BA points that have been optionally selected as
janitor points, and requires the connection of a 471999
(7187-113) Janitor Keyswitch, via a Switch Interface
Module.
Operating the Janitor Keyswitch during the Nite Set
period causes the bypassing action, thereby
permitting cleaning personnel to move about and trip
movable protection devices without creating an alarm.
It also causes a Janitor On Premises signal to be sent
to the CCC. Restoring the keyswitch removes the
bypass and causes a Janitor Off Premises signal to be
sent to the CCC.
Note: This point must be assigned to the same BA
group having the entry/exit path so the Janitor
Keyswitch may be accessed. When the janitor turns
the key, in addition to the bypass action, it aborts the
entry delay for the assigned BA group. When the key
is removed, it starts the exit delay as well as removes
the shunting action.
29 (KEY) BA Keyswitch This point type is used for turning a BA group to Day  LED Buzzer
(Y/N) (Y/N)
Set or Nite Set rather than using an operating panel.
It requires the connection of a 471998(7187-112)
Remote Keyswitch via a Switch Interface Module SCN
471999. Operating the keyswitch causes an open or
close signal along with the number of the BA group to
be sent to the CCC.
30 (RPS) Remote This point type is used for monitoring a remote power   
Power Supply supply (e.g., 472381 Power Unit). A loss of AC power
to the power supply is annunciated locally at an
operating panel. If the loss of AC extends beyond 4
hours, it causes an AC Fail signal to be transmitted to
the CCC. However, a low-battery condition, operation
of a tamper, or a point comm fail causes a local trouble
annunciation and immediate transmission of a signal
to the CCC.
31 (END) BA End Delay This point type is intended primarily for European   
applications and requires the use of a switch to
terminate any exit delay time that remains when the
customer closes the exit door. A 471997 Switch
Interface Module and appropriate controlling switch
are used for this purpose.
Note: Program a maximum exit delay (255 seconds)
for the associated BA group to ensure the customer
adequate time for exiting the premises. Additionally,
select the Auto Bell Test option to provide an audible
indication for the persons exiting the premises that
the exit delay has expired.
14-4

32 (BLK) BA Blocklock This point type is intended for use in European   
applications and requires the use of a 471997 Switch
Interface Module. A special door lock (Blockschloss)
should be installed to prevent the locking of the exit
door if the applicable BA group is not ready to be
turned to Nite set. When the exit door is locked, the
BA group is automatically changed to Nite Set.
An open causes a trouble condition. When the loop is
normal, the applicable BA group is in Nite Set. The
Ready outputs of the Switch Interface Module are
wired to the internal solenoid of the lock, which allows
the door to be locked if the BA group is ready to be
turned to Nite Set. The customer keyswitch requires a
continuous closure for this application.
35 (ABS) Ambush Start This point type is used in conjunction with an Ambush  NC 
Contact
End point type (next item) to initiate an ambush
alarm. Failure to operate the Ambush End point
within 4 minutes after tripping the Ambush Start
point causes an ambush alarm.
An example of ambush point application is a bank
that does not use perimeter or interior protection
(except for the vault) because cleaning people come in
at unpredictable times. Someone enters the bank
early to perform pre-opening procedures, and wants
protection against being held hostage by hide-ins until
opening time for the vault. Upon arriving they trigger
the Ambush Start point, look around, and then trigger
the Ambush End point if everything is OK.
Typically, the contact for this point is installed on the
door used for entering the premises in the morning. If
there are detectors that can be tripped when the
customer checks for hide-ins, then the BA group with
these detectors must be turned to Day Set before the
entry delay expires to avoid creating an alarm. The
Ambush Start and End points are not assigned to a
BA group and are not associated with the permanent
or temporary schedules. The Ambush Start and End
points use an Ambush Schedule to determine the time
frame that this feature is active.
36 (ABE) Ambush End This point type is used in conjunction with an Ambush   
Start point type (see the explanation in previous item)
to prevent an ambush alarm. Failure to operate the
Ambush End point within 4 minutes after tripping the
Ambush Start point causes an ambush alarm.
Typically, a key-operated switch is employed for this
point, and is installed in the last room to be checked
after entering the premises.
49 (WF) Waterflow The point type is monitored for an alarm and trouble   
at all times. An alarm or trouble condition is
• An open is processed as a trouble condition.
• A short is processed as an alarm condition. If it
present longer than the Waterflow Retard Time.
NOTE: The Waterflow Retard Time range is 0 to 240
seconds and can only be programmed via the
ADEMCO Compass Downloader.
NOTE: Assign Waterflow points to BA group 1 only
14-5
UL The maximum Waterflow Retard Time is 90 seconds for UL installations.

60 (MAP) Manual This point type is associated with access control. It is Log NC SIM
employed when a receptionist (or security guard) uses Contact
Access
Pushbutton an RPX-264 Pushbutton to buzz someone through an
access-controlled door. The buzz-in duration is
determined by the unlock time that has been
programmed for the door strike.
The pushbutton can be installed in a remote location.
If the buzz-in is done from a remote location, a
telephone or intercom can be used for conversation
with the person who wants to enter.
Pressing the pushbutton causes the control unit to
signal the ACIU to activate the door strike.
Multiple MAP points can each be used for the buzz-in
capability so that people in different areas can buzz
someone through a common door.
64 (EXP) Exit This point type is associated with access control. It  NC SIM
Contact
Pushbutton uses an RPX-264 Pushbutton, installed inside of the
access-controlled area, to establish a 1-minute exiting
time window for the last person leaving. This allows
the person time to open the door, exit, and use a coded
key at a Keylok to lock the door, thereby
automatically turning on the BA groups.
The pushbutton is ordinarily connected to a SIM.
However, for retrofits, the pushbutton can also be
connected to a 471999 Switch Interface Module.
When someone with a Janitor privilege uses the
pushbutton for exiting, then closes the door and uses
the coded key to lock the Keylok, the shunt is removed
from all Janitor points that were alarm shunted. Also,
a Janitor Off Premises signal is sent to the CCC.
The LED annunciates the exit delay. See the following
tables for the status indications when a person with or
without Janitor privilege enters and exits.
Person Without Janitor Privilege

Status
Off Off Indicates BA groups are Off.
Person leaving presses Normal Begins flashing (1-sec 1-minute window starts.
pushbutton. On/1-sec Off).
Not Ready Off 1-minute window does not start.
Person exits, closes the door, Normal On Steady Indicates BA group(s) are On and
and uses the coded key/card. door can now be locked.
Not Ready Off BA group(s) will not turn On. (Where
Keylok is involved, person will not be
able to turn key to lock the door.)
Person exits, closes the door, Normal Goes Off at the end of Indicates BA groups are Off.
but forgets to use the coded 1-minute window.
key/card.
14-6
Person With Janitor Privilege
Status
On On Indicates BA groups are On.
Entry
Janitor uses the coded Normal Slow flashing (1-sec Indicates Janitor points in all BA
key/card and unlocks the door. On/2-sec Off). groups have become alarm shunted.
Exit
Janitor exits and presses the Normal Changes from slow to 1-minute window starts.
pushbutton. fast flashing (1-sec
On/1-sec Off).
Not Ready Remains slow Indicates BA groups are not normal.
flashing.
Janitor exits and presses the Normal Changes to On steady. Indicates alarm shunt has been
pushbutton, closes the door, removed from each Janitor point in
uses the coded key/card (or system and BA groups are On.
Janitor Keyswitch).
Note: The door must be closed and
locked before using the
passcode/keycode.
Janitor closes the door, but Normal At end of 1-minute Indicates BA groups are On, but
forgets to use the coded window goes to a slow Janitor points in each group are still
key/card (or Janitor flashing condition. alarm shunted.
Keyswitch).

65 (ARM) Arming This is a special-purpose point type, reserved for 5800  NC 
Contact
Series wireless transmitters, which turns on the BA
group when the point is activated.
66 (DAR) Disarm This is a special-purpose point type, reserved for 5800  NC 
Contact
Series wireless transmitters, which turns off the BA
group when the point is activated.
67 (NAR) No Alarm This point type is used to trigger an output point  NC SIM
Contact
Response (relay), but without triggering an alarm condition
(e.g., for lobby access door).
69 (CO) Carbon The point type is monitored for an alarm and trouble Janitor NC Self-Test
Contact
Monoxide at all times. An alarm or trouble condition is
NOTE: Assign Carbon Monoxide points to BA group 1
only.
70 (MIS) Movable Assigned to points where alarms are processed only Janitor NC Self-Test
Contact
Instant Stay during the Nite-Set period, such as door contacts and
infrared and photoelectric sensors.
• During Day Set, an open (if you are using transfer
contacts) is processed as a trouble condition and is
annunciated locally and transmitted to the CCC.
• During Stay (Local) mode, a cross or open results
in a local alarm that is annunciated locally, but
there is no transmission to the CCC.
• During Nite Set, a cross or open will result in an
alarm signal to the CCC.
NOTE: During STAY mode, alarm messages are sent
to the pager, if used.
14-7

71 (MIP) Movable This point type is automatically bypassed when the Janitor NC Self-Test
Contact
Instant PIR system is armed in Stay (Local) mode and option 2 is
set. If option 2 is not set and the system is armed in
STAY mode, an open causes a trouble and a short is
ignored (bypassed). During Nite Set, a cross or open
will result in an alarm signal to the CCC.
72 (MDS) Movable Assigned to points where sensors are installed in the Janitor NC Self-Test
Contact
Delayed Stay entry/exit path to allow the customer time to enter or
exit the premises without creating an alarm.
During Stay (Local) mode, a cross or open will result
in a local alarm that is annuciated locally, but there is
no transmission to the CCC.
During the programmable entry/exit delay time the
control unit does not produce an alarm condition from
a movable delayed stay sensor in the entry/exit path.
The point does not produce an alarm if proper entry
and exit procedures are followed; only the operating
panel sounder does annunciate the delay.
NOTE: During STAY mode, alarm messages are sent
to the pager, if used.
• If an RF transmitter is used to arm or disarm the system, an operating panel addressed to 0 on

Communication Group 0 will allow access to the menu prompts whenever the button on the transmitter
is pressed. Therefore, to ensure that unauthorized personnel will not have access to the operating
panel, position it in a secure area.
• If an RF transmitter is used to arm or disarm the system, the point must be linked to a user. Otherwise,
the system will show the arm/disarm prompts when the button is pressed, but the system will not
change state.
Input Point Options

For burglar alarm applications, the input point type assigned to a point determines how the control
unit will interpret normal and off-normal conditions during Day Set (system disarmed) and Nite Set
(system armed). The following options apply for input point types:
Options for All
Function
Types
BA Group The number of the BA group that the point will be assigned to.
Assignment
Bypass Whether bypassing will be permitted by persons with an ID code having a
bypassing privilege.
Point Link Select which point, if any the point is linked to.
14-8
Option 1 Function
Janitor Select whether the point automatically becomes alarm shunted during Nite Set if
a Janitor Keyswitch is operated.
Smoke Power Enabling this option causes the system to remove power from the smoke detector
Reset for 6 seconds when a Reset Alarm command is entered at an operating panel.
Holdup If you are using the holdup suspicion option, a separate device with normally-
Suspicion closed contacts can be installed in the holdup loop to open the loop to trigger a
Holdup Suspicion output point (SIM or COPID), thereby actuating a camera for a
few seconds without initiating a holdup alarm. If the suspicious switch is held
open for more than 1 minute, a trouble signal is initiated. A latch option (option
3) is available that permits the use of a device with momentary contacts to
initiate the alarm.
Log Whether an access control occurrence will be logged in the system’s history log.
24-Hour Alarm Selecting this option enables the point to cause an alarm even when the system is
turned off (Day set).
Option 2 Function
Normally Whether a sensor with a normally-closed contact is being used.
Closed An open in the wiring of a hardwired point or the SIM/PID loop will be ignored
Contact during Day Set, but interpreted as an alarm during Nite Set.
NOTE: If a point type normally produces a trouble during the Day Set, that
condition will not be ignored.
For ALL BA RF points, this option must be set for YES.
LED This is used exclusively for the Janitor or BA keyswitch. If the SIM device is
connected to the LED, enable this option.
Option 3 Function
Self-Test Whether self-testing will be used. This pertains to sensors with a built-in SIM
with self-test capability.
Selecting the bell and display test at the operating panel causes a 30-second +
12V signal to be sent to the sensor with this option. In response, the sensor
performs a self-test.
The results can be viewed on the operating panel screen (History). Selecting this
option is a trade-off for the ability to load shed and also for resetting a latching
sensor that requires the removal of power to reset.
Latch Whether a latching or momentary contact is used on the loop to initiate an alarm.
SIM Whether the pushbutton will be connected to a SIM Gateway. In that case, the
LED goes on when the pushbutton is pressed and remains on for the duration of
the unlock time. It also goes on whenever a card/key is used to gain access at this
door.
Buzzer This is used exclusively for the Janitor or BA keyswitch. If the SIM device is
connected to the buzzer, enable this option.
Output Point Types

An output point type is used when controlling an output device (e.g., bell). There are 18 different types
of output points. Typically, a SIM (+ 12V output) or COPID can be assigned these point types, except
where noted otherwise. SIM output points are supervised and COPID output points are not supervised.
The following table lists the program entry, explanation of the function of the output type points and
the options associated with each type. At the end of this list you will find an explanation of each of the
options.
14-9

14 (CSC) Central Output turns on or off upon a command signal from Complement  
Station the CCC.
Note: The command can only be issued using AC
communication.
15 (SMC) Service Output turns on the first time a valid service ID code Complement  Comm
Fail
is entered at an operating panel (ADT on-premises),
and turns off when an ADT off- premises signal is
initiated by selecting RESET~ ADT OFF at the
operating panel.
16 (TFC) Telco Fault Output turns on if a telco fault condition occurs (low Complement  Comm
Fail
voltage or current, or loss of interrogation on AC telco
line). The output turns off when the telco line becomes
normal.
17 (SCC) BA Schedule Output turns on at the start of the scheduled open Complement  Comm
Fail
period for a designated BA group, and turns off when
the close schedule starts.
18 (LTC) BA Lights Output turns on when the protection of a pre-selected Complement Remain Comm
On Fail
BA group is turned off, or the entry/exit delay period
is activated. The output turns off when the protection
of a BA group is turned on.
Note: If the Recycle Exit Delay is enabled, the output
turns on whenever any key is pressed on the operating
panel.
19 (FXC) BA Fixed Output turns on when any BA Fixed or Fixed Local Complement  Comm
Fail
type point goes into alarm or, during Day Set, an
Instant Daytime Annunciation type point goes into
alarm. Output turns off when a valid ID code is
entered at any operating panel.
20 (OFC) BA Off Output turns on when the protection of a selected BA Complement  Comm
Fail
group is turned off, and turns off when the protection
is turned on.
21 (FAC) Fire Output turns on and latches when any fire type point Complement  Silence
in the system goes into alarm. The output turns off
when the alarm condition has been cleared and the
fire alarm is reset.
22 (SPC) Supervisory Output turns on if any supervisory type point goes Complement  Comm
Fail
into alarm, and turns off when the point restores.
23 (HUC) Holdup Output turns on if: Complement  Comm

Fail
• A holdup type point goes into alarm and turns off
when the holdup device is manually reset.
• The ambush feature is activated and turns off
when the operating panel times out.
• A duress signal is initiated at any operating panel
and turns off when the operating panel times out.
24 (HSC) Holdup Output turns on when a Holdup type point or a Complement  Comm
Holdup Special type point in which the Suspicion Fail
Suspicion
option has been selected goes into alarm. The output,
which can be used to control a holdup and suspicion
camera, turns off when the point restores.
14-10

25 (RSC) BA Remote Output turns on to operate Sonalert(s) during any of Complement  Comm
the following periods: Fail
Sonalert
• Output follows the steady keypad audible pattern
during the pre-alarm entry delay of the selected
BA group, and operates the 2-seconds-On, 2-
seconds-Off pattern during the exit delay.
• During the holdup test (regardless of the BA
group involved), output operates the 2-seconds-
On, 2-seconds-Off pattern while the point being
tested is normal, and turns on steady when the
point is in alarm. When the point is restored to
normal, the output reverts to the 2-seconds-On, 2-
seconds-Off operation until the test is ended.
• Output turns on for 2 seconds, once each minute,
during the programmed closing reminder time of
the selected BA group, and turns on steady during
the close warning period.
26 (TSC) BA Bell and Output turns on for 30 seconds when a test of the local Complement  Comm
bell and/or vault sensors is commanded from the Fail
Vault Sensor
Test operating panel. When used in conjunction with the
testing of vault sensors, the output can be used to turn
on the test signal transmitter of a vault vibration
sensor system, and/or to turn on the test sounder of a
vault audio system.
27 (RBL) Remote Bell This output point type is intended for retrofit FOCUS Strobe Common 
applications in which the Horn/Strobe point cannot be BA
(PID gateway
only) used. It can be used for controlling a bell for BA and
FA applications, and for controlling a fire alarm
strobe.
This type utilizes a 471898 (7187-028) Quad Powered
Sounder PID Module.
The quad powered sounder PID is employed for
controlling and supervising the wiring to a sounder or
strobe for local fire alarm applications. In the event of
a fire, the sounder pulses on and off, and the strobe
flashes continuously.
Note: A separate point is needed both the sounder and
strobe.
The supervised bell control unit is employed for
connecting a bell housing and local bell in order to
provide a local alarm for BA applications. The bell
operates steadily for a burglar alarm, and rings on and
off for a fire alarm.
33 (STC) System Output turns on for any of the following conditions Complement Off Comm
and remains on until the condition is cleared: Normal Fail
Trouble
• A point has been installed, but the point has not
been entered into the control unit data base.
• A “comm fail” has occurred for a point, an
operating panel, or a printer interface unit.
• A trouble condition has been detected at a Holdup
point, a keyswitch interface, a Remote Bell point,
an Ambush Start or End point, or a Remote
Power Supply point.
• A trouble condition has occurred at a Janitor
Keyswitch point.
• A trouble condition occurs on an FA point.
14-11

34 (PLC) Point Link Output follows the status of a designated input point, Complement Output Active
or the output of a designated Point Link output point. Link When
Turned
On
37 (ACC) BA Access Output turns on for 10 seconds when: Complement  Comm

Fail
• A valid ID code is entered at the operating panel
during the Day Set condition of the associated BA
group.
• The BA group is turned to Day Set. A typical
application is having the output control a door-
strike release mechanism, permitting access to a
controlled area.
38 (HST) Horn/Strobe For use with a horn/strobe that will operate for an FA Inhibit BA Common Code 3
alarm and, optionally, also for a BA alarm, as follows: BA
• For an FA alarm, strobe flashes continuously and

horn operates for an ongoing series of five 1-
second rings followed by a 5-second pause.
Horn/strobe can be silenced only after all FA
points become normal by entering any valid ID
code (or 2,2,2,2,2,2); otherwise, turn-off occurs
when 10-minute timeout expires.
• For a BA alarm, horn sounds continuously unless
silenced by entry a valid ID code (or automatic
turn-off occurs for the BA group that is involved).
Strobe does not operate for a BA alarm.
Note: Set option 3 for NFPA temporal pattern (Yes).
If set for (NO) the output can continuously pulse on/off
or produces a steady sound. Enabling of the steady
output can be done only via the ADEMCO Compass
Downloader.
40 (PRC) AC Fail This point type is normally on and turns off whenever Complement  Comm
an AC failure condition occurs on the system. Fail
59 (ACD) Access This output point can be used to trigger a camera or Complement  Comm
activate an annunciation device in the event that Fail
Denied
someone uses a card/key having a code that either:
• Does not have Irregular Open, Open or Close
access to all BA groups associated with that
ACIU.
• Does not have the Irregular Open or Open option
for any of the associated BA groups that may be
On.
• Has a Close option and the person attempts to
enter outside of the scheduled open period even
though the associated protection is Off.
When the point is triggered, the output stays on for 10
seconds and then goes Off.
68 (ABA) Alarm in any This point type is normally off and turns on when an Complement  Comm
alarm occurs in any BA group that is armed. The Fail
BA Group
output returns to the off condition when the BA group
with the alarm condition is changed to Day Set.
14-12
Output Point Options
The following table describes the output point options:
Options for
Function
All Types
BA Group The number of the BA group that the point will be assigned to.
Assignment
Bypass Whether bypassing will be permitted by persons with an ID code having a
bypassing privilege.
Point Link Select which point, if any the point is linked to.
Option 1 Function
Complement Selecting this option causes the turn-on and turn-off conditions of the output
point to be reversed. In other words, if the output is turned on upon detection of
the condition being monitored, it will instead be normally on, and turn off when
that condition is detected.
Strobe Select if a strobe will be used for the point in place of a bell, in which case the
strobe will flash continuously for an alarm.
Inhibit BA Selecting this option prevents the horn from annunciating a BA alarm.
Option 2 Function
Off Normal Enabling this option causes the output to turn on for any off normal condition on
Condition the system.
Output Link Select this option if the output will follow the status of a designated output point.
Common BA Select this option if the bell is turned on by an alarm in only one BA group, or an
alarm in any one of a series of BA groups.
If a series of BA groups is selected, then the BA group that is selected is the
starting point for the series. For example, if there are 8 BA groups and the
number 3 is selected, then an alarm in any BA group from BA3 through BA8 will
trigger the bell, but not an alarm in BA1 or BA2.
Remain On Select this option to keep the output on during a group entry or exit delay period.
Option 3 Function
Silence Ordinarily, the output does not unlatch unless the alarm-initiating sensor has
cleared and the alarm has been reset. If the Silence option is selected, the output
unlatches when a valid code (or Fire Marshall Code 2,2,2,2,2,2) is entered.
Code 3 The Horn/Strobe point is intended primarily to annunciate a fire alarm, but the
horn can also be used to sound for a burglar alarm.
If this option is selected, the horn sounds for an NFPA temporal pattern (¼-
second on, ¼-second off, for 3 seconds, followed by 1 second of silence).
Because these transmissions occupy a segment of the overall time allocated for
control unit interrogation and response messages, as well as other functions that
are performed by the control unit, the number of horn/strobes is limited to 5 per
SIM gateway and 20 per system. These numbers can be increased to 10 per SIM
gateway and 40 per system by selecting Option 1 (inhibit BA) for each
Horn/Strobe point, thereby preventing the horns from sounding for a BA alarm.
If this is done, the control unit will no longer generate the temporal pattern.
Instead, the DIP switches on each horn/strobe must be programmed to generate
the temporal pattern in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Comm Fail Selecting this option causes the output to activate only if a Communication
Failure on the dialer condition is present.
Activate When Selecting this option causes the output to activate only if the system is turned on.
Turned On
14-13
Types of Input Points and Associated Options
Input Point Type Mnc∗ No. Link Group Bypass Option 1 Option 2 ∗∗∗∗ Option 3
BA Fixed FI 1 ∗∗ 1 thru 8 Y/N 24-Hour Alarm NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test
(Y/N)
BA Movable Instant MI 2 ∗∗ 1 thru 8 Y/N Janitor (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test
(Y/N)
BA Movable Delayed MD 3 ∗∗ 1 thru 8 Y/N Janitor (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test
(Y/N)
BA Fixed Local FL 4 ∗∗ 1 thru 8 Y/N — NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test
(Y/N)
BA Movable Instant MID 5 ∗∗ 1 thru 8 Y/N Janitor (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test
Daytime Annunciation (Y/N)
BA VVS VVS 6 ∗∗ 1 thru 8 Y/N Janitor (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test
(Y/N)
BA Movable Instant MIC 7 ∗∗ 1 thru 8 Y/N Janitor (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test
Chime (Y/N)
BA Movable Delayed MDC 8 ∗∗ 1 thru 8 Y/N Janitor (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test
Chime (Y/N)
Fire FA 9 ∗∗ 1 ∗∗∗ Y/N Smoke Reset Self Test
(Y/N) (Y/N)
Holdup Special HUS 10 ∗∗ 1 ∗∗∗ Y/N Suspicion NC Contact (Y/N) Latch
(Y/N) (Y/N)
Holdup HU 11 ∗∗ 1 ∗∗∗ Y/N Suspicion NC Contact (Y/N) Latch
(Y/N) (Y/N)
Medical MED 12 ∗∗ 1 ∗∗∗ Y/N — NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test
(Y/N)
Supervisory SPV 13 ∗∗ 1 ∗∗∗ Y/N — NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test
(Y/N)
Janitor Keyswitch JAN 28 ∗∗ 1 thru 8 Y/N — LED (Y/N) Buzzer
(Y/N)
BA Keyswitch KEY 29 ∗∗ 1 thru 8 Y/N — LED (Y/N) Buzzer
(Y/N)
Remote Power Supply RPS 30 ∗∗ 1 thru 8 Y/N — — —
BA End Delay END 31 ∗∗ 1 thru 8 Y/N — — —
BA Blocklock-PID only BLK 32 ∗∗ 1 thru 8 Y/N — — —
Ambush Start ABS 35 ∗∗ 1 ∗∗∗ Y/N — NC Contact (Y/N) —
Ambush End ABE 36 ∗∗ 1 ∗∗∗ Y/N — — —
Waterflow WF 49 ∗∗ 1 ∗∗∗ Y/N — — —
Manual Access MAP 60 ∗∗ 1 thru 8 Y/N Log (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) SIM (Y/N)
Pushbutton
Exit Pushbutton EXP 64 ∗∗ 1 thru 8 Y/N — NC Contact (Y/N) SIM (Y/N)
Arming ARM 65 ∗∗ 1 thru 8 Y/N — NC Contact (Y/N) —
Disarm DAR 66 ∗∗ 1 thru 8 Y/N — NC Contact (Y/N) —
No Alarm Response NAR 67 ∗∗ 1 thru 8 Y/N — NC Contact (Y/N) SIM (Y/N)
Carbon Monoxide CO 69 ∗∗ 1 ∗∗∗ Y/N Janitor (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test
(Y/N)
Movable Instant Stay MIS 70 ∗∗ 1 thru 8 Y/N Janitor (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test
(Y/N)
Movable Instant PIR MIP 71 ∗∗ 1 thru 8 Y/N Janitor (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test
(Y/N)
Movable Delayed Stay MDS 72 ∗∗ 1 thru 8 Y/N Janitor (Y/N) NC Contact (Y/N) Self Test
(Y/N)
∗ Mnemonic
∗∗ If using point-link function, enter the number of point that this point will be linked to.
∗∗∗ Point type must be assigned to a BA group (BA1), otherwise point will cause an FA fault annunciation.
∗∗∗∗ For RF Fire Points, this option must be set for NO. For RF Burglary Points, this option must be set for YES.
14-14
Types of Output Points and Associated Options
Output Point Type Mnc∗ No. Link Group Bypass Option 1 Option 2 Option 3
Central Station AC CSC 14 — 1 thru 8 Y/N Complement — COMM
(Y/N) Fail (Y/N)
Service Mode SMC 15 — 1 ∗∗∗ Y/N Complement — COMM
(Y/N) Fail (Y/N)
Telco Fault TFC 16 — 1 ∗∗∗ Y/N Complement — COMM
(Y/N) Fail (Y/N)
BA Schedule SCC 17 — 1 thru 8 Y/N Complement — COMM
(Y/N) Fail (Y/N)
BA Lights LTC 18 — 1 thru 8 Y/N Complement Remain On COMM
(Y/N) (Y/N) Fail (Y/N)
BA Fixed FXC 19 — 1 thru 8 Y/N Complement — COMM
(Y/N) Fail (Y/N)
BA Off OFC 20 — 1 thru 8 Y/N Complement — COMM
(Y/N) Fail (Y/N)
Fire FAC 21 — 1 ∗∗∗ Y/N Complement — Silence
(Y/N) (Y/N)
Supervisory SPC 22 — 1 ∗∗∗ Y/N Complement — COMM
(Y/N) Fail (Y/N)
Holdup HUC 23 — 1 ∗∗∗ Y/N Complement — COMM
(Y/N) Fail (Y/N)
Holdup Suspicion HSC 24 — 1 ∗∗∗ Y/N Complement — COMM
(Y/N) Fail (Y/N)
BA Remote Sonalert RSC 25 — 1 thru 8 Y/N Complement — COMM
(Y/N) Fail (Y/N)
BA Bell and Vault Sensor TSC 26 — 1 thru 8 Y/N Complement — COMM
Test (Y/N) Fail (Y/N)
Remote Bell-PID only RBL 27 — 1 thru 8 Y/N Strobe (Y/N) Common BA —
(Y/N)
System Trouble STC 33 — 1 ∗∗∗ Y/N Complement Off Normal COMM
(Y/N) (Y/N) Fail (Y/N)
Point Link PLC 34 ∗∗ 1 ∗∗∗ Y/N Complement Output Link Activate
(Y/N) (Y/N) When On
BA Access ACC 37 — 1 thru 8 Y/N Complement — COMM
(Y/N) Fail (Y/N)
Horn/Strobe-SIM only HST 38 — 1 thru 8 Y/N Inhibit BA Common BA Code
(Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N)
AC Fail PRC 40 — 1 thru 8 Y/N Complement — COMM
(Y/N) Fail (Y/N)
Access Denied ACD 59 ∗∗ 1 thru 8 Y/N Complement — COMM
(Y/N) Fail (Y/N)
Alarm in any BA Group ABA 68 ∗∗ 1 thru 8 Y/N Complement — COMM
(Y/N) Fail (Y/N)
∗ Mnemonic
∗∗ If using point-link function, enter the number of point that this point will be linked to.
∗∗∗ Point type must be assigned to a BA group (BA1), otherwise point will cause an FA fault annunciation.
14-15
14-16
S E C T I O N 1 5
Programming
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ About Programming the System ♦ Programming the BA Groups’ Turn-Off Data
♦ Mechanics of Programming ♦ Programming the System Communication
Options
♦ Programming Names for the BA Groups
♦ Programming Point Data
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About Programming the System

The installation may require the FOCUS 200 PLUS System’s data to be changed from the default
settings. This customization may be done either locally via an operating panel or remotely via downline
loading. The Hard ID number of each point, the various descriptors, and the user ID codes typically
need to be programmed into the system. Because the Hard ID numbers for the various points are
ordinarily not known until the sensors have been installed, this is typically done locally via an
operating panel. The ADEMCO Compass downloading software telephone number and the subsystem
group and instrument numbers should also be entered.
Any data entered locally should be uploaded to the ADEMCO Compass downloading software for future
editing, as required.
Point Data
Point data is the information associated with point of protection in the system. This data includes:
• The Hard ID Number
• The name of the point (descriptor)
• The point type
• The associated BA group
• Whether the point is linked to another point
• Whether the point can be bypassed
• The communication unit number
Descriptors
Descriptors are user-selected descriptive names. A user with a valid ID code and the appropriate
privilege level may at any time change the descriptors. Descriptors may be programmed for:
• Each BA group
• Each point of protection
• Each person assigned an ID code
• Each holiday in the holiday schedule
User ID Codes
The ID codes are user-selected, and are used to operate the system. See the ID Codes section for the
detailed programming procedure for entering the ID codes into the system.
15-1
Mechanics of Programming
The operating panel provides an interactive display that operates in a manner similar to an automatic
teller machine (ATM). It employs a 19-character, four-line LCD display that shows menu selections,
message prompts, and help screens to guide you through the various operating procedures. Menu items
and other selectable choices are shown on the screen with an arrow (>) that lines up with one of the
four "Selector" buttons on each side of the screen. You make a choice by pressing the button alongside
the item shown on the screen.
Programming of the system is done by selecting a course of action from menu items that appear on a
series of screens known as Action Menus. Entering the valid Service Code will cause the first of four
Action Menus to be displayed. The Action Menus are the starting point for performing all programming
operations.
In order to access the Action Menus, the protection for the BA group associated with the operating panel
where the Service Code is entered must be Off.
Programming Names for the BA Groups

Enter the program mode by entering the Service Code at the operating panel.

< Lesson Turn on > Select More three times.
< Quit More >

< Sys info ID codes > Select Name pnt/gps.
< Previous First >
<? GROUP #1 Group Info Screen is displayed. The default display shows the
Group 1 info for Group #1.
< Prev Change > The top line shows the current name. The second line shows the
< Quit Next > group to which this info pertains.
Select Next to display the info screen for Group #2. Select Next
again to display the info screen for Group #3, etc. Select Prev to
display the previous group’s info.
Select Change to move to the Character Entry Screen for the
group displayed.
<? GROUP #1 The cursor is under the first letter of the current name for the
Group 1 Done > group. Use the third key down on each side to move either Back or
< Back CHR Forward > Forward through the alphabet. Use the bottom key on each side to
move the cursor position either Left or Right through the name.
< Left POS Right >
Select Done to save the current name displayed. The system
displays the Group Info Screen.
Program all group names by selecting either Next or Prev to move
to another group.
Select Quit twice to exit the program mode.
15-2
Section 15 – Programming
Programming Point Data


< Quit More >

< Sys info ID codes > Select Name pnt/gps to move to the next screen.
< Previous First >
<? GROUP #1 Group Info Screen is displayed.

Group 1 Enter the point number (e.g., for point 1, enter 1; for point 25, enter
< Prev Change > 25; for point 125, enter 125).
< Quit Next >
< ? POINT 20 Point Info Screen. is displayed.

Pnt 020 Type 1N/Z The first line shows the current name and the second line shows
< Prev Change > the point and the type.
< Quit Next > Note: Type 1N/Z (No Zone) indicates the point is not yet defined.
Select Next to display the info for the next point.
Select Change to edit the info for this point.
< ? POINT 20 Character Entry Screen is displayed.

Pnt 020 Continue > The cursor is at the first letter of the current name for the point.
< Back CHR Forward > Use the third key down on each side to move either Back or
< Left POS Right > Forward through the alphabet. Use the bottom key on each side to
move the cursor position either Left or Right through the name.
Select Continue to save the current name displayed and advance
to the Point Type Screen.
< ? FRONT DOOR 20 Enter the number of the point type.
Type N / Z Continue > Input Point Types
Type – 0 0 01. BA Fixed (FI) 30. Remote Power Supply (RPS)
02. BA Movable Instant (MI) 31. BA End Delay (PID only) (END)
< Quit Delete > 03. BA Movable Delayed (MD) 32. BA Blocklock (PID only) (BLK)
04. BA Fixed Local (FL) 35. Ambush Start (ABS)
05. BA Movable Instant Daytime 36. Ambush End (ABE)
Annunciation (MID) 49. Waterflow (WF)
06. BA VVS (VVS) 60. Manual Access Pushbutton (MAP)
07. BA Movable Instant Chime (MIC) 64. Exit Pushbutton (EXP)
08. BA Movable Delayed Chime (MDC) 65. RF Arm (ARM)
09. Fire (FA) 66. RF Disarm (DAR)
10. Holdup Special (HUS) 67. RF No Alarm Response (NAR)
11. Holdup (HU) 69. Carbon Monoxide (CO)
12. Medical (MED) 70. Movable Instant Stay (MIS)
13. Supervisory (SPV) 71. Movable Instant PIR (MIP)
28. Janitor Keyswitch (PID only) (JAN) 72. Movable Delayed Stay (MDS)
29. BA Keyswitch (PID only) (KEY)
Output Point Types
14. Central Station AC (CSC) 25. BA Remote Sonalert (RSC)
15. Service Mode (SMC) 26. BA Bell/Vault Sensor Test (TSC)
16. Telco Fault TFC) 27. Remote Bell (PID only) (RBL)
17. BA Schedule (SCC) 33. System Trouble (STC)
18. BA Lights (LTC) 34. Point Link (PLC)
19. BA Fixed (FXC) 37. BA Access (ACC)
20. BA Off (OFC) 38. Horn/Strobe (SIM Only) (HST)
21. Fire (FAC) 40. AC Fail (PRC)
22. Supervisory (SPC) 59. Access Denied (ACD)
23. Holdup (HUC) 68. Alarm in any BA Group (ABA)
24. Holdup Suspicion (HSC)
Select Delete to erase all the info for this point.
15-3
< ? FRONT DOOR 20 Select Enter to save this info and then select Continue to move to
Type MD Continue > the next screen.
Type – 0 3
< Previous Enter >
< ? FRONT DOOR 20 Group Assignment Screen is displayed.

Group 1 Continue > The default group assignment is Group 1. Enter the number of the
PERIMETER group to which this point should be assigned.
< Previous Enter > Select Enter to save this info and then select Continue to move to
the next screen.
< ? FRONT DOOR 20 Point Link Screen is displayed.

Link _ _ _ Continue > If this point is not to be linked to another point, select Continue.
If this point is to be linked with another point, enter the point
< Previous Enter > number. If that point has been fully programmed, the name will
appear on the third line.
Select Enter and then Continue to save this info and move to the
next screen.
< ? FRONT DOOR 20 Bypass Screen is displayed.

IS _____ Continue > Selecting Change will toggle the bypass option between “IS NOT
BYPASSABLE BYPASSABLE” and “IS BYPASSABLE.”
< Previous Change > Select Continue to save the info and move to the next screen.
< ? FRONT DOOR 20 This is Option 1 Screen.

IS _____ Continue > The function of Option 1 changes depending on the type of point
OPTION 1 being used.
< Previous Change > For Input Point Type 1 = 24-Hour Alarm Point:
Selecting this option enables the point to cause an alarm even
when the system is turned off (Day set).
For Input Point Types 2, 3, 5 to 8, 69 to 72 = Janitor Point:
This point is automatically bypassed during the Nite Set if a
Janitor Keyswitch is used.
For Input Point Type 9 = Smoke Detector Reset Point:
Enabling this option causes the system to remove power from the
smoke detector for 6 seconds when a Reset Alarm command is
entered at an operating panel.
For Input Point Types 10, 11 = Suspicion Point:
A separate normally closed device causing an open triggers a
Holdup Suspicion output. If the open is held for more than 1
minute, a trouble occurs.
For Input Point Type 60 = Log Event:
Select whether an occurrence will be logged in the system’s history.
For Output Point Types 14 to 26, 33, 34, 37, 40, 59 68 =
Complement Point:
Select this option to reverse the function of the output. An output
that normally is turned on when the system detects a condition will
be turned off.
For Output Point Type 27 = Strobe:
Select whether a strobe is used instead of a bell. The strobe will
flash continuously for an alarm.
For Output Point Type 38 = Inhibit BA:
Select whether the output is inhibited for BAs.
Selecting Change will toggle the option.
Select Continue to save selection and move to the next option
screen.
15-4

< Previous Change > For Input Point Types 1 to 8, 10, 11, 13, 35, 60, 64, 69 to 72 =
N/C Contact:
Select whether a normally closed contact is used. If so, an open in
the loop wiring will be ignored during the Day Set, but will initiate
an alarm during the Nite Set.
For Output Point Types 27, 38 = Common BA:
Select whether the output will be turned on by an alarm in only
one BA group or by an alarm in any one of a series of BA groups.
For Output Point Types 33 = Off Normal:
Enabling this option causes the output to turn on for any off
normal condition on the system.
For Output Point Type 34 = Output Link:
Select whether this output will follow the status of a designated
output point.
For All BA RF transmitters option 2 must be enabled (IS).
Select Change to toggle the option.
Select Continue to save the selection and move to the next option
screen.
< Previous Change > For Input Point Types 1 to 9, 13, 69 to 72 = Self-Test:
Select whether the device will perform a self-test. This is for
devices with a built-in SIM that have self-test capability.
For Input Point Types 10, 11 = Latch Contact:
Select whether a momentary contact is used on the loop to initiate
an alarm.
For Input Point Types 60, 64 =SIM:
Select whether the pushbutton will be connected to a SIM
Gateway.
For Output Point Types 14 to 20, 22 to 26, 33, 37, 40, 59 68 =
Communication Failure:
Selecting this option causes the output to activate only if a
Communication Failure on the dialer condition is present.
For Output Point Type 21 = Silence:
Ordinarily, the output does not unlatch unless the alarm-initiating
sensor has cleared and the alarm has been reset. If the Silence
option is selected, the output unlatches when a valid code (or Fire
Marshall Code 2,2,2,2,2,2) is entered.
For Output Point Type 34 = Activate When Turned On:
Selecting this option causes the output to activate only if the
system is turned on.
For Output Point Type 38 = Code 3:
If this option is selected, the horn sounds for an NFPA temporal
pattern (¼-second on, ¼-second off, for 3 seconds, followed by 1
second of silence).
Select Change to toggle the option.
Select Continue to save the selection and move to the next screen.
15-5
< ? RF Point? This is the RF Programming Screen.

Continue > Select Continue if you do not desire to change the RF information
No > for this point.
Yes > Select No if the point is not an RF point.
Select Yes if the point is RF or if there is any information
concerning this point that needs to be changed. This will move you
to the RF Information Screen.
< ? RF information RF Information Screen is displayed.

< Type RF Continue > Select Type to scroll through the choices (RF, UR, BR) for the
< Loop 1 type of RF point.
< Previous Select Loop to scroll through the loops (1-4) for this point
Select Continue to save the info and move to the next screen.
< ? Enter User # BR User # Screen is displayed.

Continue > If the type selected was BR, this screen is displayed.
BR User # _ _ _ 0 Enter the User # associated with this RF transmitter.
< Previous Enter > Select Enter to save the user #. The Enter key changes to Delete.
Select Delete to erase the user # displayed.
Select Continue to move to the Gateway Screen.
< ? FRONT DOOR 20 This is the Gateway Screen.

Gate? Continue > Enter the Gateway unit number (0-9) that this point is associated
POINT GATEWAY with (7 for RF devices; 8 for built-in HW input and output points; 9
< Previous Delete > for SIM Loop devices).
Select Continue to save the info and move to the next screen.
< ? FRONT DOOR 20 Select Enter and then Continue to save this info and move to the
Gate 1 Continue > next screen.
POINT GATEWAY
< Previous Enter >
< ? FRONT DOOR 20 This is the Hard ID Screen.

< Replace (N) Done > Enter the Hard ID number of the device for the point.
Hard ID: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ If this is an RF point, enter the serial number located on the bar
< Previous Enter > code label on the transmitter.
If you are using a 4208U, 4209U, or 4208SNF, you must enter an
“A” for the first digit. Press the [*] key on the operating panel then
enter the hard ID.
Select Enter and then Done to save this info and move back to the
Point Info Screen.
Note: The Replace (Y/N) has no function at this time.
< ? FRONT DOOR 20 This is the Point Info Screen.

Pnt 20 Type 3MD This screen now displays the summary information for the point.
< Prev Change > The first line shows the current name and the second line shows
< Quit Next > the point and the type.
Select Next to display the info for the next point.
Select Previous to move back to the previous screen.
Select Change to edit the info for this point.
Select Quit and move to Action Menu #4 when all points have been
programmed.
NOTE: If ✳ appears after the point type, the gateway unit number
or the Hard ID number is missing.
15-6
Programming the BA Groups’ Turn-Off Data


< Quit More >

< Sys info ID codes > Select Name pnt/gps.
< Previous First >
< ? BA GROUP #1 Group Info Screen. The system defaults to display the info for
Group #1. The top line shows the current name. The second line
Group 1
shows the group to which this info pertains.
< Previous Change >
< Quit Next > Select Next repeatedly until the info screen for Group #8 is shown.
Select Next once more to advance to the next screen.
< ? Grp0 Ut0 Keypad This screen shows which BA Groups will be automatically opened
(turned off) when a valid ID Code is entered at the operating panel
< BA-❙ ❙ ❙ ❙ ❙ ❙ ❙ ❙
indicated.
< Previous Change >
Select Change to edit the selections. Enter the number of each BA
< Quit Next > Group that will turn off. Entering the number again will erase the
selection.
Select Next to move to the operating panel at the next address on
the RS-485 bus.
Continue until all operating panels have been programmed.
< ? Grp4 Ut0 Cardrdr Selecting Next at the last operating panel will bring you to this
screen.
< BA-❙ ❙ ❙ ❙ ❙ ❙ ❙ ❙ Lg (N) >
This screen is same as the one for the operating panels, except this
< Previous Change >
is for BA Groups linked to card/key readers.
< Quit Next >
Select Change to edit the selections.
Select Next to move to the card/key reader at the next address on
the RS-485 bus.
Selecting Lg will toggle between Yes (Y) and No (N) to log
successful attempts, unsuccessful attempts, openings, and closings
at this card/key reader in the history log.
Selecting Next at the screen showing the last card/key reader will
bring you to the Point Data Info Screen.
Select Quit to return to Action Menu #4.
Programming the System Communication Options

Action Menu #1 is displayed.
<? Enter choice:
Select More three times.
< Lesson Turn on >
< Quit More >

< Sys info ID codes > Select Load to continue.
< Previous First >
15-7
<? SS-GG-IIII > The Communication Screen is displayed.

< ST P# Remote DLL > Select the Dtm/Lst key to scroll through the dialing methods. The
< Dtm/Lst > choices are:
< Quit More > Pls/Lst = Pulse dialing and loop start
Dtm/Lst = TouchTone dialing and loop start
Pls/Gndst = Pulse and ground start
Dtm/Gndst = TouchTone and ground start
Note: Whatever selection is made on this screen is also
reflected on the CCC Options Screen.
Select More to program the CCC phone number.
<? Pri Num/Hex Edi The CCC Options Screen is displayed.

< Pri Phone Num DES > Select the CID key to toggle between Contact ID (CID) and
< Dtm/Lst CID > Security Industry Association (SIA) formats.
< Quit Hex Data > Select Pri Phone Num to program the primary CCC phone
number.
Select DES to program for encrypted communication using the AC
Communicator module.
Select Hex Data to program the hex data information.
<? Enter Pri Num If Pri Phone Num was selected, the Primary Phone Number
Screen is displayed.
______________ >
Enter the primary phone number for the communication of alarms,
< Pause Dial Tone >
troubles, etc. to the Customer Care Center. Select Pause and select
< Quit Enter > (wait for) Dial Tone as needed. Each Pause entry is three seconds.
Up to 32 digits may be entered.
Note: The display can only show 16 digits at a time. If you need to
th
enter more than 16 digits, when the 17 digit is entered the display
automatically advances to display digits 17 through 32.
The arrow (>) at the right-hand side indicates you are entering
digits 1 through 16. The arrow at the left-hand side indicates digits
17 through 32.
Select Enter when you are finished entering the phone number.
Any digits after the cursor will be erased.
The Enter key will then change to Delete. Select Delete to erase
the displayed phone number.
Select Quit to save the displayed phone number and return to the
Communication Screen.
Select Quit again to return to Action Menu #4.
<? DES If DES was selected, the DES Screen is displayed.

< > Select No to turn encryption off and return back to the CCC
< No Yes > Options Screen.
< Previous > Select Yes to turn encryption on and/or change any of the DES
keys. This also advances you to the Master Key Screen.
Select Previous to return to the CCC Options Screen without
changing any of the encryption parameters.
15-8
<? Enter Master Key Master Key Screen is displayed.

✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳ Enter the 16 characters for the Master Key. Use the numeric keys
< A – F (10-15) Enter > for digits 0 – 9. Press the A – F key to enter a hexadecimal
< Next > character.
Important notes when entering DES keys:
• All 16 characters must be entered.
• Do not enter all zeroes for the key.
• Do not press Enter whenever the asterisks are displayed. This
enters zeroes for the entire key.
• Pressing Next whenever the asterisks are displaying, advances
to the next DES Key screen without changing the stored key
number.
• For security purposes, once the key has been stored, it may
never be viewed.
< ? Enter Master Key After you have entered all 16 characters, verify that the number is
1234567890ABCDEF correct.
< A – F (10-15) Enter > Press Enter to store the number. This changes the display back to
< Next > asterisks. Do not press Enter at this time, see Important
notes at the Master Key Screen above.
Press Next to advance to the next key screen.
<? Enter Init Vector Initial Vector Key Screen is displayed.

✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳ Enter the 16 characters for the Initial Vector Key. Use the numeric
< A – F (10-15) Enter > keys for digits 0 – 9. Press the A – F key to enter a hexadecimal
< Previous Next > character.
Press Enter to store the number. This changes the display back to
asterisks. Do not press Enter at this time, see Important
Press Previous to return to the Master Key Screen.
<? Enter Encry Key 1 Working Encryption Key #1 Screen is displayed.

✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳ Enter the 16 characters for the Encryption Key #1. Use the
< A – F (10-15) Enter > numeric keys for digits 0 – 9. Press the A – F key to enter a
< Previous Next > hexadecimal character.
Press Previous to return to the Initial Key Screen.

Press Previous to return to the Working Encryption Key #1
Screen.
15-9

Screen.

< Previous Quit > hexadecimal character.
Screen.
Press Quit to exit the DES screens and advance to the next key
screen.
15-10
S E C T I O N 1 6
Scheduling
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ About Scheduling ♦ Holiday Schedules
♦ Permanent Schedules ♦ Ambush Schedules
♦ Temporary Schedules ♦ Schedule Options
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About Scheduling
Scheduling is used to:
• Automate openings and closings.
• Limit access to the system.
• Set the time limit for the Ambush Points.
• Automate the associated scheduling reports to the Customer Care Center (CCC).
The FOCUS 200 PLUS system utilizes permanent, temporary, and holiday schedules. Time windows
(time periods) are used to define the schedules. Each BA group can be assigned its own schedules.
UL Automatic openings and closings may not be used on UL Burglary alarm systems.
Opening/Closing Schedules
The opening and closing schedules define the time windows that a BA group will automatically turn on
and off, and when users may access the BA group. There are two permanent and two temporary
schedules that can be assigned to each BA group. The temporary schedule will override an existing
permanent schedule. Additionally, a holiday schedule can be assigned to the BA group and it will
override the permanent schedule, but not the temporary schedule.
Only users with the appropriate privilege levels can establish or change the permanent and temporary
schedules. The holiday schedule is typically established at the time of installation.
The ability to use any form of automatic opening or closing is controlled by a separate Automatic
Open/Close Enable option that may only be set via the downloader.
User Access Limitations

Users are assigned privilege levels, which either allow or deny access to a BA group when it is normally
closed. The privilege of entering a BA group outside of the schedule can be assigned to any ID code.
Anyone who does not have this privilege and uses their ID code to access a BA group prior to the
scheduled open time will cause an Irregular Opening. The signal will be received at the CCC and the
owner or manager will be notified.
16-1
Close Time Timer

The Close Time Timer counts down from the opening of a BA group until closing. The system transmits
to the CCC a No-Close signal if the group is not closed when the countdown is completed.
Permanent Schedules
The permanent schedule has two open and close times that can be programmed for each day in the
week. The times can be changed only by someone who has an ID code with the privilege to change a
permanent schedule. This privilege also permits a person to make changes in real time.
Permanent Schedule Programming Options

Use the Permanent Schedule programming options to establish the daily opening and closing schedules
and to determine if changes will be permitted. Military time (shown) may only be entered via downline
loader.
The permanent schedule programming options are as follows:
Schedule Option Description

Permanent 00:00 to 23:59 The time range for selecting a permanent opening time in
Open Time hours and minutes.
UUUU There will not be a permanent opening schedule for the BA
group, although a temporary opening schedule can be used.
NNNN No permanent open time is assigned, nor can a temporary
schedule be entered via keypad.
Permanent 00:01 to 23:44 The time range for selecting the scheduled closing time in
Close Time hours and minutes. A closing time between 11:45 PM and
11:59 PM is not permitted.
UUUU No permanent closing schedule is assigned, but a temporary
closing schedule can be used when necessary.
NNNN No permanent close time has been assigned, nor can one be
entered via the keypad.
Example of a Permanent Schedule

A facility is closed on Sunday, and is scheduled to open at 9:00 PM on Monday and close at 1 AM on
Tuesday. The table below shows the programming to establish this schedule for an entire week:
Programming
Day of Schedule Result
Entry
Monday First 21:00 PM This starts the open period time window (9:00 PM) for
Opening Time Monday.
Monday First UUUU This inhibits "close reminder/warning" and "no close" from
Closing Time occurring because the premises will not close on Monday.
Tuesday First 12:00 AM This entry is needed because the open time period was
Opening Time started on Monday and allows any closing time to be entered
for Tuesday.
Tuesday First 01:00 AM This completes the time window that started at 9:00 PM on
Closing Time Monday.
Tuesday Second 21:00 PM This starts the open period time window (9:00 PM) for
Opening Time Tuesday.
Tuesday Second UUUU This inhibits "close reminder/warning" and "no close" from
Closing Time occurring because the premises will not close a second time
on Tuesday.
Wednesday First 12:00 AM This entry is needed because the open time period was
Opening Time started on Tuesday and allows any closing time to be entered
for Wednesday.
Wednesday First 01:00 AM This completes the time window that started at 9:00 PM on
Closing Time Tuesday.
16-2
Section 16 – Scheduling
Programming
Day of Schedule Result
Entry
Wednesday Second 21:00 PM This starts the open period time window (9:00 PM) for
Opening Time Wednesday.
Wednesday Second UUUU This inhibits "close reminder/warning" and "no close" from
Closing Time occurring because the premises will not close a second time
on Wednesday.
Repeat the same four entries for each day of the rest of
the week, up to and including Saturday.
Sunday First 12:00 AM This entry is needed because the open time period was
Opening Time started on Saturday and allows any closing time to be entered
for Sunday.
Sunday First Closing 01:00 AM This completes the time window that started at 9:00 PM on
Time Saturday.
Sunday Second UUUU There will not be an open time window because the premises
Opening Time will not open on Sunday.
Sunday Second UUUU This inhibits "close reminder/warning" and "no close" from
Closing Time occurring because the premises will not close on Sunday.
(This completes the schedule for the entire week).
Temporary Schedules
The temporary schedule is not ordinarily set up for a new installation. Instead, when needed, it is
usually entered at an operating panel or downline loaded upon customer request.
A temporary schedule:
• Has open and close times that can be assigned up to 6 days in advance.
• Will override any permanent schedule in effect at the time.
• Can be used for a BA group even if the group does not have a permanent schedule.
• Includes entry options that are the same as the Permanent Schedule, except for NNNN, which
cannot be used.
• Will be voided at midnight, at which time the permanent schedule will become active again.
For example, a temporary schedule is programmed for Thursday that has an opening time of 7:00
AM and a closing time of 10:30 PM. This schedule will be canceled on Thursday at midnight. The
automatic cancellation is a precaution against someone forgetting to cancel a temporary schedule.
• Can be downline loaded from the central station, or can be entered locally at any operating panel.
Guidelines for Programming Permanent and Temporary Schedules

• If there isn't any opening or closing, program UUUU for both the opening and the closing.
• If UUUU is programmed for the opening, then it must also be programmed for the closing.
• If there is no opening time, but there is a closing time, the opening must be entered as 12 midnight
(12:00 AM). This will allow entering any closing time that is desired.
• No permanent or temporary opening time can be assigned if it is before the earliest open time that
has been programmed for the BA group.
• Changes can be made to the permanent and temporary schedules by someone with the appropriate
privilege levels.
Any permanent or temporary schedule can be downline loaded, regardless of the earliest-open or latest-
close time that has been programmed in the control unit.
16-3
Holiday Schedules
The holiday schedule:
• Specifies each day during the year that the premises will be closed for the observance of a holiday.
• Overrides the permanent schedule for that day.
• Accommodates l4 days that are designated as holidays.
• Requires the programming of the month, day of the month, and name of the holiday.
• Can be overridden by a temporary schedule, if a BA group needs to be opened during the holiday.
It is important to complete this schedule, if you are using a permanent schedule to perform Auto
On/Off. If an Auto Off function has been selected and the holiday falls on what would otherwise be a
normal workday, the protection is not automatically turned off at the normal opening time. When
someone arrives and enters, expecting the system to be off, a false alarm is generated.
Ambush Schedule
An ambush schedule:
• Is used for an Ambush-Start point and an Ambush-End point as protection against hide-ins.
• Provides for two permanent schedule openings and closings per day.
• Provides for two temporary schedule openings and closings per day.
• Is programmed in the same way as the permanent and temporary schedules for each BA group.
• Operates independently of other schedules.
Open and close times for a given day should form a time window spanning the permanent schedule
open time to permit the customer to enter to prepare for the opening of the bank without creating an
alarm.
For an explanation of how an ambush schedule works, see the Ambush Start and End Input Point
Types in the Input and Output Point Types section.
Scheduling Options
The options associated with scheduling are outlined in the following table:
Option Function
Auto On/Off Auto On/Off may be convenient to use for an area where people come and go as
they please, and no one is responsible for turning the protection on or off.
The burglar alarm protection associated with each schedule can be:
• Turned on and off manually. • Turned on and off automatically.
• Turned on automatically and • Turned on manually and turned
turned off manually. off automatically.
Example: If auto-on/auto-off is selected for a given BA group, it automatically
goes to Nite Set at the scheduled closing time, and automatically goes to Day Set
at the scheduled opening time without anyone having to go to an operating panel.
The closing time reminder and warning sounder operate as a reminder to exit
However, there is no warning sound during the entry delay because the opening
is being done automatically.
Notes:
• The system performs the auto-on at the end of the warning time.
• Auto-On/Off may not be used in UL burglary alarm systems.
• The auto-on will not occur if there are faults on any sensors in the group
unless Force Auto-arm is enabled.
Early Open/ This establishes the earliest opening and latest closing times that can be used
Late Close each day for the permanent and temporary schedules for a given BA group.
Schedule This is intended for use with areas involving safes, vaults, or other high-security
Lockout areas where the operating panel is located outside of the protected area. It is
used to prevent a BA group from being turned Off when the present time is
outside the scheduled open period.
16-4
Section 16 – Scheduling
Early Open/Late Close Options

The following table describes the options for establishing the limits for the earliest opening and latest
closing time for a BA group. The limits apply to both the permanent and temporary schedules:
Option Time Function

Earliest Open Time 00 to 23 This sets the time limit, in 1-hour increments, from 12
midnight (00) to 11 PM (23). A schedule can be programmed
at or after the earliest open time.
For example, selecting 5 AM as the earliest open time means
a schedule can be programmed at or after 5 AM by a user.
24 (Lock) This locks the opening time for the permanent schedule so
that no temporary schedule changes can be made (from the
operating panel).
Latest Close Time 00 (Lock) This locks the permanent schedule closing times so that no
temporary schedule closing times can be programmed from
the operating panel.
01 to 23 This choice sets the time limit, in 1-hour increments, from 1
AM (01) to 11 PM (23), for the latest permissible closing
time. A permanent or temporary closing schedule cannot be
extended beyond the latest closing time.
24 Allows any close time up to 11:44 PM, but the closing time
cannot be deleted.
25 Deletes all restrictions on closing schedules. Allows for the
spanning of midnight and deleting schedules.
Close Time Reminder and Warning

The Close Time Reminder and Close Time Warning periods occur at the end of the Close Time Timer
countdown.
During the Close Time Reminder, the operating panel beeps once a minute. This serves to alert the
user to get ready to close because the closing time is about to end.
At the end of the Close Time Reminder, the Close Time Warning begins. During this time, the
operating panel sounds a continuous tone. This serves to alert the user that the close time has ended
and a No Close signal is about to be transmitted to the CCC unless the BA group is turned on before
the warning time ends.
The duration of the Close Time Reminder and Close Time Warning is programmed in the No Close
option. The choices are:
• 15 minutes for the Close Time Reminder and 15 minutes for the Close Time Warning.
• 30 minutes for the Close Time Reminder and 5 minutes for the Close Time Warning.
NOTE: The system can be programmed to disable the Close Time Reminder. This option can only be
programmed via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader.
16-5
16-6
S E C T I O N 1 7
Downline Loading
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ About Downline Loading ♦ Downline Loading the Customized Data
♦ Programming the Control Unit for Downline ♦ Verifying the Downline Loaded Data
Loading
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About Downline Loading

Downline loading is a process of transmitting from a remote location all the programmable data into
the control unit. Data that has been programmed locally through an operating panel may also be
loaded to the remote location. The ADEMCO Compass downloading software is located at the remote
location, and the transmission takes place over the dialing network by means of a standard telco line.
Downline loading requires the ADEMCO Compass software.
Downline loading can be initiated from the ADEMCO Compass downloading software or by the ADT
installer at the customer's premises. The sequence of events that are involved in the downline loading
are determined by whether the operation is being done for the first time during installation or is being
done for a subsequent change to an existing customer database.
The system supports Arm/Disarm by Group, Off Normal Status request and Reset Alarm Memory via
the ADEMCO Compass Downloader.
Downline Loading Security
As a security measure, in order to prevent the downline loading of data from a source other than ADT,
the control unit will not accept any data without first calling back the ADEMCO Compass downloading
software. This callback requirement is controlled by an activation byte. On a new installation, when the
control unit is preset to the factory defaults, the activation byte is cleared in the control unit's memory.
This permits the control unit to accept data from the ADEMCO Compass downloading software without
first calling the CCC and the ADEMCO Compass downloading software. When the initial data has been
downloaded, the control unit communicator verifies the telephone number of the CCC and the
ADEMCO Compass downloading software by making a callback to each. If the telephone numbers are
correct, the ADEMCO Compass downloading software sets the activation byte in the control unit
memory to prevent attempts to download unauthorized data.
Programming the Control Unit for Downline Loading

In order for the control to call back the ADEMCO Compass downloading software for a downline load,
the ADEMCO Compass downloading software phone number must be programmed into the control
unit. Follow the steps below to program the number. Enter the Service Code at an operating panel.

< Quit More >

< Sys info ID codes > Select Load to continue.
< Previous First >
17-1
<? SS-GG-IIII > The Communication Screen is displayed.

< ST P# Remote DLL > Select between DTM (Tone) and Pls (Pulse) dialing method and
< DTM/Lst Local DLL > Lst (Loop Start) and Gndst (Ground Start) dial tone method to
< Quit More > reach the ADEMCO Compass downloading software.
Select SS-GG-IIII to advance to the System Number Screen.
Select Remote DLL to initiate the downline loading from the
control unit.
Select ST P# to advance to the Service Terminal Phone Number
Screen.
<? Ser Term Phn # The Service Terminal Phone Number Screen is displayed.
________________> Enter the phone number where the ADEMCO Compass
downloading software is located. Select Pause and select (wait for)
< Pause Dial Tone >
Dial Tone as needed. Each Pause entry is three seconds. Up to 32
< Quit Enter > digits may be entered.
Note: The display can only show 16 digits at a time. If you need to
th
enter more than 16 digits, when the 17 digit is entered the display
automatically advances to display digits 17 through 32.
The arrow (>) at the right-hand side indicates you are entering
digits 1 through 16. The arrow at the left-hand side indicates digits
17 through 32.
Select Enter when you are finished entering the phone number.
Any digits after the cursor will be erased.
The Enter key then changes to Delete. Select Delete to erase the
displayed phone number.
Select Quit to save the displayed phone number and return to the
< ? System Number The System Number Screen is displayed.

SS00 GG000 II0000 Call the CCC to get the System Number.
Enter 2 digits for System Number (SS) and select Enter.
< Quit Enter >
Enter 3 digits for Group Number (GG) and select Enter.
Enter 4 digits for Instrument Number (II) and select Enter.
Select Quit to save the displayed system number and return to the
NOTE: The System Number is provided by the data group doing
the downline loading.
Downline Loading the Customized Data

The following downline loading procedure applies regardless of whether the point data has been loaded
locally or will be included in the data to be downline loaded.
Until the downline loading has been completed and the "activation byte" has been received, the system
will be locked in a local mode, during which time no signals will be sent to the CCC. As a reminder to
the installer that the system is in the local mode, all operating panels will display:
System in Local Mode
Activation Byte not set
17-2
Section 17 – Downline Loading
To downline load the system, proceed as follows:
Step Action
1 Call the ADEMCO Compass downloading software. This is to ensure that there is a "Read
customer unit into the database" job waiting in the queue for system being installed.
Note: If there isn't a job waiting in the queue for the system being installed, the system
will perform an Unsolicited Upload.
2 Inform the ADEMCO Compass downloading software of the area code and telephone
number of the telephone line connected to the Main Line of the control unit. This is the
telephone number that the ADEMCO Compass downloading software will use whenever it
contacts the control unit.
3 At any operating panel, enter the Service Code, More, More, More, Load, Remote
DLL. The control unit will call the ADEMCO Compass downloading software, and the
control unit database will be uploaded to the ADEMCO Compass downloading software.
During the upload, the operating panel will display the following message:
Calling ADT to initiate changes.
The following message will be displayed if there is no job in the queue:
DLL aborted.
Except where the DLL has been aborted, no further action is required by the installer. The control
unit's data will be uploaded and any additional data required for the installation will be downloaded
back to the control unit, as indicated in the following table.
Stage What Happens
1 The operator at the ADEMCO Compass downloading software examines the uploaded data
and modifies it, as is applicable. The finalized set of customer data is then used to create
(or verify) the customer's database for MAXimation SM.
2 Using the control unit telephone number provided by the Installer in Step 2, the operator
at the ADEMCO Compass downloading software downloads the finalized database to the
control unit. During the download, as during all forms of communication, the main dialer
red LED on the control unit goes on.
3 After completion of the download, the control unit waits 5 seconds, dials the CCC (via the
receiver), and sends a "Start DLL" transmission to verify that the control unit can
communicate with the CCC over the alarm channel.
4 When the control unit has received an acknowledgement that the CCC has received the
"Start DLL" message, the communicator hangs up and dials the ADEMCO Compass
downloading software, which, in turn, sets an "activation byte" at the control unit.
Note: With the setting of the activation byte, any off-normal events that occur from this
point on are transmitted to the CCC.
5 After a successful DLL (activation byte set), the control unit automatically checks the
various points in the system, including the hard IDs and the point number. If there are any
discrepancies, a trouble is annunciated at the operating panel(s) and the point is identified.
Note: From this point on, during normal operation (system out of service mode) any sensor
that is removed or added will generate a trouble until the sensor and hard ID have been
properly entered into the database via the operating panel, or via downline loading.
17-3
Verifying the Downline Loaded Data

Verify the data that were downline loaded into the control unit. This process may be as extensive as the
customer deems necessary. It may not be necessary or convenient to check every entry. View the
operating panel screens when making the checks listed below:
Step Action
1 Check the descriptors for the BA groups.
2 Check the descriptors for each point. Also check the Hard ID for any point that was entered
manually at the control unit.
3 Check the user names.
4 Check the user privilege levels.
5 Check the times of all schedules.
6 Check the contrast level at each panel with the customer, readjusting if necessary.
17-4
S E C T I O N 1 8
Real-Time Clock
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ About the Real-Time Clock ♦ Setting Daylight Saving Time
♦ Setting the Time and Date
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About the Real-Time Clock

All schedules (permanent, temporary, holiday, and ambush) are based on the time and date from an
internal real-time clock. Also, the history log uses the time and date when events are logged. During
system installation, the clock should be initially set to the time (hour and minute) and date (month,
day, and year).
• If the system loses all power or is powered down for any reason, the clock must be reset. The clock
does not advance during the time the system does not have power connected.
• The Time Change Menu screen will not display if any group is armed.
Setting the Time and Date

To set the time and date, enter the Service Code and perform the following steps:
< Lesson Turn on >
Select More twice.
< Quit More >

< Bypass History > Select Time.
< Status Time >
< Previous More >
<? TIME The Time Screen is displayed.

< Holiday Daylight > Select Current to display the current time and date set in the
< Open/close Hstg > system.
< Quit Current >
<? Time & date The Current Time and Date Screen is displayed.
11:15:28 AM Select Change to change the current settings.
09–28-98 Select Quit to move back to the Time Screen without making any
< Quit Change > changes.
<? Change The Change Menu Screen is displayed.

< Change Time Select Change Time to move to the Enter New Time Screen.
< Change Date Select Change Date to move to the Enter New Date Screen.
< Quit
Select Quit to move back to the Time Screen without making any
changes.
18-1
<? Enter new time: This is the Enter New Time Screen.
Curr: 11:15 AM Enter the new time for the system. Be sure to make the correct
New: _ _:_ _ AM > AM/PM selection.
< Quit PM > Select Quit to return to the Current Time and Date Screen.
<? Enter new date: This is the Enter New Date Screen.
Curr: 09–28-98 Enter the new date for the system.
New: _ _-_ _-_ _ Select Enter to save the date displayed and return to the Current
< Quit Enter > Time and Date Screen.
Select Quit to return to the Current Time and Date Screen without
saving the new date.
Setting Daylight Saving Time

The clock will automatically adjust for leap year and for Daylight Savings Time (if used). To adjust the
Daylight Savings Time settings, perform the first two steps stated earlier under the Setting the Time
and Date heading to advance to the Time Screen. Then proceed as follows:
<? TIME At the Time Screen, select Daylight.

< Holiday Daylight >
< Open/close Hstg >
< Quit Current >
< ? SPRING DAYLIGHT The Current Daylight Saving Screen is displayed.

Date: 00-00 Select Change to change the current name and date set in the
< Previous Change > system.
< Quit Next > Select Previous or Next to toggle between the Spring and Fall
settings.
Select Quit to move back to the Time Screen.
< ? SPRING DAYLIGHT This is the Character Entry Screen.

< Back CHR Forward > The cursor is at the first letter of the current name. Use the second
< Left POS Right > key down on each side to move either Back or Forward through
< Quit Continue > the alphabet. Use the third key down on each side to move the
cursor position either Left or Right through the name.
Select Continue to save the current name displayed and advance
to the next screen.
Select Quit to move back to the Current Daylight Saving Screen.
<? Delete > This is the Enter New Daylight Saving Screen.
Curr: 00-00 Enter the new date.
New: _ _-_ _ Select Delete to erase any incorrect entries and return to the
< Quit Enter > Current Daylight Saving Screen.
Select Enter to save the date displayed and return to the Current
Daylight Saving Screen.
Select Quit to return to the Current Daylight Saving Screen
without saving the new date.
18-2
S E C T I O N 1 9
ID Codes
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ About the ID Codes ♦ Duress Signal
♦ Service Code ♦ ID Code Programming
♦ Fire Marshall Code ♦ Summary of ID Code Capabilities and Privileges
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About the ID Codes

The FOCUS 200 PLUS System supports up to 255 separate 6-digit ID codes, including service codes.
Each ID code is limited to the BA group(s) it is assigned, and is capable of:
• Turning the protection on.
• Turning the protection off.
• Performing tests of the BA sensors.
• Performing the operating panel tests.
• Performing the local bell tests.
ID Code Makeup
ID codes are made up of six digits. All six digits of an ID code are needed to access the system. The first
two digits of the ID code:
• Serve as the user number, and are numbered 01, 02, 03, etc., up to 99. Users, such as 01, 101, and
201 all use the same first two digits 01.
• Are used as passcodes by the CCC when identifying the person performing a function.
The last four digits of the ID code:
• Serve as a PIN (Person Identification Number).
• Uniquely identify the user and his assigned privileges to the system.
• Serve to identify the level of access.
Users with the same user code (first two digits) cannot use the same PIN (last four digits). For example,
user 25's PIN may be 1234; user 125's PIN 3456; and user 225's 5678. User 25 would enter 251234 to
access the system. User 125 would enter 253456. User 225 would enter 255678.
Be careful that a duress code is not inadvertently created. See Duress Signal later in this section for a
detailed explanation for how to create a Duress signal.
Programmable ID Code Privileges

The following privileges are optional for each ID code. They are assigned to the ID code when it is
entered into the system, but may be changed at any time by a user with the appropriate privilege.
Privileges are limited to the BA group(s) to which the ID code is assigned.
Each ID code may be assigned the ability to:
• Assign ID code privileges.
• Open one or more BA groups outside of the scheduled opening time without initiating an irregular
opening.
• Bypass and unbypass any points in the BA group(s).
19-1
• Bypass VVS sensors.
• Establish or change temporary schedules.
• Establish or change closing times in the BA group(s).
• Change the real-time clock +/- 5 minutes maximum.
• Establish or change permanent schedules and make unlimited changes to real time.
• Bypass fire alarm, holdup alarm, and supervisory points.
• Establish or change descriptors for ID codes, points, and BA groups.
• Establish or change ID codes' accessibility to BA groups.
The Service Mode privilege is assigned to all service codes, and is not made available to the customer.
Service Code
The Service Code is an ID code for use by ADT personnel when installing or working on a system, and
must be assigned by the local office. As a minimum, the Service Code must be assigned the "Can enter
service mode" privilege. Any additional privileges may be assigned to that ADT service person, as
required.
Entry of this code at an operating panel will:
• Place the FOCUS 200 PLUS system in the Service Mode.
• Bypass the cabinet tamper when "Service On".
• Cause an ADT-on-premises signal to be transmitted to the Customer Care Center (CCC).
• Lock out all other ID codes so that the system can be worked on without any customer interference.
The cabinet tamper is automatically bypassed when the system is placed in Service mode and
automatically unbypassed when the system is taken out of Service mode.
The Service Code(s) must be downline loaded from the ADEMCO Compass downloading software. In
order to allow the service person to get into the system to initiate a downline load on a new installation,
a Temporary Service Code (8,8,8,8,8,8) becomes active for the first minute after power-up. After this
first minute, the Temporary Code becomes disabled, and the downline loaded Service Code must be
used. Temporary Service Code is active for 1 minute each time that the control unit is powered up.
During that first 1 minute after power-up, entering Reset, Memory, Yes will cause the temporary service
code [8,8,8,8,8,8] to remain active until the system is downline loaded.
Fire Marshall Code

The code (2,2,2,2,2,2) is embedded in the control unit's memory and is reserved for use by the local fire
marshal. This allows the local fire marshal to silence a fire alarm without affecting the status of any
BA groups.
Entering this code will cause fire alarm sounders to silence, but strobes will continue to flash until the
alarming point(s) have been reset.
The (2,2,2,2,2,2) code should not be assigned to any ordinary users of the system. However, the first
two digits (22) can be used in conjunction with any four last digits other than 2222.
19-2
Section – 19 – ID Codes
Duress Signal
A duress signal is a silent alarm transmitted in the form of a holdup alarm signal to the CCC. The
control unit duress option must be enabled for a duress signal to be activated. To activate a duress
signal, the user enters the first 5 digits of the ID code as usual, but adds a value of two to the normal
number of the last digit.
For example, if the ID code is 2-2-4-5-6-7, enter 2-2-4-5-6-9 to activate a duress signal. If the last digit
of the PIN is 8, enter 0; if the last digit is 9, enter 1; if the last digit is 0, enter 2. The duress signal
works with any valid ID code regardless of the privilege level.
Be careful that a duress code is not inadvertently created when entering new ID codes. As an example,
if user 22's PIN is 4567, then make sure user 122's or 222's PIN is not 4569.
Programming ID Codes
The deletion, addition, or alteration of the PIN (last four digits) of an ID code and associated user name
can be performed at any operating panel by a user with an ID code having this privilege, or the change
can be downline loaded from the central station. Where PCS (Passcode Schedule Supervision) service is
involved (see the System Communication section), instruct the customer that ID code changes must be
controlled from the CCC because the CCC monitors those who perform BA group openings. With this
type of service, the CCC can prevent the customer from changing an ID code.
ID Code Programming Options
Programming options associated with each ID code are as follows:
Option Function
Code These are the last four digits of the ID code. They are entered alongside the two
digits that serve as the user number in order to make up the 6-digit ID code.
Group The choice of BA groups that the ID code will have access to. The selection can
include any combination of groups, including all groups.
Cancellation Date A cancellation date can be assigned to any ID code up to 365 days in advance.
Notes: The privilege "Can enter service mode" is reserved for ADT personnel and must not be
assigned to any ID code being used by the customer.
If an RF button is linked to a user code, when the user code cancel date expires the link is
severed. Entering a new cancel date does not re-establish the link to the RF button.
Adding or Changing an ID Code
To add or change an ID code, enter a user ID code with the privilege to change ID codes or enter the
Service code at an operating panel and perform the following:

< Quit More >

< Sys info ID codes > Select ID codes.
< Previous First >
< PERSON #1 Person Data Entry Screen is displayed.

USER 001 Delete > The system defaults to user #001. If this is not the user you desire
to change the data for, enter the correct user number.
< Previous Change >
< Quit Next > Select Next to advance to the next user number.
Select Previous to back up to the previous user number.
Select Delete to erase the data for the user displayed.
Select Quit to go back to Action Menu #4.
Select Change to edit the data for the user displayed.
19-3
< PERSON #1 If you selected Change, the Person’s Name Screen is displayed.
< Back CHR Forward > The cursor is at the first letter of the current name for the user.
< Left POS Right > Use the second key down on each side to move either Back or
Forward through the alphabet. Use the third key down on each
< Quit Continue >
side to move the cursor position either Left or Right through the
name or insert a space.
Select Continue to save the current name displayed and move to
the next screen.
<? PERSON #1 This brings you to the first in a series of nine Person Access
Access irr & open Screens.
Select Change to scroll through the following four choices of
< ** BA Group 1
access:
< Change Continue >
1. Can access & open
2. Can not access
3. Can access
4. Access irr (irregular) & open
Select Continue to save the displayed access capability, and
advance to the first access screen for BA groups 2-8.
** Pressing the BA Group button at any of the Person Access
Screens brings you to the previous screen.
<? PERSON #1 Selecting Continue at BA Group 8 brings you to the next in the
Can not open irregular series of access screens. The series of access screens progress as
follows:
< BA Group 8
Can (not) open irregular
< Change Continue >
Can (not) bypass BA
Can (not) change temp sched
Can (not) change perm sched
Can (not) change names
Can (not) bypass FA/HU/SPV
Can (not) enter service mode
Can (not) be changed
Note: The Janitor privileges may be set up only via downline
loading.
Select Change to toggle a privilege between Can and Can not.
If the last access screen displays “Can not be changed,” selecting
Continue advances you to the Enrolling Key or Card Screen. See
the Access Control section for the procedure for enrolling cards
and/or keys.
If you are adding a new ID Code or changing an existing ID code,
make sure the last access screen displays “Can be changed.” Select
Continue and the system advances to “ID Code May Be Changed”
screen. Select Change at this access screen to advance to the Type
New User Screen.
< Type New User Type New User Screen is displayed.

ID code: Enter the last 4 digits of the ID code for the user number displayed.
01 _ _ _ _ The first 2 digits of the ID code are the user number. The screen at
the right shows user # 01.
< Quit Enter >
Select Enter to save the ID code displayed.
Select Quit to go back to Action Menu #4.
19-4
Section – 19 – ID Codes
Summary of ID Code Capabilities and Privileges

The following operations can be performed by a user, provided:
1. The Operating Panel has been activated by a valid code.
2. The user has the appropriate privilege level.
Protection On/Off
• Turn the protection On for one or any combination of BA groups.
• Turn the protection Off for one or any combination of BA groups (turnoff is automatic upon entry of
a valid code if the BA group is in entry delay or alarm).
• Establish automatic On and/or automatic Off schedule (if system option has been enabled).
Alarms/Point Status
• View the points of protection that are off-normal.
• Reset sensors at the various points of protection (provided sensors have restored to normal).
• Silence BA/FA sounding devices and operating panel sounder (by entering valid code).
• View contents of alarm memories.
• Restore alarm memories.
• Initiate printout or view contents of alarm memory log.
Schedules/Time
• Close late by temporarily changing the close time schedule for any BA group (for up to 6
consecutive days from the current day).
• Establish or change permanent opening and closing schedules for each BA group.
• Establish or change earliest time for opening and latest time for closing each BA group.
• Establish temporary opening and closing schedules for each BA group for a maximum of six
consecutive days.
• Establish automatic On and/or automatic Off schedule (if system option has been enabled).
• Establish or change the holiday schedules (holiday name and date).
• Establish or change a hostage schedule.
• Set and adjust time and date.
Note: There are two different privileges for changing time:
1. Allowed to change time by plus or minus 5 minutes in any day, but allowed to make a full
change when the system is first powered up.
2. Always allowed unlimited time changes. Entered values of digits for hours must not be 00 and
must not be greater than 12.
Bypassing
• Bypass any point(s) in the system.
• View points that are bypassed.
Any BA point that has been bypassed will automatically become unbypassed when the system is turned
from On to Off at the operating panel.
Special bypass of vault vibration sensor points will automatically become unbypassed at BA1 Latest Close
Time, or at midnight if Latest Close Time is not set.
Resetting
• Reset alarms.
• Reset results of walk tests and other sensor tests.
• Reset Memory (SRAM).
19-5
ID Codes
• Establish or change ID codes.
• Establish or change privilege levels for ID codes.
• Establish or change BA group(s) assigned to an ID code.
• View ID code privilege levels and name of person associated with each code.
Testing
• Test the operating panel display and sounder and local bell.
• Walk-test the areas protected by motion detectors, and test door and window contacts.
• Test security groups before closing, and see any points that may be abnormal.
• View points that have been bypassed for test purposes.
• Test holdup alarm, fire alarm, supervisory (CCM), and burglar alarm devices (and bell) without
initiating an alarm signal to the central station.
Printout
• Printout can be commanded for up to 60 of the most recent alarm messages that have been stored,
or up to 1000 of the most recent messages.
Naming
• Establish or change a name assigned to each BA group.
• Establish or change a name assigned to each point.
• Establish or change a person’s name to each user code number.
Viewing
• Point status.
• User name and privilege level.
• Time of day.
• Open and close schedules, both permanent and temporary.
• Contents of alarm memory.
• Contents of history log.
Downline Loading
• Reset Memory (SRAM).
• Start downline load.
• Enter, via operating panel, all basic data to get system installed and tested.
Note: All remaining data can be downline loaded or entered in hex via an operating panel.
19-6
S E C T I O N 2 0
System Operation
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ About Operating the System ♦ Control Unit and BA Group Options
♦ Action Menus ♦ Recycling Exit Delay
♦ Operating Panel Modes ♦ Alarm/Trouble Memory
♦ ID Codes
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About Operating the System

The 471210 Operating Panel provides the users complete control of the FOCUS 200 PLUS System. The
operating panel uses an interactive display that operates in a manner similar to an automatic teller
machine (ATM). It guides the user through the operating procedures by means of menu and help
screens. The menu screens are called Action Menus.
Each menu item is shown on the screen next to an arrow (>) that lines up with one of the four selector
buttons on each side of the screen. Pressing the selector button alongside the item makes a choice.
The top left-hand selector button is reserved for calling up help messages that are associated with the
information being displayed. The availability of help information is indicated by a "?" symbol. The help
button can be used at any time without interfering with the operation that is taking place.
1 2 3
ABC DEF
4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO
7 8 9
PRS TUV WXY
Figure 20-1: Operating Panel

Activating the Operating Panel
If the system is in a normal, non-alarm state, pressing any digit key activates the operating panel to
display the off/on status of the burglar alarm protective group(s).
Entering a valid 6-digit ID code causes the operating panel to activate, bringing up the Action Menus.
Then selections and entries can be made as required.
20-1
Screen Duration of the Operating Panel

If, while you are in the process of performing an operation, a predetermined period elapses without
making a selection, the display will revert to the screen showing the status of the system, provided that
all parts of the system are normal.
The various screen durations are as follows:
Screen Duration
Normal no-alarm 7 seconds
Action Menu #1 screen Approximately 10 seconds
After a selection at Action Menu #1 60 seconds
After an ADT Service Code is entered 4 minutes
Test In Progress Continuously until reset
Operating Panel User Code Lockout 60 seconds
Operating Panel Sounder

The operating panel sounder will annunciate to signal specific conditions as follows:
Condition Sounder Pattern
Each depression of a selector button or digit key A short beep
Acceptance of a valid code or a function A longer beep
Fire Alarm Pulsating 1-second-on, 1-second-off with a 5-
second pause every 10 seconds
BA Alarm Steady tone
Trouble or Supervisory Intermittent pulsating (2 beeps, 1 second off)
Entry Delay−reminder to turn off Steady tone
Exit Delay−reminder to exit 1-second beep every minute
End of Exit Delay 4-second beep
Auto On Reminder−reminder to close (beeps start 1-second beep every minute
15 or 30 minutes before closing, as programmed)
Auto On Warning−warning to either exit or extend Steady tone
closing time (beeps start either 5 or 15 minutes
after closing, as programmed)
Audible-on-Schedule Enable (if optioned) 1-second beep every minute
Test Mode in Progress 1-second beep every minute
During Audible Walk Test Pulsating 1-second-on, 1-second-off
When a sensor is activated during the walk test Steady tone
Action Menus
Operation of the system is based on selecting a course of action from menu items that appear on a
series of screens known as Action Menus. Provided the associated BA protection is off, entering a valid
ID code causes the first of four Action Menus to be displayed.
The Action Menus are the starting point for performing all operations other than turning the system
off. Selection of a menu item results in the display of another screen. Continue making selections until
the appropriate screen is displayed and the desired course of action has been completed.
The four Action Menus and the explanation for each of the keys at each menu follow on the next page.
20-2
Section 20 - System Operation
Action Menu #1 6. Reset: For resetting the following functions:

1-- < ? a) Alarms – for resetting alarms and comm failure
Enter choice:
conditions.
2-- < Lesson Turn on > --5 b) Tests – for resetting test alarms.
3-- < See alarms Reset > --6 c) Service Mode – for ADT personnel only.
4-- < Quit More > --7 7. More: For selecting the next Action Menu.
Action Menu #2 8. See points: For viewing the status of each point
controlled by this operating panel to determine
1-- < ? Enter choice: whether any points are in an abnormal condition, in
8-- < See points Test > --10 which case the point will be tagged with an identifier
code to pinpoint the abnormality:
Change close time > --11
A Cross – alarm.
9-- < Previous More > --7 C Comm Fail − SIM/PID is not communicating
Action Menu #3 because it is defective or hard ID is incorrect.
Also because there is a problem with the RS-485
1-- < ? Enter choice: bus, or the gateway trunk if the "C" is displayed
12-- < Bypass for a series of points.
History > --14
D Cross and open − sensor is swinging between
13-- < Status Time > --15 alarm and trouble.
9-- < Previous More > --7 M Multiple response.
Action Menu #4 N Normal – displayed only in conjunction with a
bypassed point.
1-- < ? Enter choice: O Open – trouble.
16-- < Sys info ID codes > --18 T Tamper.
17-- < Name pnt/gps Load > --19 X Cross and tamper – alarm and tamper.
Y Open and tamper – trouble and tamper.
9-- < Previous First > --20
Z Cross, open, and tamper – alarm, trouble, and
tamper.
1. ?: Help−a brief explanation of the
items on that Action Menu screen. 9. Previous: Return to the previous Action Menu.
2. Lesson: An introduction into the use of 10. Test: For performing the following tests of BA
operating panels and the availability of help group(s), sensors, and other devices controlled by this
information. operating panel:
3. See alarms: A description of alarms. a) Burglar Groups – For verifying the system can be
turned on. Also for determining the reasons the
a) Type of alarm.
system cannot be turned on. Refer to item 5
b) Point number. (Turn on).
c) Description of point. b) Sensor Points – For testing all system sensors
4. Quit: For exiting the Action Menus without creating an alarm. The results are
(operating panel deactivates). recorded in the history log and can be viewed at
5. Turn on: For turning on one or more of the the operating panel or printed out on a printer.
BA groups. The group(s) can be turned on in c) Bell and Display – For a 30-second test of all
either AWAY or STAY mode. Warnings may be system-sounding devices and for triggering a test
shown of abnormal conditions that may pattern on the display of the operating panel.
prevent the system turn-on. During the bell test, the operating panel sounder
a) AC power is off. operates for 4 seconds, the Test output activates
for 30 seconds, and the local bell relay activates
b) Battery power is low.
for the final 4 seconds.
c) Telco line trouble.
Note: The test pattern shows each line as a
d) Point(s) (are) abnormal. series of 17 rectangles, each formed by dots, with
e) One or more points are bypassed. an arrow at the beginning and end.
f) Interlock On (if used) – selected BA group d) Holdup Devices – For testing holdup devices
cannot be turned on unless predetermined without creating an alarm.
groups are on.
11. Change close time: For quickly changing the
g) ATM Off (if used) – selected BA group temporary closing time of the BA group(s).
cannot be turned on unless predetermined
groups are on.
20-3
12. Bypass: For performing the following d) Open and Close – for entering, checking, or
bypass functions in accordance with the user’s changing the following various schedules
privilege: associated with each BA group:
a) Bypass Points – for bypassing point(s). • Daily Schedules – choice of permanent or
b) See Limits – for determining the number temporary. Permanent schedules allow for
of points that can be bypassed in BA selection of automatic on/off control.
groups. • Schedule Limits – choice of earliest opening
c) VVS – for bypassing vault vibration sensor and latest closing times.
points. Note: Only users with an appropriate privilege
13. Status: For checking that AC power, the level can control scheduling functions.
standby battery, and the telephone lines are 16. Sysinfo: For identifying the firmware level of the
OK. control unit.
14. History: For viewing and/or printing up to 17. Name pnt/gps: For viewing, naming, or changing
500 of the most recent events (alarms, troubles, the name of a protection group or a point. Also for
openings, closings, bypassings, walk test entering complete point data.
results, etc.), including the date and time of the
18. ID codes: For entering, viewing, or changing user
event.
data:
15. Time: For entering, checking, or a) Name of user.
changing the following time-related functions
b) Assignment of user code ID.
for any BA group:
c) Assignment of user control of BA group(s).
a) Current – present time and date.
d) Assignment of user privilege level.
b) Daylight – date of Daylight Saving Time.
c) Holiday – for sequencing through name 19. Load: For ADT personnel.
and date of each holiday in the schedule. 20. First: For returning to Action Menu #1.
Overcoming Operating Panel Program Mode Lockout

The default keycode 1,2,3 should be used unless the customer requests a special 3-digit code. In the
event the customer is locked out of the menu screen because of an unknown code, the original code 1,2,3
can be restored as follows:
Step Action
1 Power down the system.
2 Hold the [#] key depressed while powering up the system.
3 Wait 2 seconds and then let go of the [#] key (the existing parameters for the operating
panel will be replaced by the factory default values, and the 1-2-3 access code will be
restored).
If the contrast level is too high or low, and you can't read the screen, simultaneously press
[0] and [#]. Use the middle two keys to the right of the display, pressing the appropriate key
several times until the screen becomes readable and the contrast level is correct.
4 Select QUIT.
5 Simultaneously press [1] and [8] and then enter 1, 2, 3. This will bring up the parameter
screen.
6 Re-program the operating panel baud rate, group number, and unit number to the proper
values, and if required, change the access code.
7 Select QUIT to exit the parameter menu.
When the control unit power switch is turned Off, the time of day and the date, remain at the same settings
as when power was removed. Present time and date must be entered anew at the operating panel; these
values cannot be downline loaded.
20-4
Section 20 – System Operation
Correcting COMM FAIL Condition Due to Change of Panel Group Number
If the operating panel group number is changed, the control unit will detect a communications failure
on the old panel group number and a COMM FAIL message will occur. To clear the condition, proceed
as follows:
Step Action
1 Power down the system and then power it back up. The control unit will interrogate for the
new address and store it in memory.
2 Reset the COMM FAIL condition by using Reset, Alarms at the operating panel.
Using the ✳ or # to Trigger a Panic

The FOCUS 200 PLUS provides the capability to trigger an audible or silent panic using either the ✳ or
# key. The key must be pressed and held for 4 seconds to trigger the panic. Additionally, there is an
option for selecting whether the panic is transmitted to the CCC. All programming for this feature is
done only via the ADEMCO Compass Downloading software.
Operating Panel Modes

The operating panel can be placed into three other modes besides the normal operating mode. These
include:
• Service Mode This mode is used when installing or working on the system, and is initiated
by entering a Service Code.
• Training Mode This mode allows the operating panel to be used to train customers and ADT
personnel on the operation of the system.
• Annunciator Mode This mode is used when a facility is not ready to be occupied or the system is
not totally functional.
Service Mode
The Service mode is used when installing or working on the FOCUS 200 PLUS system and is initiated
by entering a Service Code. Operation in the Service mode is characterized by the following
occurrences:
• The operating panel becomes activated and remains activated for 4 minutes. All other operating
panels display ADT SERVICE PERSONNEL WORKING ON SYSTEM. (While in the Service
mode, pressing any operating panel key causes another 4-minute activation period.)
• An ADT-On-Premises signal is transmitted to the central station.
• Customer ID codes are locked out.
• The tamper on the control unit is bypassed.
• Any of the BA groups can be turned on with the cabinet tamper bypassed.
• The bell function is disabled except for BA alarms or test functions. Any point that is programmed
as a Remote Bell Point will not operate for a BA alarm or during testing.
• Any output point that has been programmed as a Service mode output point activates and will
remain activated for the duration of the Service mode.
• The Sonalert is disabled at all operating panels.
• A bypass signal is not transmitted to the CCC if a point is bypassed.
• The Recycling Exit Delay is disabled.
Notes:
• The Service Code has all of the basic user privileges plus those additional privileges that have
been allocated to the Service Code.
• Terminate the Service mode by selecting Reset, ADT Off at the operating panel. An ADT Off
Premises signal will be transmitted to the Customer Care Center, the cabinet tampers are
automatically unbypassed, and the system will be restored to normal operation.
20-5
Training Mode
For training purposes, the selector buttons and keypad of one or more operating panels can be
temporarily deactivated for a trainee, while those on the instructor's panel remain active. The trainee
screens reflect the messages on the instructor’s operating panel, allowing the instructor to demonstrate
the usage of the operating panel to the person being trained, without the lessons being interrupted by
someone touching the selector buttons or the keypad.
The instructor's operating panel must have a valid communication address (group 0 or 1, and unit 0-7).
The trainee panels must have the same group number as the instructor's panel and a unit number of
"✴."
To activate the training mode, perform the following steps at the trainee operating panel:
Step Action
1 Press the [1] and [8] keys simultaneously.
2 Enter 1, 2, 3. The parameter screen will be displayed.
3 Press the change button and select the Unit/Mode option.
4 Enter [✴] as the new number in place of the existing unit number.
To exit the Training mode, select a valid unit number in place of the ✴. The operating panel will revert
to normal operation.
Annunciator Mode
The Annunciator mode is used when a facility is not ready to be occupied or the system is not totally
functional. This mode deactivates the selector buttons, and the screen displays only alarm and trouble
messages accompanied by the sounder. The keypad, however, will remain active locally without having
any interaction with the control unit.
To activate the Annunciator mode, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Press the [1] and [8] keys simultaneously.
2 Enter 1, 2, 3. The parameter screen is displayed.
3 Press the change button and select the Unit/Mode option.
4 Enter 8 as the new number in place of a unit number.
5 Power down and then power up the system again.
The operating panel may be programmed for normal operation at a future date by entering the
programming mode and entering a valid unit number.
ID Codes
ID codes are needed to turn the BA groups on and off and to perform most other functions. On a new
installation, the ID codes are entered into the control unit database along with the user name, the
privilege level, and the BA groups that the code can access. This can be done by downline loading the
data or by entering it via an operating panel with the system in the Service mode. Thereafter, any
additions or deletions can be made at any operating panel by someone having an ID code with the
privilege to do so.
There are 255 six-digit ID codes that can be assigned to any system, including Service codes. The first
two digits serve as a user number, and are numbered 01, 02, etc., up to 99.Users 01, 101, and 201 all
share the same user number 01. The last four digits (PIN) identify the access capabilities of the user.
Users with the same user code (first two digits) cannot use the same PIN (last four digits). For example,
user 25's PIN may be 1234; user 125's PIN 3456; and user 225's 5678. User 25 would enter 251234 to
access the system. User 125 would enter 253456. User 225 would enter 255678. Be careful that a
duress code is not inadvertently created. As an example, if user 25's PIN is 1234, then make sure user
125's or 225's is not 1236.
If you are entering a new ID code, the last four digits must be entered alongside the first two digits of
the user number. In the event that someone leaves the company, the last four digits should be erased to
invalidate the ID code.
20-6
A new ID code can be assigned in either of two ways:
• By entering a new four-digit number alongside the two digits of the deleted code.
• By entering a four-digit number alongside any unused two-digit user number.
In addition, the following data must be entered for the new ID code:
• The BA group(s) to which the user will have access.
• Each of the eight possible privileges that the user will have.
Bypassing
Bypassing is a means of directing the control unit to ignore any point(s) in the system, and therefore
inhibit any output commands that would ordinarily be activated. Consequently, a bypassed input point
that goes into an alarm, trouble, tamper, or comm fail condition will not cause a signal to be sent to the
CCC, nor will it cause the local bell to ring or cause any output to activate.
One or more points can be bypassed by entering appropriate commands at the operating panel provided
that:
• The bypassing option has been activated for those points.
• The person(s) doing the bypass have been assigned an ID code with the privilege of bypassing that
particular type of point (BA, FA, SPV, HUA or special).
Control Unit and BA Group Options

There are several programmable options associated with the control unit and the BA groups. Many of
the control unit options affect all BA groups. A BA group is defined as an enclosed area that is
protected by burglar alarm sensors, whose protection on/off status is controlled from an operating
panel. The BA points in the system can be divided among as many as eight BA groups.
A separate operating panel can be used to control each BA group; or multiple groups can be controlled
from the same operating panel. Each BA group is given a name by the owner, and this information is
downline loaded into the control unit at the time of installation, along with the BA group options and
other data.
An opening and closing schedule can be assigned to a BA group, if the customer wants to he alerted in
the event of:
• An irregular opening (certain persons entering the BA group before a specified opening time).
• A failure to close (BA group has not been closed by a specified closing time).
Other than these instances, there is no reason for assigning opening/closing schedules, nor is there any
UL requirement for assigning them. An opening and/or closing time is required for certain types of CCC
service.
The following is a list of the options:
Option Function
Code 3 Temporal This provides for the sounding of the Code 3 temporal signal in the event of
Son/Bell a fire alarm (1/2-sec on, 1/2-sec off for 3 seconds followed by 1 second of
silence). If selected, the Code 3 signal will sound at each operating panel.
Disable Recycle This disables the recycling delay for all groups. For an explanation of how
Delay the delay works, see Recycling Exit Delay later in this section.
CS Off Command This permits a BA group to be turned off via command from CentraScan.
Enable
Auto Bell Test This causes the external bell (connected via the bell relay or Bell PID) to
"bing" at the end of any BA Group exit delay period, to verify that the bell is
working. It is intended to satisfy compliance with UL 609 requirements for
Local systems. If the system is transmitting closings to the CCC then, the
bell will "bing" at the end of the BA exit delay if the closing has been
acknowledged by the CCC (known as "ringback"), or when the
acknowledgement is received after the exit delay has expired.
Telco Audible A Telco Fail/AC Fail condition is displayed and the sounder will go on, on
all operating panels whenever a phone line failure occurs.
20-7
Option Function
Turn On STAY The system provides an option to turn on the group(s) in the STAY mode.
Mode When the group is turned on in STAY mode:
• All Movable Instant PIR (MIP) points are bypassed.
• All Movable Instant Stay (MIS) and Movable Delay Stay (MDS) points
will not transmit messages to the central station.
NOTE: STAY mode is enabled via the ADEMCO Compass Downloader.
Bypass Point Ordinarily, if there is a closing of a BA group with one or more BA points
Reporting bypassed, a BA Group Bypass Closing message (BA1, BA2, BA3, etc.) is
transmitted to the CCC as part of the closing message (not for SANS).
Selecting this option activates a unique point bypass/unbypass reporting
scheme:
• For BA Points−Each BA point that has been bypassed is reported to the
CCC when the associated BA group is closed. When the BA group is
turned to Day Set, all of the points automatically become unbypassed,
and an unbypass message is transmitted for each point. (This
automatic unbypassing will not occur if a keyswitch is used or if Auto-
Off control is being used for the BA group; however, an unbypass signal
will be transmitted anyway.)
• For non-BA Points (FA, HUA, SUPV, output points, etc.) −A separate
bypass message is transmitted for each point at the time that the
bypass is made. The points remain bypassed until they are manually
unbypassed, and an unbypass message is transmitted to the CCC.
Note: These points will not automatically become unbypassed when any BA
group is opened.
Close Condition There are four choices for this option that determine whether the BA groups
can be closed when there is a Telco Fail or AC Fail condition:
Telco Fail and BA Group Closing
AC Fail Condition
AC Fail The BA groups can be turned to Nite Set during
AC Fail, but not during Telco Fail.
Telco Fail The BA groups can be turned to Nite Set during
Telco Fail, but not during AC Fail. Use this only
if backup signaling (e.g., bell, backup dialer, etc.)
is available in case a burglary occurs.
AC or Telco Fail The BA groups can be closed during AC Fail or
Telco Fail conditions.
AC or Telco Fail The BA groups cannot be closed during AC Fail
or Telco Fail conditions.
Force Auto-Arm This permits the system to perform an auto-arm of a BA Group when an off-
w/BA Off-normal normal condition is present on the system.
Condition NOTE: This feature can only programmed via the ADEMCO Compass
No Close (15/15, As the scheduled closing time nears, the operating panel sounder beeps at a
30/5) rate of once per minute. This is the Close Time Reminder, and reminds the
user to get ready to close. If the BA group is not closed, the sounder changes
to a continuous tone and starts the Close Time Warning period. This alerts
the user that the closing time has passed and a No Close signal will be sent
to the CCC unless the BA group is closed before this time period ends. Two
choices are available for the reminder and warning periods:
• 15 minutes for the reminder and 15 minutes for the warning.
• 30 minutes for the reminder and 5 minutes for the warning.
20-8
Option Function
Closing Trouble This causes the bell to ring for 5 minutes if the customer turns the system
Bell on and exits, but fails to close the exit door before the exit delay expires. It
is used to remind customer to re-enter the premises, turn the protection off,
then turn it on again, leave, and close the exit door. Failure to do so will
result in an entry alarm.
Audible on Exit This causes the operating panel sounder to beep once per second during the
exit delay period. This is helpful in reducing the number of false alarms
caused by someone exiting after the exit delay has expired.
Bypass Privilege This permits a user to bypass any BA points that are bypassable.
BA
Bypass Privilege, Similar to the option above, except that this pertains to the capability for
FA/SPV/HU/Special bypassing any non-BA point in the system.
Points Note: Special points are comprised of output points plus those input points
that do not fall into any of the following categories: BA, FA, HUA, or SPV.
Bypass FA/SPV/HU/ This is similar to the Bypass BA 2-man rule option; however, it applies to
Special the bypassing of non-BA points.
(2-Man Rule) Note: Both ID codes must be privileged to bypass these types of points.
Bypass BA This activates a requirement for the entry of two valid ID codes at the same
(2-Man Rule) operating panel within 45 seconds in order to bypass. Upon entry of the
second ID code, the bypass capability is enabled and the points can be
bypassed, provided that:
• Both ID codes are capable of bypassing the points.
• The points have been programmed as being bypassable.
Once exiting the bypass screen, both ID codes must be entered again. If only
one ID code is entered, a message appears that a second ID code be entered.
Bypass Limit This defines the number of BA points that may be bypassed within a BA
group. Any number of points can be specified. The BA group cannot be
armed if the number of programmed bypasses is exceeded.
Change Descriptor This is similar to the Bypass BA 2-Man Rule; however, it applies to
(2-Man Rule) changing the name of any BA group, a point of protection, or a person's
name.
Note: Both persons must have the privilege to change descriptors.
Permanent This is similar to the Bypass BA 2-Man Rule option; however, it applies to
Schedule changing the permanent schedule of any BA group.
(2-Man Rule) Note: Both persons must have the privilege to change permanent
schedules.
Temporary This is similar to the Bypass BA 2-Man Rule option; however, it applies to
Schedule changing the temporary schedule of any BA group.
(2-Man Rule) Note: Both persons must have the privilege to change temporary schedules.
Service To activate the Service mode, the entry of a Service Code must be followed
(2-Man Rule) by a valid customer code, at the same operating panel, within 45 seconds.
Latch Telco Fail This causes the Telco Fail display and the ongoing audible beeps (two beeps
followed by a 1-second pause) at all operating panels to latch until manually
reset. Otherwise, the display and audible will clear automatically when the
fault condition restores.
Sonalert on Open This causes the operating panel sounder to activate for 1 second of every
minute when any BA group is in a scheduled open period, and is used to
remind the user to turn the BA group off.
20-9
Option Function
Passcode This is used in conjunction with access control, whereby the customer
Verification maintains the permanent open/close schedules. If an attempt is made to
Failure from turn a BA group off prior to the scheduled open period by someone who does
Control not have an irregular opening privilege, the control unit will send an
Irregular Opening signal to the CCC along with the user number. This
signal will cause a PVF alarm.
Auto On/Off Level This is used to determine if any form of automatic on/off will be permitted
Command Enable for the BA groups. If selected, the automatic on/off can be programmed, as
required, for each BA group as part of the permanent schedule.
Telco Fail Message This permits suppressing the Telco Fail signal. It is intended to avoid
Inhibit having Telco Fail signals from multiple control units sent in the event that
AC communications are interrupted.
AC Loss Delay This permits delaying the CCC transmission of an AC Fail condition. The
choices are from 0-255 hours in 1-hour increments.
Delayed This is intended to minimize the customer's security-related telephone bills
Open/Close and minimize nonessential CCC signaling. It delays the reporting of non-
Reporting alarm signals, such as openings and closings that occur within scheduled
time periods, until another transmission is made, at which time all
openings and closings occurring that day are included.
If there is no other transmission, the opening and closing information is
sent between midnight and 4:15 AM, with the time of transmission tied to
the customer's instrument number. For example, an instrument number of
62 corresponds to 62 minutes (1 hour and 2 minutes) past midnight. The
opening and closing data would be transmitted at 1:02 AM of the next day.
The delayed transmission replaces a daily test signal as a means of
ensuring that the telco line is intact.
Sensor Walk LED This is intended to prevent someone from learning the coverage pattern of a
Disable SIM sensor. The LED will only light when walk testing or when in the
Service mode.
Diagnostic Xmit This is intended for use with a sensor that has a self-diagnostic capability.
Enable If the sensor has a decrease in false alarm immunity, a transmission is
made to the CCC to signal this condition.
Group 0 Keypad BA Ordinarily, an operating panel displays the on/off status of the BA 1 group.
On/Off Display Anyone can walk over to any operating panel and keep pressing More to
Inhibit. view the on/off status of each of the remaining BA groups, without having to
enter a valid ID code.
Where, for purposes of security, the customer does not want the on/off
status of one or more BA groups to be displayed, this option allows the
selected BA group to be skipped and the display to show the status of the
next BA group not having a Display Inhibit. This option applies to all
panels that have been programmed for communication group 0 on the RS-
485 bus.
The status of each inhibited BA group can still be viewed at any operating
panel that has been programmed for communication group 1. This option
does not affect operation once a valid code has been entered.
Group 1 Keypad BA This differs from the previous option only in that it pertains to inhibiting
On/Off Display the display of BA group on/off status at operating panels programmed for
Inhibit communication group 1.
20-10
Option Function
BA Group Off This option prevents the selected BA group from being turned off by a
Disable person with a coded card/key, and can only be set from an operating panel.
The operating panel can be used either in the normal manner for system
control or in conjunction with an ACIU or with a BA Access output point.
The primary purpose of this option is to prevent someone who finds a coded
card/key outside of an access-controlled area from using it to gain access
and thereby turn off this BA group. The operating panel used for turn-off
should be installed inside of the protected area.
This can also be used to isolate BA group(s) from those being used with
access control, such as when a second BA group is within the BA group
being accessed via a card/key reader.
Entry Delay This applies to installations where the operating panel for the BA group is
located inside of the protected area. The delay permits someone opening the
premises enough time to walk to the operating panel and turn the
protection to Day Set without creating an alarm. The delay starts when the
entrance door is opened and ends when the protection is turned off. The
sounder in the operating panel emits a steady tone during the delay period.
The delay time is selectable from 0 to 255 seconds, in 1-second increments.
UL The entry delay must not exceed 45 seconds for UL installations.
Option Function
Exit Delay This applies to installations where the operating panel for the BA group is
located inside of the protected area. The delay permits someone leaving the
premises at closing enough time to turn the protection to Nite Set and walk
to the exit door and close it, without creating an alarm. The delay time is
selectable from 0 to 255 seconds, in 1-second increments.
Exit Fail This is used to make sure that someone exits the BA group after turning the
protection to Nite Set, and can only be used if the operating panel is located
inside of the protected area. An Exit Fail signal is transmitted to the CCC if
the customer turns the protection to Nite Set, but fails to trip a movable
delayed sensor in the exit path within the exit delay period.
One Exit This causes the exit delay period for the respective BA group to end when a
movable delayed sensor is restored or the exit door is closed, after the BA
group is changed to Nite Set. This option can only be used where:
• There is only one movable delayed sensor in the exit path, and the
customer will pass through that protection only once when exiting.
• The customer has specifically requested it, and fully understands the
operation and false alarm potential that exists if someone wants to go
back for something they forgot after exiting.
One Open Ordinarily, the BA group may be repeatedly turned on and off as long as it
is within the scheduled opening and closing time. This option permits only
one BA group on-to-off transition per schedule (maximum of 2 per day if two
schedules are used). This prevents someone from opening a BA group after
it has been closed until the next scheduled opening time is reached.
Off (2-Man Rule) This prevents the BA protection for the selected BA group from being
turned off unless two valid ID codes are entered on the same operating
panel within 45 seconds. Once the BA group is off, the entry of any valid ID
code for the group will activate the operating panel.
20-11
Option Function
Irregular Off (2- This option prevents the turning off of the selected BA group outside the
Man Rule) scheduled open window (e.g., re-opening the same day after the scheduled
closing, opening earlier than the scheduled opening, or opening on a day
that the BA group is not scheduled to be opened) unless two valid ID codes
are entered at the same operating panel within 45 seconds. Only one ID
code is needed to open inside of a schedule window.
BA Shed This allows the control unit to shed BA protection for the BA group after 4
hours of AC power failure. This permits reserving the standby batteries for
FA devices to ensure 24 hours of FA standby time. The selective shedding
also allows preserving the BA protection for BA group with a vault or safe
by electing not to shed the protection for a power outage beyond 4 hours.
Bell Delay This is used to delay local annunciation of alarms for a BA group during
Nite Set for up to 20 minutes. It applies to both the operating panel sounder
and the local bell. Messages to the CCC, however, are sent without the
delay. The delay is automatically cancelled if a telco failure occurs.
Bell Cutoff This determines the length of time the local BA bell and operating panels
will annunciate. The cutoff time can be any number of whole minutes from
0 to 255.
• In UL installations, the BA bell ring time should be at least 15 minutes.

UL • The Bell Delay may not be used in UL Burglary alarm systems.
Option Function
SANS This represents the type of CCC monitoring that will be provided for the BA
group. Refer to the System Communication section for an explanation of the
types of services that are available.
Interlock On This prevents the protection for a BA group being from being turned on
unless a specific combination of BA groups has been turned on. As an
example, it can be used to ensure that the vault protection has been turned
on before the bank perimeter protection can be turned on.
Schedule Lock This prevents the BA group from being turned off outside the scheduled
open time period. Use this option only on safes, vaults, or other high-
security areas where the operating panel is located outside the protected
area.
ATM Off This is primarily an Automatic Teller Machine (ATM) option. It prevents
the protection for a BA group from being turned off unless the protection is
on for specified BA group(s). Typically, it is used to prevent more than one
ATM from being turned off at any given time.
Recycling Exit Delay
UL Recycling Exit Delay may not be used on UL Burglary alarm systems.
A Recycling Exit Delay has been incorporated into FOCUS 200 PLUS to minimize the possibility of
creating a false alarm when someone turns the protection On, exits, and then returns to get something
that was left behind.
20-12
The Recycling Exit Delay operates as follows:
The BA group is turned on to start the programmed exit delay, and a 10-minute time window is
started. During this time window, an alarm from a movable instant or delayed point from any group in
exit delay automatically recycles all groups in exit delay back to their full exit delay time. This means
that the full exit delay is usually in effect when the person exits, and the delay is recycled to start anew
when that person returns and opens the door again. The exit delay also recycles for each movable point
that is tripped by the person returning.
The recycling of the exit delay can occur any number of times during the 10-minute time window. At
the end of the 10-minute time window, the exit delay will unconditionally start one last time. If the
door is not closed by the end of this last exit delay, a trouble-closing signal will be sent to the CCC.
If the "audible on exit" option was selected for the BA group being turned on, the operating panel (and
Remote Sonalert output point) beeps once per second to annunciate the exit delay period. This exit
delay annunciation is interrupted during the time that a movable delayed point in that BA group is in
alarm, and the sounder goes on steady during the time that a movable instant point of that BA group is
in alarm. In each case, the annunciation resumes when the point restores.
The Recycling Exit Delay is automatically disabled whenever the system is in Service Mode.
Alarm/Trouble Memory
There are 80 memories that serve to store off-normal conditions for each input point in the system, as
well as to store system trouble conditions. Once stored in memory, the contents remain stored until the
off-normal condition has been restored to normal and a RESET command has been entered at the
operating panel. The following is a listing of the memories and an explanation of the function:
Memory Type Function
BA Group There are 64 separate burglar alarm memories, eight for each BA group.
Memories Four memories of each BA group store the first four off-normal conditions
that are detected during Day Set, and the other four memories store the
first four off-normal conditions that occur during Nite Set. The off-normal
conditions include point in alarm as well as the occurrence of a trouble,
tamper, or comm-fail condition.
Holdup Memory Stores the first four holdup points for which an alarm is detected.
Fire Alarm Memory Stores the first four fire points for which an alarm is detected.
Supervisory Stores the first four supervisory points for which an alarm is detected.
Memory
Trouble Memory Stores the first four of the following events that occur:
• Holdup Point - comm fail, tamper, or open lasting more than 1 minute
if using holdup suspicion option.
• Fire Alarm Point - open, tamper, or comm fail condition.
• Supervisory Point - open, comm fail, or tamper.
• Operating Panel - comm fail.
• Janitor Keyswitch Point - open, tamper, or comm fail.
• BA Keyswitch Point - comm fail.
• Remote Bell Point - cross, open, or comm fail. Cross indicates AC fail for
4 hours; open indicates low battery.
• Remote Power Supply Point - cross, open, or comm fail. Cross indicates
AC fail; open indicates low battery.
If a given type of memory becomes filled, it will not store a new alarm unless one of the alarms being
stored is reset.
20-13
Control Unit Interpretation of Input Point Status & SIM Output Point Status
Point NC Option = NO (1) Point NC
Input Point Option = YES (2) Point Bypass (4) Diagnostic
Point Comm. Point Tamper
Assignment Cross Open Cross or Open Failure (3) Test
NS DS NS DS NS DS NS DS NS DS Bypass Unbypass
Fire FA FA FT FT FT FT FT FT FB (5) FU (5) FW
Supervisory SS SS ST ST SS SS ST ST ST ST SB (5) SU (5)
Holdup HA HA HT (6) HT (6) HA HA HT HT HT HT HB (5) HU (5)
Holdup Special HT (7) HA (8) HT (6) HT (6) HT (7) HA (8) HT HT HT HT HB (5) HU (5)
Ambush Start HA (9) HA (9) HT HT HA (9) HA (9) HT HT HT HT UB (5) UU (5)
Ambush End HT HT HT HT HT HT UB (5) UU (5)
BA Fixed BA BT BA BT BA BT BA BT BA BT BB (17) UU (5)
BA Fixed Local (18) (18) BA BT (18) (18) BA BT BA BT BB (17) UU (5)
BA Movable Instant BA (11) BA BT BA (11) BA BT BA BT BB (17) UU (5) BW
Day Annunciation
BA Movable Delayed BA (13) (11) BA BT BA (13) (11) BA BT BA BT BB (17) UU (5) BW
Chime
BA Movable Delayed BA (13) (11) BA BT BA (11) BA BT BA BT BB (17) UU (5) BW
Chime
BA Vault Vibration BA (14) BT (11) BA BT BA (14) (11) BA BT BA BT BB (17) BU (10) BW
Sensor
BA Keyswitch OP CL UA UT UA UT UA UT UB (5) UU (5)
BA Janitor Keyswitch J1 (15) J1 (15) UA UT UA UT UA UT UB (5) UU (5)
BA End Delay UA UT UA UT UA UT UB (5) UU (5)
BA Blocklock OP UA UT UA UT UA UT UB (5) UU (5)
Remote Bell UT (16) UT (16) UT (16) UT (16) UA UT UA UT UB (5) UU (5)
Remote Power Supply UT (16) UT (16) UT (16) UT (16) UA UT UA UT UB (5) UU (5)
SIM Gateway Output UA UT UT UT UB (5) UU (5)
Point
BA Burglar Alarm FA Fire Alarm HU Holdup Alarm Unbypass SU Supervisory Unbypass
BB Burglar Alarm Bypass FB Fire Alarm Bypass JI Janitor In (key inserted) SW Supervisory Diagnostic
BT Burglar Alarm Trouble FT Fire Alarm Trouble JO Janitor Out (key removed) UA Untyped Alarm
BU Burglar Alarm Unbypass FU Fire Alarm Unbypass NS Nite Set UB Untyped Bypass
BW Burglar Alarm Diagnostic FW Fire Alarm Diagnostic OP Opening UT Untyped Trouble,
CL Closing HA Holdup Alarm SB Supervisory Bypass Tamper, or Comm Fail
DS Day Set HB Holdup Alarm Bypass SS Supervisory Alarm UU Untyped Unbypass
EA Entry Alarm HT Holdup Alarm Trouble ST Supervisory Trouble
Note: Each transmission to central station includes a tag that specifies cause of alarm or trouble (e.g., cause of trouble
as identified open, tamper, or comm fail).
NOTES:
1. Typically used for sensor with transfer contacts. 10. Transmitted automatically at opening if using bypass
2. Typically used for sensor with break-only contacts. point reporting.
3. Any SIM point with a tamper. 11. Condition is disregarded by control unit.
4. Only with bypass point reporting option. 12. Causes local audible only.
5. Bypass and unbypass signals transmitted as event occurs. 13. After entry delay.
6. Open must be more than 1 minute if using suspicion 14. Alarm only if BA1 is Nite Set.
option. 15. Becomes JO (Janitor Off} when key removed.
7. All BA groups (except BA1) are Nite Set, otherwise no 16. Cross = AC fail. Open = low battery.
transmission. 17. Transmitted automatically at closing if using bypass point
8. Any BA group (except BA1) is Day Set, otherwise no reporting.
transmission. 18. Local annunciation only; no CS transmission.
9. Alarm only after 4-1/4 minutes; inside of ambush schedule
and ambush end not activated.
20-14
S E C T I O N 2 1
Testing the System

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ About Testing the System ♦ Testing the Printer
♦ Operating Panel Tests ♦ Finishing the Installation
♦ Local Tests ♦ Instructing the Customer
♦ Transmission Tests
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
About Testing the System

To ensure proper operation of the FOCUS 200 PLUS system, we recommend that you test periodically
all devices within the system. The test results can be printed, displayed, or audibly annunciated. Prior
to testing protection groups and/or points, turn off the BA groups containing those points to be tested.
Also, be sure the customer is aware of the need to perform the tests periodically.
The tests are divided into three separate areas:
• Operating Panel Test: Tests the operating panel's keys, display, and sounder.
• Local Tests: Test the devices without transmitting signals to the Customer Care Center (CCC).
• Transmission Tests: Test the devices in normal operating mode whereby the system annunciates
locally and transmits the signals to the CCC.
Use the Sensor points test to verify the location of each RF transmitter for proper transmissions.
Operating Panel Tests

These tests are for testing the keypad and the screen for proper operation. They are intended primarily
for factory use, but can be done at any time in the field.
To test the keypad:
Step Action
1 Enter the operating panel test mode by pressing the [1] and [8] keys simultaneously. The
system displays the operating panel and system information.
2 Once "WAIT" is displayed, enter the operating panel code (1, 2, 3). The system displays the
operating panel and system information.
3 Press the firmware level (top right-hand) selector button.
4 Press the keypad keys. The number or character of each key pressed will appear in the
center of the display screen, one at a time.
5 Press Quit to return to the operating panel and system information screen.
6 Press Quit again to return the normal operation screen.
To test the LCD display:

Step Action
1 Enter the operating panel test mode by pressing the [1] and [8] keys simultaneously. The
system displays the operating panel and system information.
2 Once "WAIT" is displayed, enter the operating panel code (1, 2, 3). The system displays the
operating panel and system information.
21-1
Step Action
3 Press the Test LCD selector button. All the pixels on the display screen light up.
4 Press any key. The screen goes blank.
5 Press any key. All alphabetic characters and numbers are displayed.
6 Press any key. The keypad test screen is displayed.
7 Press Quit to return to the operating panel and system information screen.
8 Press Quit again to return the normal operation screen.
Local Tests
The local tests are typical of a local-only system because they do not involve the CCC. Perform a system
test by activating each sensor, in turn, and verifying that the alarm condition is properly displayed on
the operating panel(s), and that the panel sounder functions properly. Indicate the results on the
appropriate ADT form. Inspect the system performing the various tests and battery check. If problems
are encountered, troubleshoot and repair as needed.
Before performing the Burg pts audibly test (described in Additional Test Options), all points to be
tested in this mode must be bypassed.
Enter the Service Code and then proceed as follows:

< Lesson Turn on > Select More.
< Quit More >

< See points Test > Select Test.
< Change close time >
< Previous More >
<? Test: The Test Screen is displayed.

Burglary groups > Select Burglary groups to test a particular BA Group.
Sensor points > Select Sensor points to test particular types of points within a BA
< Quit More > Group.
Select More to display additional test options (Bell & Display and
Burg points audibly).
When any of the Local Tests are selected, the sensitivity of the RF receiver is reduced by approximately
50%, if RF points are programmed in the system.
Burglary Groups
<? Test which grp: If test Burglary groups was selected, this screen is displayed.
BA Group 1 > Select the second key down on the right-hand side to initiate the
< Previous Next > test for the BA group displayed and to show the test results.
< Quit > Select Previous to select the previous BA group.
Select Next to select the next BA group.
Select Quit to return to the Test Screen.
21-2
Section 21 – Testing the System
Sensor Points
<? Sensor Type? If test Sensor points was selected, this screen is displayed.
Burglar > Select Burglar to test burglar points in a particular BA group.
< Supervisory Fire > Select Fire to test fire points in the system.
< Quit Holdup >
Select Supervisory to test supervisory points in the system.
Select Holdup to test holdup points in the system.
At the next prompt, select the BA group, if applicable.
At the next series of prompts, select More, More, More, Start
Test. Then activate all sensors that require testing (open/close
doors and windows, walk in front of motion detectors, etc). To see
the results, view the history log.
NOTE: The operating panel beeps once every minute until the test
is reset.
Select Quit to return to the Test Screen.
Additional Test Options

<? Test: If More was selected at the first Test Screen this screen is
Bell & display > displayed.
Burg pts audibly > Note: For the Burg pts audibly test to operate correctly, all
< Quit Previous > points being tested must be bypassed before performing the test.
Select Bell & display to test output points programmed as Bell
and to test the operating panel’s display. During the 30-second bell
test, the operating panel sounder operates for 4 seconds, the Bell
output point (if used) activates for 30 seconds, and the local bell
relay activates for the final 4 seconds.
Select Burg pts audibly and then activate all sensors that require
testing (open/close doors and windows, walk in front of motion
detectors, etc). The activation of each sensor should cause the
operating panel sounder to annunciate.
Transmission Tests
These tests are performed with the system in a normal mode of operation. That means that the system
produces alarm and trouble indications locally and also transmits the appropriate signal to the CCC.
Be sure the customer and the CCC are aware that these tests are being conducted so that the police or
fire department is not dispatched.
To perform the transmission tests, proceed as follows:
Step Action
1 Notify the CCC before starting the transmission tests.
2 Plug the modular telco line plugs into the respective RJ31X Jacks.
3 Cause an alarm condition from each point designated burglar, fire, supervisory, and holdup,
and restore each point.
4 Cause a trouble condition from each of the above points, and restore the trouble.
5 During the course of transmission, while performing either Step 3 or 4, lift the receiver of
any telephones connected on the same phone line to determine (by the absence of a dial
tone) that they have been disconnected from the line.
6 If you are using the backup dialer, temporarily disconnect the primary line and verify
signaling over the secondary line.
7 Verify that all signals have been received at the CCC.
8 Notify the CCC that the tests have been completed.
21-3
Testing the Printer

To test the printer, proceed as follows:
Step Action
1 Enter the Service Code to display Action Menu 1.
2 Select More twice to display Action Menu 3.
3 Select History to display the History Screen.
4 Select On printer.
5 Select Last 60 events.
6 Select Start Print.
7 Verify that the printer is printing the last 60 events.
8 Select Continue and Previous twice to exit.
Finishing the Installation

To finish the installation, proceed as follows:
Step Action
1 Exit the Service mode, and select Reset ADT off.
2 Put all forms, which must be stored with the control unit, inside the front cover of the
cabinet.
3 Close and lock control unit cabinet.
4 Check that an instruction label is included on the back of each operating panel installed.
Instructing the Customer

Instruct the customer in the use of the operating panel, including the availability of the help screens.
Give the customer the FOCUS 200 PLUS User Guide.
21-4
S E C T I O N 2 2
Specifications
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ Electrical/Mechanical Specifications ♦ Approvals
♦ Installation Criteria
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Electrical/Mechanical Specifications
AC Transformer
For Secondary Wire Runs
Up to 10’ in Length 120V, 60 Hz (Primary)
18V, 60 Hz, 50VA, 72VA, or 75VA (Secondary)
Battery (standby)
Type 12VDC Sealed lead-acid battery
50VA Transformer 7AH min. - 24AH max.
72VA Transformer 7AH min. - 34.4AH max.
75VA Transformer 7AH min. - 34.4AH max.
Note: Use the 75VA transformer for installations in Canada.
Charge Voltage to Battery

Float Charging Voltage 13.65VDC (nominal)
Fuse (FS) PTC Resetable Fuse (nonreplaceable)
Low-Battery Signal 12.0VDC (nominal)
Low-Battery Cutoff 9.8VDC
Control Unit Power Output to RS-485 Buses

Nominal with AC Connected 13.65VDC
Max. Current 1.0A (Actual allowed is conditioned on
Standby Battery capacity provided; see below)
Fuses Fl (RS-485 #1) and F2 (RS-485 #2) PTC Resetable Fuse (nonreplaceable)
Maximum RS-485 Bus Load Current

(Standby Condition)
4-Hr. (7AH Battery) 1.0A
24-Hr. (34.4AH Battery) 1.0A
72-Hr. (34.4AH Battery) 132mA
22-1
Installation Criteria
Control Unit
Current Draw
Standby 300mA
Alarm 440mA
Temperature Range 32°F (0°C) to 120°F (49°C)
Dimensions 18" H x 14-1/2" W x 4.3" D
Maximum Cable Runs
RS-485 Bus #1 4000 Feet
RS-485 Bus #2 4000 Feet
SIM Gateway Trunk 1000 Feet
PID Gateway Trunk (TB2 plus TB3) 1000 Feet
Branch Cable for PID and SIM Sensors 100 Feet
SIM Loop Trunk 2000 Feet
Note: RS-485 bus and gateway trunk cable lengths may be less, depending on current loading and
voltage drop considerations.
SIM Gateway
Dimensions with Micro PID Housing 3-1/2" H x 3-1/2" W x 1-5/8" D (8.6cm x 8.6cm x 4cm)
Length of SIM Gateway Trunk 1000 feet (max.)
Gateway Circuit Power Requirement 50ma
Worst Case Voltage @ SIM Gateway 12.lVDC
(End of Standby Period) (8.4VDC)
Worst Case Voltage @ SIM Sensor 12.0VDC
(End of Standby Period) (8.3VDC)
SIM Resistor 33k 5% 1/2w
PID Gateway
Dimensions with Standard PID Housing 9-1/4" H x 5" W x 1-5/8" D (23.5cm x l2.7cm x 4.1cm)
Length of PID Gateway Trunk (TB2 plus TB3) 1000 Feet (max.)
Gateway Circuit Power Requirement 50mA
Minimum Voltage to PID Gateway 12.lVDC
(End of Standby Period) 8.5VDC
Voltage to Farthest PID on Gateway Trunk 12.1VDC (minimum)
Worst Case Voltage to Sensor 11.6VDC
Sensor Current from PID Standard PID 85mA maximum (current limited)
Maximum PID Loop Resistance 900 ohms
PID Supervisory Current 3mA
PID End-of-Line Resistor 3,010 ohms, 1%, 1/2W
PID Loop Off-Normal Retard 500mSec.
Note: With AC power off and the battery fully charged the voltage to a sensor being powered by the
system must be greater than the rated minimal voltage of the sensor.
22-2
Section 22 – Specifications
RF Gateway
Dimensions 4.25” H x 6.44” W x 1.25” D
Gateway Circuit Power Requirement 50mA
Worst Case Voltage @ Gateway 12.1VDC
Tamper
Control Unit Cover included (pry-off kit available for UL listing)
SIM Gateway Cover
PID Gateway Cover (ordered separately)
Operating Panel Cover and pry-off
Printer Interface Unit Cover and pry-off
Approvals
The FOCUS 200 PLUS System has been approved by the following agencies for listing:
• Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
• Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
• Factory Mutual (FM)
• California State Fire Marshall
• Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
The FOCUS 200 PLUS System complies with UL609, UL611, UL864, UL985, UL1023, UL1610,
UL1635, NFPA71, and NFPA72, and will be submitted for approval to various European agencies.
Access Control Interface Unit

Electrical/Mechanical Specifications
The 472270 Access Control Interface Unit is designed to meet the following specifications:
Size 7-1/4" x 4-1/4" (18.4cm x 10.8cm)
Housing 472852 Housing Unit
Operating temperature range 32°F (0°C) to 120°F (49°C).
Power required 12.5VDC @ 60mA (includes float charge for standby
battery)
Nominal operating voltage 12VDC
Standby battery 12VDC, 0.8AH
Max. cable distance to reader/strike 150 feet
Max. current to strike 550mA
Approvals for the ACIU
The Access Control Interface Unit has been approved by the following agencies for listing:
• Underwriters laboratories Inc. (UL)
• Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
• Factory Mutual (FM)
• California State Fire Marshall
• Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
The FOCUS 200 PLUS System complies with UL294 (Access), UL864 (Fire), UL1635 (DACT), UL1076
(Proprietary), UL1610 (CCC), and NFPA72, and will be submitted to various European agencies.
22-3
22-4
S E C T I O N 2 3
Equipment
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
In This Section
♦ Basic System Equipment
♦ SIM Sensors
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Basic System Equipment

The ordering information presented below is for basic items such as the control unit, gateways,
operating panels, etc., as well as replacement parts. For ordering information for all other system
equipment such as PID's, communication modules, sensors, etc., see the equipment's installation
instructions.
Where applicable, each item states its current draw in alarm and standby (normal), as follows:
AI = Alarm current and SI = Standby current.
472462A Control Unit

This is the main control and primary power supply for the FOCUS 200 PLUS System. Consists of:
• A steel cabinet, finished in brown, with a key-locked front cover that is hinged.
• Plug-in transformer (18VAC/50VA).
• A 472368 SIM Gateway and the 471943 housing unit.
• A 472402A Backup Dialer.
Cabinet houses a control board/power supply and has space for two separately ordered 12-volt sealed
lead-acid batteries (up to two 17.2AH max.). Control board has facilities for connecting the following
separately ordered items:
• Up to sixteen 471210 Operating Panels.
• Up to eight 471715 (7187-119) Printer Interface Units; only one printer will be supervised.
• Up to eight gateways maximum, consisting of any combination of 472368 SIM and/or 248239 PID
gateways and a maximum of one 472490 RF gateway.
• Up to eight 472270 Access Control Interface Units (ACIU) with card/key readers.
The combined total number of operating panels, printers, ACIUs, and gateways must not exceed 31.
Control unit nominal output voltage on quad trunk is 12VDC. See the Power Requirements section to
determine the need for auxiliary power. AI=440mA, SI=300mA
5422-W Assault Sensor

Assault sensor is required if control unit is mounted outside of protected area. Sensor is installed inside
of control unit housing and serves same function as a lining. Must be wired to tamper terminals of
control unit.
472404 Transformer
18VAC/72VA wired-in transformer, which may be required for some commercial fire installations.
FTA7518ULC Transformer
18VAC/75VA plug-in transformer, which must be used for installations in Canada.
23-1
VISTA-ULAP Attack Proof Kit
Hardware kit required for UL-certified burglary installations.
471210 Operating Panel

Controls all operations of the FOCUS 200 PLUS System; can be used to control all or any combination
of the eight BA groups. Panel is interactive and features a four-line LCD screen and an alphanumeric
keypad. Panel measures 8"w x 4-1/2" H x 1-1/2" D and is normally surface mounted. The keypad can
optionally be mounted on a desk, with a 472382 Desk Stand; or angle wall-mounted, using a 148248
Angle Bracket. The unit may be protected from damage using an STI Model 6550 Widebody Keypad
Protector. Up to 16 keypads may be used with the FOCUS 200 PLUS system. AI=65mA, SI=32mA
472368 SIM Gateway

For accommodating up to 72 SIM input/output points. Consists of a tampered circuit board that is
housed in a separately ordered 471943 Housing Unit (same as for Micro PID). Gateway comes with two
terminal strips: one for connection to the RS-485 bus and one for connecting the gateway trunk,both of
which use 494465 (B6465) Cable. AI=SI=50mA
472366 Sensor Interface Module (SIM)
For interfacing any sensor (that is not already equipped with a SIM) to the SIM Gateway. Also used for
controlling an output function (via + 12V output). Comes with 6" flying leads for marking connections
and a 869706 End-of-Line Resistor (33K ohm, 5%, 1/2W). If SIM cannot be installed in associated
device, it must be installed in a separately ordered 370320 (7032) Junction Box. AI=SI=1mA
For information on sensors with built-in SIM, see SIM Sensors later in this section.
248239 PID Gateway

For accommodating up to 62 PID points. Consists of a circuit board that is housed in a separately
ordered 472352 Housing Unit (standard white PID box). Gateway comes with one terminal strip for the
connection to the RS-485 bus and two terminal strips for connecting a quad trunk, all of which use
494465 Cable. A 248116 Tamper Kit can be ordered separately. AI=SI=50mA
472490 RF Gateway
Consists of a 5800ADT RF Gateway Module and one (1) 5881H RF Receiver. One (1) additional 5881H
RF Receiver may be added to improve reception. RF Gateway - AI=SI=50mA
RF Receiver - AI=SI=60mA
7800ADT LRR Gateway

For allowing the interfacing with the 7845C Long Range Radio to the RS-485 bus. AI=SI=50mA
472491 AC Communicator Module
Used to report signals to a monitoring station using either AC telephone lines, DC telephone lines or
RS-232. AI=SI=250mA
472402A Backup Dialer

Provides an alternate means of communication to the CCC that may be required for some commercial
fire installations AI=15mA, SI=5mA
472425 LIM (Loop Interface Module)

The LIM connects to the trunk of a SIM loop and it functions like a SIM, but it employs a 2-wire
protection loop that is supervised for grounds. Consequently, it can be used for retrofit applications
involving sensors connected to a 2-wire loop, fire alarm applications that require a ground-supervised
loop, and other applications in which a SIM cannot be used for one reason or another.
472430 RS-485 Repeater

The repeater serves as a signal regenerator that can extend the reach of a FOCUS control unit RS-485
bus up to 4000 feet for a single run. Additionally, it can be used for T-tapping the RS-485 bus.
866682 Power Unit

This power unit comes with a built-in supervisory circuit.
23-2
Section 23 – Equipment
477967 Battery, 12-Volt, 7.0AH Sealed Lead-Acid
A 12V, 7.0AH rechargeable battery with male tab terminals. Connects to control or power supply via a
separately ordered 248222 Battery Wire Lead. Two to four batteries may be connected in parallel to
make up a 12V, 14, 21, or 28AH battery. Battery weighs 6.17 pounds (28kg). One 248222 Battery Wire
Lead is required to connect each battery. Refer to the installation section of control unit bulletin for
instruction in calculating battery standby requirements.
248222 Battery Wire Leads

Consists of a set of two wire leads, one red and one black. Used for connection to a FOCUS 200 PLUS
control board or Remote Power Supply. Two sets of the battery wire leads are needed for installing two
batteries in parallel to provide a 12V, 14AH battery configuration. Each wire lead is 13-1/2" long; wire
size is 18 AWG.
471715 Printer Interface Unit

Used to interface a FOCUS Type printer into the system. Consists of a printed wiring board that is
housed in a separately ordered 472352 Housing Unit (PID box). Board has screw terminals for making
connections to the RS-485 bus and for connecting 12VAC power, and a header for making connections
to a 471958 (7187-058) Printer Kit or a 472369 Secure Printer Kit. A jumper plug serves to connect a
user bus-terminating resistor where required. A 443241 Transformer must be ordered separately. A
separately ordered 248116 Tamper Kit is available. AI=SI=0mA
472381 Power Unit and Battery Housing

A cabinet for housing the components needed to provide additional power for the FOCUS 200 PLUS
System. Cabinet comes with a key lock and two keys. Power can be introduced directly to the RS-485
Bus (via the red and black wires) or it can be introduced via a SIM or PID gateway. Cabinet comes with
hardware for mounting internal components, assembly instructions, and basic battery leads. Facilities
are provided for housing the following items, all of which must be ordered separately, as needed:
1. 472372 Power Supply Module (for providing 12VDC power). Module comes with terminals for
connecting an input transformer, making battery connections, connecting the 12V output power,
and for connecting a SIM or PID to supervise the application of AC power. Power supply output
rating is 1.5A if using a 50VA input transformer, and 2.5A if using an 82VA input transformer.
One required.
2. 472404 Transformer (72VA), or 443216 or N8167 Transformer (50VA), or 443218 Transformer
(50VA), or 472391 Transformer (82VA), or 443219 Transformer (50VA, hardwire), as required. One
required.
3. 477967 Battery (up to 4), as required. One set of 248222 Battery Leads with slip-on terminals are
provided. Order another set of leads for each additional battery.
4. 472366 SIM or 471941 Micro PID (for supervision of AC power). One required. If using a Micro
PID, also order the 472352 PID Housing for mounting the Micro PID.
If housing is also to accommodate a gateway, order the following SIM or PID gateway components, as
required, in place of the ones mentioned in Item (4) above:
For a SIM Gateway For a PID Gateway
(1) 472368 SIM Gateway (1) 248239 PID Gateway
(1) 472366 SIM (for supervision) (1) 472352 PID Housing (for PD gateway)
(1) 472352 PID Housing (for SIM gateway) (1) 471941 Micro PD (for supervision)
(1) 471943 Micro PD Housing (for Micro PD)
443241 Transformer
A 120/12V, 20VA, Class II transformer for supplying primary power to the 471715 Printer Interface
Unit.
471943 Housing Unit

The 471943 Housing Unit is used to house one SIM gateway, one Micro PID, or one relay module.
Consists of a white plastic box with hinged cover (3-1/2" L x 3-l/2" W x 1-5/8" D).
23-3
472352 Housing Unit

The 472352 Housing Unit is used to house two SIM ateways, one PID gateway, two Micro PIDS, one
Quad PID, two COPIDS, two keyswitch interfaces, or a printer interface unit. Consists of a white
plastic box with hinged cover (9-1/4" L x 5" W x 1-5/8" D) (23.5cm x 12.78cm x 4.1cm).
248026 Assembly SPDT Relay Module

248309 SIM Relay Module Kit
494465 Quad Trunk Cable (B6465)
Four-conductor trunk cable (off white/sheathed, formerly blue) that is used for the RS-485 bus to
connect gateways, operating panels, and printer interface. It is also used for the gateway trunk.
Suitable for BA and FA applications. Consists of two #19 AWG and two #16 AWG solid conductors;
colors are black, red, yellow, and blue. Length of cable run is limited by a maximum allowable voltage
drop, as explained in the Installation section of the applicable technical bulletin. Cable is resistant to
spread of fire. Supplied in 500-ft. (152m) spools. NEC/UL Listing is FPLR.
494467 Plenum Quad Trunk Cable (B6467)

Four-conductor trunk cable similar to 494465 Cable, but with Teflon (or equivalent) insulation for use
in plenums. Jacket color is red. Cable has fire-resistant and low-smoke-producing characteristics.
Supplied in 1000-ft. (304m) spools. NEC/UL Listing is FPLP.
493494 18/2 FPL White Cable
Cable consists of a white jacket over two #18 AWG solid conductors (yellow and blue). Used for making
branch connections to SIM sensors. Wire is resistant to spread of fire. Supplied in 1000 ft. spools.
NEC/UL Listing is FPL. Splice to Quad Trunk Cable using 809190 Scotchlok #558 connectors.
493493 Plenum FPFP 18/2 Red Cable

Two-conductor #18 AWG solid wire with yellow and blue insulation, similar to 493494 cable, but with
Teflon (or equivalent) insulation for use in plenums. Jacket color is red. Cable has fire-resistant and
low-smoke-producing characteristics. Supplied in 1000 ft. spools. NEC/UL Listing is FPLP. Splice to
quad trunk cable using 809190 Scotchlok #558 connectors.
493492 Wire
Single conductor (#16 AWG solid) wire, in a green jacket, used for making ground connections to the
control unit. Wire is resistant to spread of fire. Supplied in 100 ft. (30.4m) spools. NEC/UL Listing is
CL3.
494470 Cable (B6476-2)

Cable consists of two #18 AWG solid conductors (black and red) for connecting transformer power to
control or remote power supply. Cable comes with white sheath, is fire resistant and is supplied in 500-
ft. (152m) spools.
494481 Cable (6481)
Cable is used for wiring the operating panels to the RS-485 User Bus. Power-Limited Fire Protective
Signaling Circuit Riser Cable (FPLR), Class 3 Inside BA Riser Cable (CL3R). Cable consists of two
twisted pair #22 AWG wires and comes in a 500-foot spool. Jacket is beige and wire colors are black,
red, yellow, and blue.
Note: For other wire, refer to T-7 187 Common Equipment Technical Data Sheet.
148320 Trunk Junction Box
A small white plastic junction box for dressing up the trunk-to-branch cable splices. Snaps over wire
and Scotchlok connectors. Made of a flame-retardant poly-propylene and designed to be used in a
plenum.
370320 Junction Box (7032)
A small gray plastic junction box for housing the stand-alone SIM module when making connections to
a sensor, and for general wire splices.
23-4
Section 23 – Equipment
809190 Connector
Scotchlok #558 electrical connector (T-tap type). Used for solid and stranded wires of 16 to 22 AWO. UL
approved. Supplied in a box of 100.
304662 Ground Clamp (B466)

A clamp that is attached to a 3/4" to 1-1/2" cold-water pipe for CWG connection.
148227 Ground Clamp
A clamp that is attached to a 1/2" to 1" cold-water pipe for CWG connection.
148230 Tag
A tag for attaching to a ground clamp warning subscriber not to remove clamp.
SIM Sensors
472370 FA Pull Station (w/SIM)
Manual FA Pull Box similar to a 455301(5060-S) except has a built-in SIM. It is a dual-action, single-
stage device with keyed reset. Semi-flush mounts in single-gang switchbox (purchased locally) or
surface mounts in 144910 Backbox. May also require 144917 Backplate or 146064 Break Rod, each of
which is listed in T-7 187 FOCUS System Common Equipment Technical Data sheet. Communicates
with the 472368 SIM gateway or built-in SIM loop via a two-wire connection. AI= SI=1mA
472374 Holdup Alarm Switch (W/SIM)
A finger-operated holdup device similar to a 441494 (6913-002) Holdup Alarm Switch, except it has a
built-in SIM. It is a dual-action latching device that requires user to insert a finger and then pull to
activate a holdup alarm. Includes 441495 Reset Tool, which must be used to restore switch to normal
condition. Also includes mounting hardware and a 11’ (3.4m) captive cable. Communicates with the
472368 SIM gateway or built-in SIM loop via a two-wire connection. Al= SI=1mA
472488 Supervised Horn/Strobe SIM
A stand-alone SIM for interfacing various types of horn/strobes (that are not already equipped with a
SIM) to the SIM Gateway. Current of horn or strobe must be less than 300mA each. Also used for
controlling an output function where the +12V output must be supervised. Comes with 6" flying leads
for making horn/strobe connections. Horn/Strobe SIM can be installed in the horn backbox or in a
separately ordered 370320 (7032) Junction Box. AI=SI=3mA
450SIM PIR (w/SIM')
A Sentrol model AP450 Passive Infrared Detector that includes a built-in SIM. It provides 9 curtains of
detection of motion in two jumper selectable ranges, 33 ft. and 50 ft. Recommended mounting height is
6 to 10 ft. Communicates with the 472368 SIM Gateway via a two-wire connection. Refer to the
manufacturer’s installation instructions for further details. AI=5mA, SI=1.78mA
663SIM PIR (w/472366SIM)
A Sentrol model AP633 Passive infrared Detector that includes a standalone SIM (472366) housed in
the same enclosure. When using this device Option 3 MUST be set to NO. It provides the detection of
motion in selectable ranges extending 40 ft.; 80 ft. (wide); and 200 ft. (long range) in 12 selectable
patterns. Features Step Focus Curtain technology. Communicates with the 472368 SIM Gateway via a
two-wire connection. Refer to the manufacturer’s installation instructions for further details.
AI=25mA, SI=13mA
669SIM Dual Optic Technology Ceiling Mount PIR (w/SIM)
A Sentrol model AP669 Passive Infrared Detector that includes a built-in SIM. The unit provides two
independent 180° fields of view, enabling the detector to cover a single 180° area or two 180° areas
(360°). Features 60 ft. diameter 360° coverage, 18 full curtains and can be mounted from a height of 8
to 16 ft. without changing lenses. Communicates with the 472368 SIM Gateway via a two-wire
connection. Refer to the manufacturer’s installation instructions for further details.
AI=11mA, SI=6mA
23-5
429CTAD Smoke Detector (w/SIM)

An ESL Model 429CTAD Smoke Detector that includes a built-in SIM. Includes a pulse/alarm LED
indicator and a self-test feature that is under program control. Utilizes self-diagnostics that provide
complete verification, and CCC annunciation of drifts beyond its sensitivity range. When detector needs
servicing, replace optical block cover (ESL Model 211). Communicates with the 472368 SIM gateway or
built-in SIM loop via a two-wire connection. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for further details.
AI=3mA, SI=1mA
472367 Door Contact (w/SlM)

An ADEMCO or C&K surface-mount white magnetic door contact with built-in SIM. Unit measures 2-
1/2" L x 1/2" W x 1/2" H and is furnished with an 11-foot (3.4m) cable. Communicates with the 472368
SIM gateway or built-in SIM loop via a two-wire connection. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for
further details. AI=, SI=1mA
472392 Door Contact Spacer

An ADEMCO or C&K surface-mount white magnetic door contact spacer. Measures 2-1/2" L x 1/2" W x
1/8" H.
472371S Overhead Door Contact (w/SIM)

An ADEMCO or C&K surface-mount waterproof overhead door magnetic contact with built-in SIM.
Unit measures 4-5/16" L x 1-11/16" W x 3/8" H and is furnished with a 24" armored metal cable.
Communicates with the 472368 SIM gateway or built-in SIM loop via a two-wire connection. Refer to
manufacturer's instructions for further details. AI=, SI=1mA
248302 Fuse Holder Kit

For preventing the "pulling down" of power from a SIM gateway due to a short circuit on one of the
power wires of a branch cable. One required for each sensor where branch cable from SIM gateway
drops to within 6 feet of the floor (e.g., overhead door contact) or where branch cable may be subject to a
short circuit due to jarring or other mechanical stress. Consists of an in-line fuse holder with 6" leads
and an 828928 1/10 Amp fuse.
DV1201 FOCUS-VVS Vault and Safe Vibration Sensor (7187-131, Lot 2)

Used in reverberant or nonreverberant vaults, each sensor has a protection radius of 13’ (4m) on poured
concrete or steel, 6-1/2' (2m) on concrete block, or 3-1/4' (1m) on brick. It can be mounted on wall, floor,
or ceiling. A minimum of three per vault is required to detect structurally borne vibration associated
with penetration attempts by thermic lance, mechanical tools, or explosives. Sensor is enclosed in beige
aluminum cover, and includes cover/pry-off tamper, sensitivity/ambient-noise test point, sensitivity
adjust screw, and terminal strip. Supplied with aluminum mounting plate, all mounting hardware, and
an 880353 Cosmotron VVT-305 Remote Test Oscillator. The remote test oscillator can be powered from
the same SIM used to supervise the alarm contacts. Use 806399 Protection Box to protect the detector
in severe environments. Use a Cosmotron VVM-302 Recess Mounting Box (FB) when the detector is
mounted in a concrete wall.
A minimum of two per safe are required (minimum of three if safe has two doors) to detect structurally
borne vibration associated with penetration attempts. Each sensor has maximum protection radius of
12' (3.6m) when used on an all-steel safe at least 1” (24.4mm) thick or on a concrete-clad safe at least 6"
(152.4mm) thick and free of cracks or seals. May be mounted outside or inside safe. Refer to technical
bulletin T-7187-131 for additional details. AI=, SI=25mA
472372 Power Supply Module

The module comes with terminals for connecting an input transformer, for connecting a battery, for
12VDC output power connections, and for connecting a SIM or PID to supervise the application of AC
power. The power supply output rating is 1.5A when using the 50VA input transformer and is 2.5A
when using the 82VA input transformer.
23-6
Index
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
? ................................................................................ 20-3 Access Control ............................................................ 11-1

24-Hour Alarm ............................................................. 14-9 Access Control Card/Key Readers.............................. 11-8
2-Wire Smoke Detectors ............................................... 4-2 Access Control Interface Unit...................................... 22-3
4142TR........................................................................ 10-1 Access Control Interface Units (ACIU) ........................ 11-1
4208SNF ....................................................................... 6-3 Access Control Options............................................. 11-13
4208U............................................................................ 6-3 Access Control Using Operating Panel ..................... 11-11
4209U............................................................................ 6-3 Access Denied ...................................... 10-4, 11-14, 14-12
4297 Polling Loop Extender ........................................ 6-14 Access Level ............................................................. 11-16
472372 Power Supply Module................................... 13-15 Access/Passcode Schedule Supervision (ACS).......... 8-10
472402A backup dialer.................................................. 8-1 ACIU............................................................................ 11-1
472404 Transformer.................................................... 23-1 ACIU in the CMC Transmission ................................ 11-20
472491 .......................................................................... 9-1 Action Menu #1 ........................................................... 20-3
472491D........................................................................ 9-1 Action Menu #2 ........................................................... 20-3
4-Wire Smoke Detectors ............................................... 4-3 Action Menu #3 ........................................................... 20-3
5800 Series Transmitters ................................... 5-25, 5-26 Action Menu #4 ........................................................... 20-3
5800ADT ..................................................................... 5-22 Action Menus .............................................................. 20-2
5802MN....................................................................... 5-26 Activate When Turned On ......................................... 14-13
5804 ............................................................................ 5-26 Activating the Operating Panel.................................... 20-1
5816MC....................................................................... 5-26 Adding or Changing an ID Code ................................. 19-3
5869 .......................................................... 5-22, 5-29, 14-6 Addressing and Programming the RF Receiver .......... 5-24
5881ENHC ................................................ 5-22, 5-29, 14-6 Addressing the Operating Panels.................................. 3-3
5882H.......................................................................... 5-23 Addressing the PID Gateway ........................................ 5-7
7720P.......................................................................... 10-4 Addressing the Printer Interface Unit........................... 12-3
7720P Programming Tool............................................ 5-29 Addressing the SIM Gateway ...................................... 5-16
7800ADT ..................................................................... 5-26 ADEMCO 472524 printer ............................................ 12-1
7830R.......................................................................... 10-4 Ademco AB12. .............................................................. 2-3
7835C.......................................................................... 10-4 ADEMCO Contact ID Format ........................................ 8-4
7845C Long Range Radio ........................................... 5-26 Ademco No. N6277 Cam Lock...................................... 2-2
7845C PRO Mode ....................................................... 5-29 Adjusting the Contrast Level ......................................... 3-4
7920SE........................................................................ 10-4 ADT 435243 .................................................................. 4-3
ADT SERVICE PERSONNEL WORKING ON
SYSTEM ................................................................. 20-5
A Alarm Events Only (SANS) ......................................... 8-11
Alarm Housing............................................................... 7-5
About Access Control.................................................. 11-1 Alarm in any BA Group..................................... 10-4, 14-12
About Operating the System ....................................... 20-1 Alarm Indicating Devices............................................... 7-5
About the AC Communicator Module ............................ 9-1 Alarm/Trouble Memory.............................................. 20-13
About the Bell Outputs and Auxiliary Relay ................... 7-1 Alarms/Point Status..................................................... 19-5
About the Control Unit ................................................... 2-1 Ambush End................................................................ 14-5
About the FOCUS 200 PLUS System ........................... 1-1 Ambush Schedule ....................................................... 16-4
About the Gateways ...................................................... 5-1 Ambush Start .............................................................. 14-5
About the Hardwired Points........................................... 4-1 Annunciator Mode ....................................................... 20-6
About the History Log.................................................. 12-1 Approvals .................................................................... 22-3
About the J5 Output Triggers ...................................... 10-1 Arming......................................................................... 14-7
About the Operating Panels .......................................... 3-1 Assault Sensor ............................................................ 23-1
About the Real-Time Clock.......................................... 18-1 Assigning Access and Privileges for ACIU ................ 11-18
About the System Communication ................................ 8-1 ATM Off..................................................................... 20-12
AC Communicator Module ................................... 9-1, 23-2 Audible on Exit ............................................................ 20-9
AC Communicator Supervision ..................................... 9-1 Auto Bell Test.............................................................. 20-7
AC Fail......................................................................... 20-8 Auto On/Off ................................................................. 16-4
AC Fail Setting .......................................................... 13-15 Auto On/Off Level Command Enable ........................ 20-10
AC Loss Delay........................................................... 20-10 Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment........................... 10-4
AC Power to the Control Unit .................................... 13-16 Auxiliary Relay .............................................................. 7-1
AC Transformer........................................................... 22-1 Auxiliary Relay Current Load..................................... 13-12
AC Transformer Alarm Current.................................... 13-1 Auxiliary Relay Features ............................................... 7-1
Access Capability ...................................................... 11-17
Index-1
Index
Card/Key Reader Operation........................................ 11-2
B CCC Options Screen................................................... 15-8
CCC Options Screen................................................... 15-8
BA Access ........................................................ 10-3, 14-12
CCC Signaling............................................................. 8-11
BA Bell and Vault Sensor Test ......................... 10-3, 14-11
CDR SCH.................................................................. 11-13
BA Blocklock ............................................................... 14-5
Central Station ................................................. 10-1, 14-10
BA End Delay .............................................................. 14-4 Change close time....................................................... 20-3
BA Fixed........................................................... 10-2, 14-10
Change Descriptor (2-Man Rule), ............................... 20-9
BA Group Assignment................................................. 14-8
Character Entry Screen...................................... 15-2, 15-3
BA Group Memories.................................................. 20-13
Charge Voltage to Battery ........................................... 22-1
BA Group Off Disable................................................ 20-11 Class A Fire Loop.......................................................... 4-4
BA Keyswitch .............................................................. 14-4
Close Condition........................................................... 20-8
BA Lights .......................................................... 10-2, 14-10
Close Time Reminder.................................................. 16-5
BA Off............................................................... 10-2, 14-10
Close Time Timer........................................................ 16-2
BA Remote Sonalert......................................... 10-2, 14-11
Close Time Warning.................................................... 16-5
BA Schedule..................................................... 10-2, 14-10
Closing Trouble Bell .................................................... 20-9
BA Shed. ................................................................... 20-12
Code 3 Temporal Son/Bell. ......................................... 20-7
Backup Dialer .............................................................. 23-2
Comm Fail................................................................. 14-13
Backup Telephone Line Supervision ............................. 8-2
COMM FAIL ................................................................ 20-5
Basic Hardwired Points ................................................. 4-1
Commandable Output Point Interface Devices
Basic System Equipment............................................. 23-1
(COPIDs)................................................................... 5-2
Battery (standby) ......................................................... 22-1
Common BA.............................................................. 14-13
Battery Capacity Worksheet ...................................... 13-15
Communication Screen ...................................... 15-8, 17-2
Battery Charger Supervision ..................................... 13-19
Compatible Detectors for 4-Wire/2-Wire Adapter . 5-21, 6-8
Battery Current Worksheet ........................................ 13-14
Compatible Polling Loop Devices.................................. 6-3
Battery Selection Table ............................................. 13-15
Complement.............................................................. 14-13
Battery Size Limits....................................................... 13-1
Connecting the Telephone Lines................................... 8-2
Battery Supervision ................................................... 13-18
Connecting the Transformer...................................... 13-16
Battery Wire Leads...................................................... 23-3
Construction Mode .................................................... 11-19
Bell ................................................................................ 7-3
Contact ID Event Codes................................................ 8-5
Bell & Display Test ...................................................... 21-3
Control Unit ........................................................ 22-2, 23-1
Bell 1 Output Current Load........................................ 13-12
Control Unit and BA Group Options ............................ 20-7
Bell 2 Output Current Load........................................ 13-13
Control Unit Power Supply Load ............................... 13-10
Bell Box Tamper............................................................ 4-5
Conventions Used in This Manual.................................. xiii
Bell Cutoff.................................................................. 20-12
CS Off Command Enable............................................ 20-7
Bell Delay. ................................................................. 20-12 Current Daylight Saving Screen .................................. 18-2
Bell Output Supervision................................................. 7-5
Current Loads for Each Gateway ................................ 13-2
Bell Outputs................................................................... 7-1
Current Time and Date Screen ................................... 18-1
Bell Outputs Features.................................................... 7-1
Customer Monitoring Center ......................................... 8-1
Bell/Sounder Applications.............................................. 7-4
BR User # Screen ....................................................... 15-6
Burg pts audibly Test................................................... 21-3 D
Button RF .................................................................... 5-25
Bypass......................................................................... 14-8 Data Encrypted Standard .............................................. 9-1
Bypass BA (2-Man Rule) ............................................. 20-9 Daylight Saving Time .................................................. 18-2
Bypass FA/SPV/HU/ Special (2-Man Rule). ................ 20-9 Default point types......................................................... 4-1
Bypass Limit. ............................................................... 20-9 Delayed Open/Close Reporting................................. 20-10
Bypass Point Reporting............................................... 20-8 DES...................................................................... 9-1, 15-8
Bypass Privilege, BA ................................................... 20-9 Descriptors .................................................................. 15-1
Bypass Privilege, FA/SPV/HU/Special Points. ............ 20-9 Diagnostic Xmit Enable ............................................. 20-10
Bypass Screen ............................................................ 15-4 DIP Shunt Numbers ...................................................... 5-8
Bypass:........................................................................ 20-4 Disable Recycle Delay ................................................ 20-7
Bypassing........................................................... 19-5, 20-7 Disarm......................................................................... 14-7
Displaying the History Log........................................... 12-3
DLL aborted ................................................................ 17-3
C Dorado ........................................................................ 11-8
Double-Ended Sensor ................................................. 5-10
Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations.................... 2-2
Downline Loading............................................... 17-1, 19-6
Cabinet Lock ................................................................. 2-2
Downline Loading Signals ........................................... 8-12
cabinet tamper............................................................. 10-1
Duress Signal.............................................................. 19-3
Cabinet tamper..................................................... 2-3, 19-2 Dynamic Signaling Delay ............................................ 5-28
Calling ADT to initiate changes ................................... 17-3
Dynamic Signaling Priority .......................................... 5-28
CANADIAN EMISSIONS STATEMENTS ...................... A-2
Cancel Date............................................................... 11-17
Carbon Monoxide ........................................................ 14-7
Card Readers .............................................................. 11-6
Index-2
Index
Holdup Suspicion ............................................. 10-2, 14-10
E Holiday Schedules....................................................... 16-4
Horn/Strobe...................................................... 10-4, 14-12
Early Open .................................................................. 16-5
Horn/Strobe (Code 3) ................................................ 14-13
Early Open/ Late Close ............................................... 16-4
Earth Ground Connections ........................................ 13-17
Earth Ground Fault.................................................... 13-17 I
Earth Ground to the Control Unit ............................... 13-16
Encrypted Communication ............................................ 9-1 ID Code Makeup ......................................................... 19-1
Enrolling Key or Card ................................................ 11-18 ID Code Privileges....................................................... 19-1
Entry Delay................................................................ 20-11 ID codes ...................................................................... 20-4
Event Code.................................................................... 8-4 ID Codes ................................................... 15-1, 19-1, 20-6
Exit Delay. ................................................................. 20-11 Independently powered sensor ............................ 5-17, 6-3
Exit Fail...................................................................... 20-11 Inhibit BA................................................................... 14-13
Exit Pushbutton ................................................ 11-15, 14-6 Initial Key Screen ........................................................ 15-9
Initial Vector Key ........................................................... 9-1
Input and Output Point Types...................................... 14-1
F Input Point Options...................................................... 14-8
Input Point Status ...................................................... 20-14
FCC Part 15 STATEMENT............................................ A-1 Input Point Types ........................................................ 14-1
FCC PART 68 NOTICE ................................................. A-1
Installing a Power Supply .......................................... 13-15
Features ........................................................................ 1-1
Installing Sensors to the PID ......................................... 5-7
Features of the ACIU................................................... 11-1
Installing SIM and SIM Sensors ........................... 5-17, 6-2
Fire ................................................................... 10-2, 14-10 Installing the Access Control Interface Unit................. 11-4
Fire Alarm............................................................. 7-2, 14-3
Installing the Control Unit .............................................. 2-1
Fire Alarm Application Note.............................................. vi
Installing the Control's Circuit Board ............................. 2-4
Fire Alarm Memory.................................................... 20-13
Installing the External Sounders.................................... 7-4
Fire Door Application..................................................... 6-8 Installing the Operating Panels ..................................... 3-1
Fire Marshall Code ...................................................... 19-2
Installing the PID Gateway ............................................ 5-5
fire with verification...................................................... 14-3
Installing the SIM Gateway.......................................... 5-15
First ............................................................................. 20-4
Installing the Standby Battery.................................... 13-17
Fixed............................................................................ 14-1
Interlock On............................................................... 20-12
Fixed Local .................................................................. 14-2
Irregular Off (2-Man Rule). ........................................ 20-12
G J
Gateway Log Form........................................................ 5-9
J5 Output Triggers....................................................... 10-1
Gateway Off Normal Conditions .................................. 5-29
Janitor Keyswitch ........................................................ 14-4
Gateway Screen.......................................................... 15-6
Janitor Point ................................................................ 14-9
Gateways ...................................................................... 5-1 Janitor Privilege................................................ 11-15, 14-6
General Description....................................................... 1-1
JL/JK Header ................................................................ 9-3
Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing ............................ 2-3
Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing.................... 2-4
Ground Clamp ............................................................. 23-5 K
Group 0 Keypad BA On/Off Display Inhibit................ 20-10
Group 1 Keypad BA On/Off Display Inhibit................ 20-10 Key Readers ............................................................... 11-7
Group Assignment Screen .......................................... 15-4 Keyloks............................................................... 11-6, 11-7
Group Info Screen .............................................. 15-2, 15-3 Keyswitch to the SIM Loop.......................................... 6-13
Group Number............................................................... 8-4 Kissoff ........................................................................... 8-1
Guidelines for Programming Schedules ...................... 16-3
L
H
Latch Telco Fail........................................................... 20-9
Handshake .................................................................... 8-1 Late Close ................................................................... 16-5
Hard ID Number ............................................................ 5-8 Lesson......................................................................... 20-3
Hard ID Screen............................................................ 15-6 LIM (Loop Interface Module) ....................................... 23-2
History ......................................................................... 20-4 LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM.................... A-3
History Log .................................................................. 12-1 List of Figures................................................................... xi
History Log Alpha and Event Codes............................ 12-5 Load ............................................................................ 20-4
History Log Entries ...................................................... 12-1 Load Diagrams for the RS-485 Buses......................... 13-5
Holdup..................................................... 10-2, 14-3, 14-10 Local Closing Supervision (LCS)................................. 8-10
Holdup Alarm................................................................. 7-2 Local Tests.................................................................. 21-2
Holdup Memory. ........................................................ 20-13 Lockout of Operating Panel................................ 20-4, 20-5
Holdup Special ............................................................ 14-3 Log Event .................................................................. 11-13
Index-3
Index
Long Range Radio Gateway ....................................... 5-26 Option 2 Screen .......................................................... 15-5
Long Range Radio Trouble Conditions ....................... 5-29 Option 3..................................................................... 14-13
Long Range Radios..................................................... 10-4 Option 3 Screen .......................................................... 15-5
Loop Interface Module........................................ 6-10, 6-11 Output Functions ........................................................... 7-2
LRR Gateway .............................................................. 5-27 Output Link (Option 2) ............................................... 14-13
Output Point Options ................................................. 14-13
Output Point Status ................................................... 20-14
M Output Point Types............................................. 10-1, 14-9
Main Telephone Line Supervision ................................. 8-2
Maintenance of the Access Control System .............. 11-19 P
Manual Access Pushbutton .............................. 11-14, 14-6
Marlok Keylok.............................................................. 11-8 pager message ............................................................. 8-4
Master Key ........................................................... 9-1, 15-9 Paging Service .............................................................. 8-4
Maximum Cable Runs ................................................. 22-2 Passcode No Schedule Supervision (PCNS) .............. 8-10
Maximum Length of Gateway Cable ........................... 13-9 Passcode Schedule Supervision (PCS) ........................ 8-9
Mnemonic....................................................... 14-14, 14-15 Passcode Verification Failure........................................ 8-9
More ............................................................................ 20-3 Passcode Verification Failure from Control ............... 20-10
Motorola ...................................................................... 11-8 PCB CURRENT ........................................................ 13-14
Mounting and Wiring the Operating Panel..................... 3-2 Permanent Schedule (2-Man Rule)............................. 20-9
Mounting and Wiring the Printer Interface Unit............ 12-3 Permanent Schedules ................................................. 16-2
Mounting and Wiring the RF Receiver......................... 5-24 Person Access Screens .............................................. 19-4
Mounting the AC Module............................................... 9-2 Person Data Entry Screen........................................... 19-3
Mounting the Access Control Interface Unit ................ 11-5 Person’s Name Screen ............................................... 19-4
Mounting the Cabinet .................................................... 2-2 Physical Description of ACIU ...................................... 11-2
Mounting the PID Gateway............................................ 5-6 Physical Description of the Printer Interface Unit ........ 12-2
Mounting the RF Gateway........................................... 5-23 PID Gateway ............................................... 5-2, 22-2, 23-2
Mounting the SIM Gateway ......................................... 5-15 PID Gateway Applications............................................. 5-4
Movable Delayed......................................................... 14-2 PID Gateway Physical Description................................ 5-3
Movable Delayed Chime ............................................. 14-3 PID Gateway Standby and Alarm Loads ..................... 13-2
Movable Delayed Stay................................................. 14-8 Point Data ................................................................... 15-1
Movable Instant ........................................................... 14-1 Point Info Screen......................................................... 15-3
Movable Instant Chime................................................ 14-3 Point Interface Devices (PIDs) ...................................... 5-2
Movable Instant Daytime Annunciation ....................... 14-2 Point Link ..................................... 10-3, 14-8, 14-12, 14-13
Movable Instant PIR .................................................... 14-8 Point Link Screen ........................................................ 15-4
Movable Instant Stay................................................... 14-7 Point Number ................................................................ 8-4
Multiple AC Communicator Modules ............................. 9-3 Point Type Screen....................................................... 15-3
Point Types Associated with Access Control ............ 11-14
Power Requirements............................................ 2-2, 13-1
N Power Supply module ................................................... 5-5
Power Supply Module ................................................. 23-6
Name pnt/gps .............................................................. 20-4 Power Unit Housing..................................................... 23-3
Naming BA Groups ..................................................... 15-2 Powering the FOCUS 200 PLUS ................................ 13-1
National Electric Code............................................... 13-17 Powering Up the Control Unit.................................... 13-19
New User Screen ........................................................ 19-4 Previous ...................................................................... 20-3
NFPA Life Safety applications .............................. 5-21, 6-9 Primary Phone Number Screen .................................. 15-8
No Alarm Response .................................................... 14-7 Printer Interface Unit .......................................... 12-1, 23-3
No Close...................................................................... 20-8 Printing the History Log ............................................... 12-3
Printout........................................................................ 19-6
O Printout of FOCUS 200 PLUS History Log .................. 12-4
Programming............................................................... 15-1
Programming for Downline Loading ............................ 17-1
Off Normal Condition................................................. 14-13
Programming for the AC Communicator Module........... 9-5
One Exit..................................................................... 20-11
Programming ID Codes............................................... 19-3
One Open.................................................................. 20-11
Programming Mechanics............................................. 15-2
Opening/Closing Schedules ........................................ 16-1
Programming Point Data ............................................. 15-3
Operating Panel ................................................. 20-1, 23-2
Programming the BA Groups Turn-Off Data ............... 15-7
Operating Panel Features ............................................. 3-1
Programming the Bell Outputs ...................................... 7-6
Operating Panel Modes............................................... 20-5
Programming the Output Triggers ............................... 10-6
Operating Panel Program Mode.................................... 3-4
Programming the System Communication
Operating Panel Sounder ............................................ 20-2
Options........................................................... 8-12, 15-7
Operating Panel Tests................................................. 21-1
Protection On/Off......................................................... 19-5
Operating Panels......................................................... 11-6
Option 1............................................................ 14-9, 14-13
Option 1 Screen .......................................................... 15-4
Option 2............................................................ 14-9, 14-13
Index-4
Index
SIM Sensors................................................ 5-17, 6-3, 23-5
Q Smoke Power Reset.................................................... 14-9
Sonalert on Open ........................................................ 20-9
Quit.............................................................................. 20-3
Specifications .............................................................. 22-1
Standby Battery Size................................................. 13-14
R Standby Current Limits.............................................. 13-14
Status .......................................................................... 20-4
Readers....................................................................... 11-6 STAY mode................................................................. 20-3
Real-Time Clock.......................................................... 18-1 Strobe........................................................................ 14-13
Recycling Exit Delay.................................................. 20-12 Style ‘D’ Configuration................................................... 4-4
Remote Bell...................................................... 10-3, 14-11 Successful Transmission............................................... 8-1
Remote Power Supply................................................. 14-4 Super-Degraded Mode.............................................. 11-20
Reporting Formats......................................................... 8-1 Supervised RF ............................................................ 5-25
Reset........................................................................... 20-3 Supervision of ACIU .................................................. 11-19
Resetting ..................................................................... 19-5 Supervision of the Printer Interface Units .................... 12-1
RF Gateway .............................................. 5-22, 22-3, 23-2 Supervisory .................................... 10-2, 14-3, 14-4, 14-10
RF Gateway & RF Receiver Standby and Alarm Supervisory Alarm ......................................................... 7-2
Loads....................................................................... 13-4 Supervisory Memory. ................................................ 20-13
RF Information Screen ................................................ 15-6 Sysinfo ........................................................................ 20-4
RF Programming Screen............................................. 15-6 System Communication ................................................ 8-1
RF Receiver ................................................................ 5-23 System Layout Diagram ................................................ 2-1
RPX-264 Pushbutton................................................. 11-12 System Number Screen .............................................. 17-2
RS-485 Bus #1 Current Load .................................... 13-11 System Operation........................................................ 20-1
RS-485 Bus #2 Current Load .................................... 13-11 System Self-Supervisory Signals ................................ 8-12
RS-485 Bus Load Current ........................................... 22-1 System Sensor.............................................................. 4-2
RS-485 Buses ...................................................... 5-1, 22-1 System Sensor EOL Relay Module............................... 4-3
RS-485 Cable Types ..................................................... 3-1 System Trouble ................................................ 10-3, 14-11
RS-485 Repeater ........................................................ 23-2 System-powered sensor....................................... 5-17, 6-3
S T
SANS......................................................................... 20-12 Tamper........................................................................ 22-3

Schedule Lock........................................................... 20-12 Telco Audible .............................................................. 20-7
Schedule Lockout........................................................ 16-4 Telco Fail..................................................................... 20-8
Schedules/Time........................................................... 19-5 Telco Fail Message Inhibit......................................... 20-10
Scheduling................................................................... 16-1 Telco Fault ....................................................... 10-1, 14-10
Scheduling Options ..................................................... 16-4 TELEPHONE OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS ................. A-1
Screen Duration .......................................................... 20-2 Temporary Schedule (2-Man Rule). ............................ 20-9
See alarms .................................................................. 20-3 Temporary Schedules ................................................. 16-3
See points ................................................................... 20-3 Test ............................................................................. 20-3
Sensor Interface Module ............................................. 23-2 Test Options................................................................ 21-3
Sensor Interface Module (SIM)............................. 5-13, 6-1 Test Screen................................................................. 21-2
Sensor Load for a SIM or PID Gateway .................... 13-10 Testing ........................................................................ 19-6
Sensor Power................................................................ 5-7 Testing Burglary Groups ............................................. 21-2
Sensor Walk LED Disable ......................................... 20-10 Testing Sensor Points ................................................. 21-3
Service ............................................................. 10-1, 14-10 Testing the Printer....................................................... 21-4
Service (2-Man Rule)................................................... 20-9 Testing the System...................................................... 21-1
Service Code............................................................... 19-2 Testing the Transmitters.............................................. 5-26
Service Mode .............................................................. 20-5 Time ............................................................................ 20-4
Service Telephone Jack ................................................ 8-2 Time Screen................................................................ 18-1
Service Terminal Phone Number Screen .................... 17-2 Total Peripheral Current Load ................................... 13-13
Setting the Address of the Operating Panel .................. 3-3 Training Mode ............................................................. 20-6
Setting the Time and Date........................................... 18-1 Transmission Tests ..................................................... 21-3
SIA Report Codes ......................................................... 8-5 Transmitter Battery Life ............................................... 5-26
Silence....................................................................... 14-13 Transmitter Input Types .............................................. 5-25
SIM Gateway......................................5-13, 6-1, 22-2, 23-2 Transmitter Supervision .............................................. 5-25
SIM Gateway Applications........................................... 5-14 Trouble Memory. ....................................................... 20-13
SIM Gateway Physical Description.............................. 5-13 Troubleshooting ACIU ............................................... 11-20
SIM Gateway Standby and Alarm Loads..................... 13-3 Turn on........................................................................ 20-3
SIM Loop ....................................................................... 6-1 Turn On STAY Mode................................................... 20-8
SIM Loop Applications................................................... 6-2 Types of Customer Monitoring Center Service.............. 8-9
SIM Loop Log Form....................................................... 6-4
SIM Loop Standby and Alarm Loads........................... 13-4
SIM Loop Supervision ................................................... 6-2
Index-5
Index
Wiring Bell Outputs........................................................ 7-6
U Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Points 1-8 .......... 4-2
Wiring the AC Module ................................................... 9-2
Unlock Time .............................................................. 11-13
Wiring the Access Control Interface Unit..................... 11-6
Unsolicited Upload ...................................................... 17-3
Wiring the Auxiliary Relay ............................................. 7-6
Unsupervised RF......................................................... 5-25
Wiring the Electric Door Strike .................................... 11-9
User Access Limitations .............................................. 16-1 Wiring the Hardwired Points.......................................... 4-1
User Number ................................................................. 8-4
Wiring the PID gateway................................................. 5-6
User Privileges .......................................................... 11-17
Wiring the RF Gateway ............................................... 5-23
Wiring the SIM Gateway.............................................. 5-16
V Working Encryption Key #1 Screen............................. 15-9
Working Encryption Key #2 Screen............................. 15-9
Vault Vibration Sensor........................................ 14-2, 14-3 Working Encryption Key #3 Screen........................... 15-10
Verifying the Downline Loaded Data ........................... 17-4 Working Encryption Key #4 Screen........................... 15-10
Viewing........................................................................ 19-6 Working Keys ................................................................ 9-1
VISTA-ULAP Attack Proof Kit...................................... 23-2 Worksheets to calculate the total current .................. 13-10
VISTA-ULAP UL Attack Proof Kit .................................. 2-2
Voltage Drops along the RS-485 Buses...................... 13-8 X
Voltage for Each Gateway and Operating Panel ......... 13-1
XMIT Denied ............................................................. 11-13
W XMIT Invalid .............................................................. 11-13
Waterflow .................................................................... 14-5 Y

Wiegand ...................................................................... 11-8
Wiegand Output Keypad ............................................. 11-8
Yuasa ........................................................................ 13-15
Index-6
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC) Part 15 STATEMENT
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
IN THE EVENT OF TELEPHONE OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS
In the event of telephone operational problems, disconnect the control panel by removing the plug from the RJ31X (CA38A
in Canada) wall jack. We recommend that you demonstrate disconnecting the phones on installation of the system. Do not
disconnect the phone connection inside the Control Panel. Doing so will result in the loss of your phone lines. If the regular
phone works correctly after the Control Panel has been disconnected from the phone lines, the Control Panel has a problem
and should be returned for repair. If upon disconnection of the Control Panel, there is still a problem on the line, notify the
telephone company that they have a problem and request prompt repair service. The user may not under any circumstances
(in or out of warranty) attempt any service or repairs to the system. It must be returned to the factory or an authorized service
agency for all repairs.
FCC PART 68 NOTICE
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the front cover of this equipment is a label that contains, among
other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this
information must be provided to the telephone company.
This equipment uses the following jacks:
An RJ31X is used to connect this equipment to the telephone network.
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the
telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the
RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined
by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary
discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer
as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the
operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the
necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please contact the manufacturer for repair and warranty information. If the
trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request you remove the equipment from the
network until the problem is resolved.
There are no user serviceable components in this product, and all necessary repairs must be made by the manufacturer. Other
repair methods may invalidate the FCC registration on this product.
This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party Line Service is subject to
state tariffs.
This equipment is hearing-aid compatible.
When programming or making test calls to an emergency number, briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call.
Perform such activities in the off-peak hours; such as early morning or late evening.
A-1
CANADIAN EMISSIONS STATEMENTS
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003
NOTICE AVIS
The Industry Canada Label identifies certified equipment. L’étiquette d’Industrie Canada identifie le matériel
This certification means that the equipment meets homologué. Cette étiquette certifie que le matériel est
telecommunications network protective, operational and conforme aux normes de protection, d’exploitation et de
safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate sécurité des réseaux de télécommunications, comme le
Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements prescrivent les documents concernant les exigences
document(s). The Department does not guarantee the techniques relatives au matériel terminal. Le Ministère
equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction. n’assure toutefois pas que le matériel fonctionnera à la
satisfaction de l’utilisateur.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that
it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the Avant d’installer ce matériel, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer
local telecommunications company. The equipment must qu’il est permis de le raccorder aux installations de
also be installed using an acceptable method of l’enterprise locale de télécommunication. Le matériel doit
connection. The customer should be aware that également être installé en suivant une méthode acceptée
compliance with the above conditions may not prevent da raccordement. L’abonné ne doit pas oublier qu’il est
degradation of service in some situations. possible que la conformité aux conditions énoncées ci-
dessus n’empêche pas la dégradation du service dans
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a
certaines situations.
representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or
alterations made by the user to this equipment, or Les réparations de matériel nomologué doivent être
equipment malfunctions, may give the coordonnées par un représentant désigné par le
telecommunications company to request the user to fournisseur. L’entreprise de télécommunications peut
disconnect the equipment. demander à l’utilisateur da débrancher un appareil à la
suite de réparations ou de modifications effectuées par
Users should ensure for their own protection that the
l’utilisateur ou à cause de mauvais fonctionnement.
electrical ground connections of the power utility,
telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if Pour sa propre protection, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer que
present, are connected together, This precaution may be tous les fils de mise à la terre de la source d’energie
particularly important in rural areas. électrique, de lignes téléphoniques et des canalisations
d’eau métalliques, s’il y en a, sont raccordés ensemble.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such Cette précaution est particulièrement importante dans les
connections themselves but should contact appropriate régions rurales.
electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
Avertissement : L’utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire
NOTICE: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) ces raccordements lui-même; il doit avoir racours à un
assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of service d’inspection des installations électriques, ou à un
the maximum number of terminals allowed to be électricien, selon le cas.
connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an
interface may consist of any combination of devices AVIS : L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie (IES)
subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer assigné à chaque dispositif terminal indique le nombre
Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed maximal de terminaux qui peuvent être raccordés à une
5. interface. La terminaison d’une interface téléphonique
peut consister en une combinaison de quelques dispositifs,
à la seule condition que la somme d’indices d’équivalence
de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excède pas 5.
A-2
WARNING!
THE LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM
While this System is an advanced wireless security system, it does not offer guaranteed protection against burglary, fire
or other emergency. Any alarm system, whether commercial or residential, is subject to compromise or failure to warn for
a variety of reasons. For example:
• Intruders may gain access through unprotected openings or have the technical sophistication to bypass an alarm
sensor or disconnect an alarm warning device.
• Intrusion detectors (e.g., passive infrared detectors), smoke detectors, and many other sensing devices will not work
without power. Battery-operated devices will not work without batteries, with dead batteries, or if the batteries are
not put in properly. Devices powered solely by AC will not work if their AC power supply is cut off for any reason,
however briefly.
• Signals sent by wireless transmitters may be blocked or reflected by metal before they reach the alarm receiver. Even
if the signal path has been recently checked during a weekly test, blockage can occur if a metal object is moved into
the path.
• A user may not be able to reach a panic or emergency button quickly enough.
• While smoke detectors have played a key role in reducing residential fire deaths in the United States, they may not
activate or provide early warning for a variety of reasons in as many as 35% of all fires, according to data published
by the Federal Emergency Management Agency. Some of the reasons smoke detectors used in conjunction with this
System may not work are as follows. Smoke detectors may have been improperly installed and positioned. Smoke
detectors may not sense fires that start where smoke cannot reach the detectors, such as in chimneys, in walls, or
roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level of a residence or
building. A second floor detector, for example, may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Finally, smoke detectors
have sensing limitations. No smoke detector can sense every kind of fire every time. In general, detectors may not
always warn about fires caused by carelessness and safety hazards like smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping
gas, improper storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches, or arson.
Depending on the nature of the fire and/or location of the smoke detectors, the detector, even if it operates as
anticipated, may not provide sufficient warning to allow all occupants to escape in time to prevent injury or death.
• Passive Infrared Motion Detectors can only detect intrusion within the designed ranges as diagrammed in their
installation manual. Passive Infrared Detectors do not provide volumetric area protection. They do create multiple
beams of protection, and intrusion can only be detected in unobstructed areas covered by those beams. They cannot
detect motion or intrusion that takes place behind walls, ceilings, floors, closed doors, glass partitions, glass doors, or
windows. Mechanical tampering, masking, painting or spraying of any material on the mirrors, windows or any part
of the optical system can reduce their detection ability. Passive Infrared Detectors sense changes in temperature;
however, as the ambient temperature of the protected area approaches the temperature range of 90° to 105°F (32° to
40°C), the detection performance can decrease.
• Alarm warning devices such as sirens, bells or horns may not alert people or wake up sleepers if they are located on
the other side of closed or partly open doors. If warning devices are located on a different level of the residence from
the bedrooms, then they are less likely to waken or alert people inside the bedrooms. Even persons who are awake
may not hear the warning if the alarm is muffled by noise from a stereo, radio, air conditioner or other appliance, or
by passing traffic. Finally, alarm warning devices, however loud, may not warn hearing-impaired people.
• Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premises to a central monitoring station may be out of
service or temporarily out of service. Telephone lines are also subject to compromise by sophisticated intruders.
• Even if the system responds to the emergency as intended, however, occupants may have insufficient time to protect
themselves from the emergency situation. In the case of a monitored alarm system, authorities may not respond
appropriately.
• This equipment, like other electrical devices, is subject to component failure. Even though this equipment is
designed to last as long as 20 years, the electronic components could fail at any time.
The most common cause of an alarm system not functioning when an intrusion or fire occurs is inadequate maintenance.
This alarm system should be tested weekly to make sure all sensors and transmitters are working properly. The security
keypad (and remote keypad) should be tested as well.
Wireless transmitters (used in some systems) are designed to provide long battery life under normal operating conditions.
Longevity of batteries may be as much as 4 to 7 years, depending on the environment, usage, and the specific wireless
device being used. External factors such as humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large swings in temperature,
may all reduce the actual battery life in a given installation. This wireless system, however, can identify a true low
battery situation, thus allowing time to arrange a change of battery to maintain protection for that given point within the
system.
Installing an alarm system may make the owner eligible for a lower insurance rate, but an alarm system is not a
substitute for insurance. Homeowners, property owners and renters should continue to act prudently in protecting
themselves and continue to insure their lives and property. We continue to develop new and improved protection devices.
Users of alarm systems owe it to themselves and their loved ones to learn about these developments.
A-3
A-4
WARNING: OWNER'S INSTRUCTION NOTICE NOT TO BE REMOVED AC TEST BURGLARY SYSTEM WEEKLY
NOTES LED
REFER TO INSTRUCTIONS K3471 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION J5 VOLTAGE TRIGGERS J5
NOTE 1: TYPES OF FIRE SIGNALLING SERVICE: (not supervised) 1
WARNING:
The combined standby current THIS UNIT MAY BE PROGRAMMED TO Manual fire alarm, automatic fire alarm, sprinkler supervisory and waterflow alarm. See instructions for trigger use 2
BATTERY TABS and programming. 3
drawn from aux pwr #2, aux pwr #3 INCLUDE AN ALARM VERIFICATION UL Listed local control (non-coded). 1. GROUND (BLACK) 4
Make connections
and aux relay terminal 10 (when Connect to 12V, 7AH min/34.4AH max UL Listed central station, proprietary and Remote Station protected premises unit 2. OUT 1 (BLUE) 5 using 472412 cable
+ RED lead acid batteries using cables supplied. FEATURE THAT WILL RESULT IN A DELAY (not supplied)
wet) can not exceed 1.0A. The OF THE SYSTEM ALARM SIGNAL FROM when used with back-up dialer module. Installation limits under jurisdiction 3. OUT 2 (BROWN) 6
combined alarm current drawn See instructions for required capacity. of local authority.
4. OUT 3 (GREEN) 7
Float charging voltage: 13.7VDC. Battery THE INDICATED FIRE CIRCUITS. THE 5. OUT 4 (RED) 8
from aux pwr #2, aux pwr #3, aux - BLK normally need not be replaced for TOTAL DELAY (CONTROL UNIT PLUS 6. OUT 5 (WHITE) 9
relay terminal 10 (when wet), bell 1 SMOKE DETECTORS) SHALL NOT EXCEED The 472402A Dialer 7. OUT 6 (YELLOW)
and bell 2 cannot exceed 1.5A at least 3 yrs. Battery connection is Complies with FCC Rules, Part 68 8. OUT 7 (GRAY)
Cabinet
supervised. 60 SECONDS. NO OTHER INITIATING BACK-UP LINE SEIZE FCC Reg. No.: AC398U-68628-MO-N 9. OUT 8 (VIOLET)
when 443216 or N8167 transformer DEVICES SHALL BE CONNECTED TO LED (GREEN) Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B Ratings: Tamper
is used, and 2.3A when 472404 POWER SWITCH THESE CIRCUITS UNLESS APPROVED BY Low Output: 0.7V thru 100 ohm Input
transformer is used. THE LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING BACK-UP
can sink 33mA with 4V drop
High Output: 12V thru 4k ohm
NOTE 2: P4 JURISDICTION. PHONE JACK MAIN DIALER
Use 472411 2k EOLR for listed fire SEE TELCO RJ31X
ON 1 CIRCUIT CONTROL UNIT SMOKE DETECTOR JACK SHOCK
LED
installations. (supplied) 2 (POINT) DELAY-SEC MODEL DELAY-SEC WARNING
OFF 3 Connect to main PCB
NOTE 3: header J6 using ribbon
BELOW
See instructions for max. # of JUMPER P4 cable (supplied) (connect using supplied cable)
keypads and wire run length ALARM CURRENT Supervision is programmable
restrictions. Attach 472402A BACK-UP TLM ON HOOK
Pins 1 & 2 shorted = 2.3A BACK-UP DIALER EARTH J6
module to main VOLTAGE THRESHOLD (BLUE) GROUND SCREW
Must use with 47204 transformer. INTACT: 25V 1
PCB using 3 (wire to main PCB,
Pins 2 & 3 shorted = 1.5A CUT: 13V terminal 3 or 4) 2
Must use with 443216/N8167 THE DELAY TIME MARKED ON THE INSTALLED standoffs 3
transformer. DETECTOR(S) IS TO BE USED (supplied) OPTIONAL 472402A BACK-UP DIALER MODULE 4 Backup Dial Header472402A
FTA7518ULC plug-in 5
or AC communication module
transformer (optional) 6
472491 Jack
7
INPUT: 120VAC, 8
0.59A, 60 Hz connect THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN CONNECTION OF THE FIRE ALARM
to unswitched outlet The Focus Built-in Dialer 9
OUTPUT: 18VAC, 75VA ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL FIRE SIGNAL TO A FIRE ALARM HEAD- Complies with FCC Rules, Part 68
PROTECTION ASSOCIATION'S STANDARD 72, QUARTERS OR A CENTRAL STATION
472404 wired-in
SHALL BE PERMITTED ONLY WITH FCC Reg. No.: AC398R-68192-AL-E
transformer with CHAPTER 3 (NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B
enclosure THE APPROVAL OF THE LOCAL
INPUT: 120VAC, 1.0A,
ASSOC., BATTERYMARCH PARK, QUINCY, AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION.
60Hz connect to a MA. 02269). PRINTED INFORMATION DESCRIBING P3 THE BURGLARY ALARM SIGNAL THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF FCC RULES.
443216 or N8167 plug-in dedicated circuit PROPER INSTALLATION, OPERATION, TESTING, 1 OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO
transformer (optional) SHALL NOT BE CONNECTED TO A
OUTPUT: 18VAC, 72VA MAINTENANCE, AND REPAIR SERVICE IS TO BE 2 POLICE EMERGENCY NUMBER. CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL
INPUT: 120VAC,
0.59A, 60 Hz connect OUTPUT PROVIDED WITH THIS EQUIPMENT. 3 INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY
to unswitched outlet BL BL
JUMPER P3 Aux Relay Setting
OUTPUT: 18VAC, 50VA INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFERENCE
Pins 1 & 2 shorted = wet THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
Pins 2 & 3 shorted = dry MAIN Connect
WH BK SERVICE RJ31X using
INPUT TRNSFMR GND BELL OUTPUTS AUX. RELAY RS-485 #1 RS-485 #2 POINT 1 POINT 2 POINT 3 POINT 4 POINT 5 POINT6 POINT 7 POINT 8 cable supplied.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RJ31X Supervision is
9 10 11 12 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
programmable.
JACK PHONE JACK
AC WIRING IS
SUPERVISED
)
RE
ND
RY
BELL 1 BELL 2
PA
OU
T/D
+ - + -
.
OOP
OOP
N.C
N.O
(S
OR LKE
Data
OR LKE
GR
Data
Data
Data
WE
EARTH GROUND
NOTE:
DET IRE SMO
DET IRE SMO

BELL BELL
EARTH GROUND
443216 may not be used for listed commercial fire + - + - WARNING: TO PREVENT
ECT
ECT
installations. Total alarm current is limited to 1.5A. AUX RELAY (FORM C) Blue Yel Red Blk Blue Yel Red Blk
RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK,
2-W
2-W
Short pins 2 & 3 on P4. programmable response (not supervised)
472404 may be used for all listed commercial (burg,
HORN HORN
WHEN WET: 12V terminal 10,
+ - + - + - - + + -
DISCONNECT TELCO JACK
1.7A max., see note 1. AUXILIARY POWER #2 & #3
fire, burg/fire) installations. Total alarm current is
WHEN DRY: No voltage on terminal 10, (Not Supervised) - + BEFORE SERVICING THIS PANEL.
limited to 2.3A, see note 1. Short pins 1 & 2 on P4. SMOKE SMOKE - + + -
FTA7518ULC may be used for all listed commercial 2k (note 2) 2k Contact Rating: 28V, 2A max., Rating: 12VDC, 1.0A max.
(burg, fire, burg/fire) installations. Total alarm current resistive loads. See note 1.
ALARM POLARITY SHOWN POINT 1-8 NOTES N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C.
is limited to 2.3A, see note 1. Short pins 1 & 2 on P4. • All points provide Style B supervision N.C. N.C. N.C.
ALL CIRCUITS ARE POWER
• Point resistance (excluding EOLR): LIMITED EXCEPT THE OUTPUT
FIRE CKTS: Supervise using 2k EOLR. - Points 1, 2: 100 ohms max
Use polarized sounding devices. - Other points: 300 ohms max N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. OF THE 472404 TRANSFORMER
BURG CKTS: Supervision not req'd. • Point response: 350 - 500mS (all points)
2k (note 2) 2k 2k 2k 2k 2k 2k 2k + -
EOLRs not req'd. May use non • Ratings for points 1, 2:
polarized devices. Ratings: 12VDC, 1.7A max. - 10 - 14VDC SIM Loop
See note 1. See instructions to enable/disable - 2mA max for smoke det. (up to 16 detectors Points 3 & 4 may Bell Box
supervision and for compatible devices. of the type specified in the instructions be set for a Style "D" Tamper
can be used) configuration.
• UL compatibility ID: A
Do not mix fire and burg. sensors on one loop.
N.C. contacts for burg. usage only.
FOCUS 200 PLUS SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS

(472462A)
ADT Security Services, Inc.
One Town Center Road
Boca Raton, FL 33486
Copyright  1999
¬.9Jl
K3471-1V1 4/01

Adt Focus

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Adt Focus

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Adt Focus

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

)2&863/86

Number of Points 255 255

Number of Access 255 999

Number of 16 (8 per Communication Group) 16 (8 per Communication Group)

Built-in Hardwired 8 Hardwired Points 8 Hardwired Points

History Log • Total of 512 events • Total of 1024 events

SIM /PID Gateways 8 8

Printer Interface Supports 8 Printers Supports 8 Printers

Built-in SIM Loop Not Supported • Assign to Gateway Unit #9

Built-in Output 8 Output Triggers 8 Output Triggers

Dialer • Main dialer is built-in • Main dialer is built-in

DES Encryption Not Supported Supported on AC Communicator module

Cabinet Vista-100 cabinet Vista-100 cabinet

SRAM 128k bytes 128k bytes

About Fire Alarm Codes

List of Figures ...................................................................................................................xi

SECTION 1 General Description ................................................... 1-1

SECTION 2 Installing the Control Unit ....................................... 2-1

SECTION 3 Installing the Operating Panels............................... 3-1

SECTION 4 Basic Hardwired Points ............................................ 4-1

SECTION 5 Gateways ...................................................................... 5-1

SECTION 6 Built-in SIM Loop ....................................................... 6-1

SECTION 7 Bell Outputs and Auxiliary Relay ............................ 7-1

SECTION 8 System Communication ............................................. 8-1

SECTION 9 AC Communicator Module ........................................ 9-1

SECTION 10 J5 Output Triggers ................................................... 10-1

SECTION 11 Access Control ........................................................... 11-1

SECTION 12 History Log................................................................. 12-1

SECTION 13 Power Requirements................................................. 13-1

SECTION 14 Input and Output Point Types ................................ 14-1

SECTION 15 Programming ............................................................ 15-1

SECTION 16 Scheduling................................................................. 16-1

SECTION 17 Downline Loading .................................................... 17-1

SECTION 18 Real-Time Clock........................................................ 18-1

SECTION 19 ID Codes ..................................................................... 19-1

SECTION 20 System Operation...................................................... 20-1

SECTION 21 Testing the System .................................................... 21-1

SECTION 22 Specifications............................................................ 22-1

SECTION 23 Equipment.................................................................. 23-1

Limitations of This Alarm System .............................................................................. A-3

Figure 2-1: Installing Cabinet Lock ................................................................................................................................. 2-2

About the FOCUS 200 PLUS System

Expansion Capabilities User Functions

Installing the Control Unit

About the Control Unit

Before Installing the System

Mounting the Cabinet

Installing the Cabinet Lock

remove the metal knockouts for the

CIRCUIT BOARD HAS BEEN

2. Fasten the control unit to the

Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing

CABINET ATTACK RESISTANCE CONSIDERATIONS

TO PLUG AN UNUSED KNOCKOUT OPENING, REMOVE KNOCKOUT AND

BACK CARRIAGE BOLT

HEX NUT AND

Figure 2-2: Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations

Green Wire (Trigger Output 3) Door Tamper Switch

)2&863/86

Point # Description _ Point # Description _____

Point # Description _ Point # Description _____

Point # Description _ Point # Description _____

Point # Description _ Point # Description _____

Point # Description _ Point # Description _____

Point # Description _ Point # Description _____

Point # Description _ Point # Description _____

Point # Description _ Point # Description _____